Instruction Manual: Shimadzu Spectrophotometer

206-98410C
Jul. 2020
Shimadzu Spectrophotometer
UV-1280
Instruction Manual
Read this manual thoroughly before you use the product.
Keep this manual for future reference.
This page is intentionally left blank.
Introduction
Read this manual thoroughly before using the instrument.
Thank you for purchasing this instrument. This manual describes installation, operation,
hardware validation, cautions for use, and details on accessories and options. Read the
manual thoroughly before using the instrument. Use the instrument in accordance with
the manual's instructions. Keep this manual for future reference.
IMPORTANT
• If the user or usage location changes, ensure that this Instruction Manual is always kept together with the
product.
• If this manual or a product warning label is lost or damaged, immediately contact your Shimadzu
representative to request a replacement.
• To ensure safe operation, read "Safety Instructions" thoroughly before using the product.
• To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative if product installation, adjustment, re-
installation (after the product is moved), or repair is required.
COPYRIGHT • Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of the vendor.
• Any errors or omissions which may have occurred in this publication despite the
utmost care taken in its production will be corrected as soon as possible, but not
necessarily immediately upon detection.
• All rights are reserved, including those to reproduce this publication or parts thereof in
any form without permission in writing from Shimadzu Corporation.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries.
Third-party trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to
either the entities or their products/services, whether or not they are used with
trademark symbol "TM" or "®".
© 2014-2020 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.

Original version is approved in English.
UV-1280 i
Indications Used in This Manual
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes are indicated using the following conventions:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in serious
WARNING injury or possibly death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor to
CAUTION moderate injury or equipment damage.
Emphasizes additional information that is provided to ensure the proper use of this
NOTE product.
The symbol used in this manual is as follows:
Indicates information provided to improve product performance.
^ Indicates the location of related reference information.
ii UV-1280
Safety Instructions
The UV-1280 is an ultraviolet/visible/near-infrared spectrophotometer.

For the safety operation of this instrument, strictly observe the following precautions:
(1) Do NOT use the instrument for any purpose other than its intended use.
(2) Read and follow the procedures in the instruction manual.
(3) Follow all WARNING and CAUTION instructions given in this manual.
(4) Do NOT disassemble or modify this instrument without permission.
(5) If any repair to the inside of this instrument is necessary, contact your Shimadzu representative.
(6) Contact your Shimadzu representative for installation, adjustment, or re-installation (after the instrument is
moved) is required.
To ensure safe product operation, read these important safety instructions carefully before use and follow all
WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE instructions given in this section.
Installation Site Precautions
WARNING
When using flammable and toxic samples, be sure to install ventilation equipment at an
installation site.
CAUTION
• The weight of this instrument is 10 kg. During installation, consider the entire weight
combined with other instruments.
The lab table on which this instrument is installed should be strong enough to support
the total weight of this instrument. It should be level stable, and have depth of at least
600 mm.
Otherwise, the instrument could tip over or fall off the table.
• Avoid installation sites that are exposed to corrosive gases or excessive dust.
These adverse conditions may be detrimental to maintaining instrument performance
and may shorten its service life.
NOTE
Install the product in an indoor location under the following classifications: installation category II,
pollution level 2, and altitude 2,000 meters max.
UV-1280 iii
Installation Precautions
To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative for installation, adjustment, or re-installation
after moving the instrument to a different site.
WARNING
• Take measures to prevent the instrument from falling in the event of earthquake or
other disaster.
Strong vibrations could cause the instrument to fall over, resulting in injury.
• The power supply voltages and power consumptions of this instrument are listed below.
The power supply voltage of the instrument is indicated on the label on the side of the
instrument. Connect the instrument only to a power supply of the voltage indicated;
otherwise, fire or electric shock could result. Check that the power supply voltage is
stable and that its current capacity is sufficient to operate all the components of the
system. If not, the instrument will not operate at its rated performance.
Power Supply Voltage Power Short circuit

Frequency
(Indicated on the instrument) Consumption rating
AC100 V-240 V
140 VA 50/60 Hz 40 A
(100-240 V ~)
• Ground the instrument

Grounding is necessary to prevent electric shock in the event of an accident or
electrical discharge, and important for ensuring stable operation.
• Do not place heavy objects on the power cord, and keep any hot items away.
The cord could be damaged, resulting in fire, electrical shock or malfunction. If the cord
becomes damaged, contact your Shimadzu representative immediately.
• Do not modify the cord in any way. Do not bend it excessively or pull on it.
The cord could be damaged, resulting in fire, electrical shock or malfunction. If the cord
becomes damaged, contact your Shimadzu representative immediately.
• Please make sure to use only the power cord specified by Shimadzu.
iv UV-1280
Operation Precautions
WARNING
• Always wear protective gloves, glasses, etc. when handling any toxic or biologically
infectious samples.
• Do not use flammable sprays (hair sprays, insecticide sprays, etc.) near the instrument.
They could ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
• If a sample is spilled, follow the handling and disposal instructions in the Safety Data
Sheet (SDS).
• Be careful not to apply liquid to office equipment such as the PC as well as the
instrument.
NOTE
Do not use mobile phones near the product. They may damage data.
UV-1280 v
Precautions for Instrument Inspection, Maintenance,
Adjustment and Care.
WARNING
• Unplug the instrument before inspection, maintenance, or parts replacement.
Otherwise, electrical shock or short-circuit accidents could occur.
• Never remove the main cover.

This may cause injury or malfunction of the instrument.
The main cover does not need to be removed for routine maintenance, inspection and adjustment.
Have your Shimadzu representative perform any repairs requiring removal of the main cover.
• If the power cord plug gets dusty, remove the plug from the power outlet and wipe away
the dust with a dry cloth.
If dust is allowed to accumulate, fire could result.
• Replacement parts must be of the specifications given in "1.1 UV-1280 Configuration"

and "21.4 Replacing the Light Source".
Use of any other parts may result in instrument damage and malfunction.
• If any water gets onto the instrument, wipe it away immediately to prevent rust. Never
use alcohol or thinner solvents for cleaning the instrument.
They could cause discoloration.
• Dispose waste liquid properly and in accordance with the instructions of your
administrative department.
vi UV-1280
Emergency Operation
In an emergency situation, press the " " side of the power switch located on the backside bottom of the
instrument.
Power OFF
(" " side is pressed in.)
Operation at Power Outage

In case of electrical failure, perform the following operations:
1. Press the " " side of the power switch located on the backside bottom of the UV-1280 to turn OFF the
instrument.
2. After the power comes back on, start up the UV-1280 normally by following "Installation Precautions" and
"Operation Precautions".
UV-1280 vii
Warning Labels
For safety operation, warning labels are affixed where special attention is required.
Should any of these labels peel off or be damaged, obtain replacements from Shimadzu Corporation.
(Rear view)
High Temperature
When replacing the lamp, turn off the
power and allow it to cool.
Ultraviolet Light Hazard

Do NOT look directly at light with lamp ON.
Doing so may hurt eyes.
viii UV-1280
Residual Risk Information
A residual risk indicates a risk that could not be reduced or eliminated in the process of design and
manufacture. Check the risk locations in "Residual Risk Map", and take the relevant protective measures
described in "List of Residual Risks".
 Residual Risk Map

The "Mechanical Location" and "No." indicated below are in accordance with those in
"List of Residual Risks". For details, see "List of Residual Risks".
Mechanical Location B
Mechanical Location A No.4, 5
No.2 No.3, 6
Residual Risk with No Specific Mechanical Location

No.1, 7
No.8
UV-1280 ix
 List of Residual Risks
The "No." and "Mechanical Location" indicated below are in accordance with those in "Residual Risk
Map". Be sure to check the actual "Mechanical Location" referring to "Residual Risk Map".
Furthermore, read through and understand the content in "Reference" to take appropriate protective
measures.
Preparation
Protective Measure
Mechanical
No. Description taken by machine - -
Location
user
"Installation Site
Reference
Precautions" P.iii
Vaporized When using
Operation Sample
sample may flammable or toxic
No specific Category installation
1 catch fire. samples, provide
location
Vaporized toxic adequate Qualified person
Required
material may do ventilation. received training
Qualification/
harm. to use the
Education
instrument
"Operation
Reference
Precautions" P.v
The sample may
Operation Sample
spill on your Wear protective
Category installation
body because gloves when using
2 A
the cover closes toxic/biohazardous
Qualified person
during cell samples. Required
received training
replacement and Qualification/
to use the
it may result in Education
instrument
harm.
Operation
Protective Measure
Mechanical
Location
user
"21.4.2 Lamp
Reference Replacement
If the lamp is Wear protective Procedure" P.21-8
dirtied by gloves when
Operation
fingerprints, or replacing the lamp Lamp lighting
3 B Category
overheats the to prevent it from
lamp may being soiled by Qualified person
Required
damage the fingerprints, etc. received training
Qualification/
instrument or to use the
Education
explode. instrument
x UV-1280
Maintenance
Protective Measure
Mechanical
Location
user
"21.4.2 Lamp
Reference Replacement
Procedure" P.21-8
When replacing the
If the lamp is
lamp, turn "OFF" the Operation Lamp
replaced while it
4 B power and remove Category replacement
is turned on, it
the power plug from
may cause burns Qualified person
the outlet. Required
or electric shock. received training
Qualification/
to control the
Education
instrument
"21.4.2 Lamp
When replacing the Reference Replacement
lamp, turn "OFF" the Procedure" P.21-8
power and remove
If the lamp is Operation Lamp
the power plug from
5 B replaced while it Category replacement
the outlet.
is hot, it may
Then, leave it until Qualified person
cause burns. Required
the lamp cools received training
Qualification/
down. to control the
Education
instrument
"21.4.2 Lamp
Comply with Reference Replacement
Lamp damage or instructions in the Procedure" P.21-8
explosion, due to manual during lamp
Operation Lamp
careless replacement.
6 B Category replacement
handling during Be careful not to
replacement, bump the lamp Qualified person
Required
may result in against other received training
Qualification/
injury. objects. to control the
Education
instrument
UV-1280 xi
Installation
Protective Measure
Mechanical
Location
user
"Installation
Reference
Precautions" P.iv
Vibration due to
Take Operation Instrument
an earthquake
No specific countermeasures to Category installation
7 may cause
location prevent toppling
toppling over of
over. Required
the instrument Instrument
Qualification/
and it may result manager
Education
in an injury.
The weight of the "Installation Site

Reference
main body is 10 kg. Precautions" P.iii
Install the instrument
Operation Instrument
on a desk or a stand
Category installation
that can sufficiently
No specific Falling or support the total
8
location dropping may weight of the
cause an injury. instrument including Required
Instrument
peripherals and has Qualification/
manager
a flat and stable Education
surface with at least
600 mm depth.
xii UV-1280
Warranty
Shimadzu provides the following warranty for this product.
1. Period: Please contact your Shimadzu representative for information about the period of
this warranty.
The warranty period of the WI lamp (halogen lamp) and D2 lamp (deuterium lamp)
is 2000 hours or 1 year, whichever comes first.
2. Description: If a product/part failure occurs for reasons attributable to Shimadzu during the
warranty period, Shimadzu will repair or replace the product/part free of charge.
However, in the case of products which are usually available on the market only
for a short time, such as personal computers and their peripherals/parts,
Shimadzu may not be able to provide identical replacement products.
3. Limitation of Liability: 1. In no event will Shimadzu be liable for any lost revenue, profit or data, or for
special, indirect, consequential, incidental or punitive damages, however
caused regardless of the theory of liability, arising out of or related to the use of
or inability to use the product, even if Shimadzu has been advised of the
possibility of such damage.
2. In no event will Shimadzu's liability to you, whether in contract, tort (including
negligence), or otherwise, exceed the amount you paid for the product.
4. Exceptions: Failures caused by the following are excluded from the warranty, even if they
occur during the warranty period.
1) Improper product handling
2) Repairs or modifications performed by parties other than Shimadzu
or Shimadzu designated companies
3) Product use in combination with hardware or software other than
that designated by Shimadzu
4) Computer viruses leading to device failures and damage to data
and software, including the product's basic software
5) Power failures, including power outages and sudden voltage drops,
leading to device failures and damage to data and software,
including the product's basic software
6) Turning OFF the product without following the proper shutdown
procedure leading to device failures and damage to data and
software, including the product's basic software
7) Reasons unrelated to the product itself
8) Product use in harsh environments, such as those subject to high
temperatures or humidity levels, corrosive gases, or strong
vibrations
9) Fires, earthquakes, or any other act of nature, contamination by
radioactive or hazardous substances, or any other force majeure
event, including wars, riots, and crimes
10) Product movement or transportation after installation
11) Consumables and equivalent items
Recording media such as CD-ROMs are considered consumable
items.
* If there is a document such as a warranty provided with the product, or there is a separate contract agreed
upon that includes warranty conditions, the provisions of those documents shall apply.
UV-1280 xiii
After-Sales Service and Replacement Parts Availability
After-Sales Service If any problem occurs with this product, perform an inspection and take
appropriate corrective action as described in the troubleshooting section of this
manual.
If the problem persists, or the symptoms are not covered in the troubleshooting
section, contact your Shimadzu representative.
Replacement Parts Replacement parts for this product will be available for a period of seven (7) years
Availability after the product is discontinued. Thereafter, such parts may cease to be
available.
If Shimadzu receives notice of the discontinuation of units or parts, the necessary
quantity for the above period is immediately calculated and secured. However,
such units or parts may cease to be available within seven years after the
discontinuation of the product, depending on the conditions of individual
manufacturers and on changes in the quantity required.
Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment
In order to maintain the instrument's performance and obtain accurate measurement data, daily inspection and
periodic inspection are necessary.
• For daily maintenance, inspection, and replacement parts, see "21 Maintenance & Inspection" of this
Instruction Manual.
• Periodic inspection should be requested to your Shimadzu representative.
• Replacement cycles described for periodic replacement parts are rough estimate. Replacement may be
required earlier than the described replacement cycles depending on usage environment and frequency.
Disposal Precautions
This instrument and D2 lamp must be disposed of as industrial wastes.

The D2 lamp is made of metal (tungsten), quartz glass, ceramic and plastic.
When disposing of the instrument, ask an industrial waste disposal specialist according to local regulations.
For California, USA Only
CAUTION
This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
xiv UV-1280
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Descriptions in this section apply only to the following models:

207-20800-58 UV-1280
This product complies with European standard EN61326, class A for electromagnetic interference (Emissions).
 EN55011 Emissions (Electromagnetic Interference)

This is a class A product and is not designed for use in a residential environment.
When this product causes an electromagnetic disturbance to devices being used near this product,
create an appropriate distance between those devices and this product in order to eliminate the
disturbance.
UV-1280 xv
xvi UV-1280
CONTENTS
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................................i
Indications Used in This Manual ..................................................................................................................... ii
Safety Instructions.......................................................................................................................................... iii
Warning Labels ............................................................................................................................................ viii
Residual Risk Information .............................................................................................................................. ix
Warranty....................................................................................................................................................... xiii
After-Sales Service and Replacement Parts Availability .............................................................................. xiv
Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment.................................................................................................. xiv
Disposal Precautions.................................................................................................................................... xiv
Electromagnetic Compatibility ....................................................................................................................... xv
Chapter 1 General
1.1 UV-1280 Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Components ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 UV-1280 Main Body, Front and Top Views .......................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 UV-1280 Main Body, Rear View ........................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 Sample Compartment........................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.4 Keypad.................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.2.5 Light Source Compartment................................................................................................... 1-7
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Installation Site .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 Installation Requirements and Preparation........................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Installation Space ................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2 Connecting Power ............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.1 Verifying Power Supply Voltage ........................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Connecting to the Power Outlet............................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.3 Grounding ............................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.3 Checking the Light Source Lamp (D2) .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.4 Operation Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization ............................................................................................ 2-9
2.5.1 Power ON/OFF ..................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Initialization Operation ........................................................................................................ 2-11
2.5.3 Switching System Language .............................................................................................. 2-12
2.6 Performance Check after Installation .............................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.1 Parameter Settings ............................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.2 Performing Validation ......................................................................................................... 2-14
Chapter 3 Before Operating...

3.1 Screen Display and Keypad .............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Login Screen (Only When Security Function is On) .......................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 User Selection and Password............................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Using the USB Memory Device ......................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4 Handling Internal Data ....................................................................................................................... 3-8
Chapter 4 Mode Selection

4.1 Mode Menu Screen ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Overview of Various Modes............................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3 Load Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 4-9
UV-1280 xvii
4.4 File Management ............................................................................................................................. 4-11
4.4.1 Narrowing Down Files......................................................................................................... 4-12
4.4.2 File Manager Screen........................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4.3 Saving in CSV Format ........................................................................................................ 4-15
Chapter 5 Shared Operations

5.1 Save Files .......................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Save Single File .................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.2 Save Multiple Files................................................................................................................ 5-6
5.1.3 Delete Files in Built-in Memory ............................................................................................. 5-7
5.2 Load Files .......................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.1 Load Single File .................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.2 Load Multiple Files .............................................................................................................. 5-11
5.3 Printout ............................................................................................................................................ 5-15
5.3.1 Available Printer.................................................................................................................. 5-15
Chapter 6 Photometric (One-Wavelength)

6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 Measurement Screen............................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.2 Quantitation by K-factor Method ........................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.3 Data Print for Each Measurement......................................................................................... 6-7
6.3 Data Display ...................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.1 Data Display Screen ............................................................................................................. 6-8
6.3.2 Data Printout ......................................................................................................................... 6-9
Chapter 7 Photometric 8λ (Multi-Wavelength)

7.1 Photometric 8λ................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Equation................................................................................................................................ 7-5
7.2.2 Changing Sample ................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.3 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.2 Data Print for Each Measurement....................................................................................... 7-11
7.4 Data Display .................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.1 Data Display Screen ........................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4.2 Data Printout ....................................................................................................................... 7-13
Chapter 8 Spectrum
8.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.2 Auto-file Function .................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.3 Displaying Spectrum........................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.1 Curve Display Screen ......................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.2 Reading with Cursor ........................................................................................................... 8-12
8.3.3 Zoom Screen ...................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4 Print Out........................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.1 Print Mode........................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.2 Waveform Format ............................................................................................................... 8-17
xviii UV-1280
Chapter 9 Quantitation
9.1.1 Select Measurement Method................................................................................................ 9-5
9.1.2 Select Calibration Method..................................................................................................... 9-6
9.1.3 Select Concentration Unit ..................................................................................................... 9-8
9.1.4 Save Calibration Curve......................................................................................................... 9-9
9.2 Creating a Calibration Curve ........................................................................................................... 9-10
9.2.1 Entering Concentrations ..................................................................................................... 9-10
9.2.2 Entering Absorbance .......................................................................................................... 9-11
9.2.3 Concentration Table ........................................................................................................... 9-13
9.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve ........................................................................................... 9-14
9.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation) .................................................................................... 9-16
9.3.1 Measurement Screen ......................................................................................................... 9-16
9.3.2 Data Print for Each Measurement ...................................................................................... 9-17
9.4 List Display ...................................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.1 List Display Screen ............................................................................................................. 9-18
9.4.2 Data Printout....................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.5 Two/Three-wavelength Quantitation Method................................................................................... 9-20
9.5.1 Two-wavelength Quantitation ............................................................................................. 9-20
9.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation........................................................................................... 9-21
9.6 Derivative Quantitation Method ....................................................................................................... 9-22
Chapter 10 Kinetics
10.1 Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 10-4
10.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle (Measurement Cycle), and Lag/Rate........................... 10-6
10.3 Measurement................................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve ........................................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.2 Reading with Cursor ......................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.3 Zoom Screen .................................................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.4 Print Mode ........................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.5 Data List ........................................................................................................................................ 10-15
10.5.1 Data List Screen ............................................................................................................... 10-15
10.5.2 List Display ....................................................................................................................... 10-17
10.5.3 Data Print Format ............................................................................................................. 10-18
10.6 Print (Output) Format..................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.6.1 Waveform Format ............................................................................................................. 10-19
10.6.2 Table Data Format............................................................................................................ 10-21
10.6.3 Curve Data Format ........................................................................................................... 10-22
Chapter 11 Kinetics Rate

11.1 Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle, and Interval................................................................. 11-5
11.3 Measurement................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.1 Data Display during Measurement ..................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.2 Curve Display Screen during Measurement ....................................................................... 11-8
UV-1280 xix
11.4.3 Zoom Screen .................................................................................................................... 11-12
11.4.4 Print Mode......................................................................................................................... 11-14
11.5 Data List......................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.5.1 Data List Display Screen................................................................................................... 11-15
11.5.2 List Display........................................................................................................................ 11-16
11.5.3 Data Print Format.............................................................................................................. 11-17
11.6.1 Waveform Format ............................................................................................................. 11-18
11.6.2 Table Data Format ............................................................................................................ 11-20
11.6.3 Curve Data Format ........................................................................................................... 11-21
Chapter 12 Time Scan

12.1.1 Setting Measurement Time and Cycle................................................................................ 12-5
12.2 Measurement................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3 Displaying Time Course Curve ........................................................................................................ 12-7
12.3.3 Zoom Screen .................................................................................................................... 12-11
12.4 Print Format ................................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.4.1 Print Mode......................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.4.2 Waveform Format ............................................................................................................. 12-14
Chapter 13 Multi-component Quantitation

13.1 Multi-component Quantitation.......................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2.1 Input Measurement Wavelength ......................................................................................... 13-6
13.3 Standard Sample Data .................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.3.1 Entering Concentration ..................................................................................................... 13-11
13.3.2 Loading Absorbance ......................................................................................................... 13-12
13.3.3 Loading from Spectrum (Curve) Data File ........................................................................ 13-13
13.4 Measurement of Unknown Sample................................................................................................ 13-15
13.4.1 Measurement Screen........................................................................................................ 13-15
13.4.2 Data Print for Each Measurement..................................................................................... 13-17
13.5 Data Display .................................................................................................................................. 13-18
13.5.1 Data Display Screen ......................................................................................................... 13-18
13.5.2 Data Printout ..................................................................................................................... 13-19
13.6 Spectrum Display screen............................................................................................................... 13-20
13.6.2 Zoom Screen .................................................................................................................... 13-22
Chapter 14 Bio-method
14.1 Bio-method Selection....................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2 DNA Quantitation............................................................................................................................. 14-4
14.2.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................. 14-4
14.2.2 λ (Wavelength).................................................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.3 Measurement .................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.2.4 List Display........................................................................................................................ 14-12
14.2.5 Printout (Output) ............................................................................................................... 14-13
xx UV-1280
14.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB Method, and Biuret Method .................................................... 14-14
14.3.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ............................................................... 14-14
14.3.2 Measurement Parameters (Defined Values) .................................................................... 14-15
14.4 UV Absorption Method .................................................................................................................. 14-16
14.4.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ............................................................... 14-16
14.4.2 Select Concentration Unit ................................................................................................. 14-18
14.4.3 Measurement.................................................................................................................... 14-19
14.4.4 List Display ....................................................................................................................... 14-21
14.4.5 Printout (Output) ............................................................................................................... 14-22
Chapter 15 Data Processing

15.1 Processing Options Screen ............................................................................................................. 15-2
15.1.1 Reading with Cursor ........................................................................................................... 15-4
15.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing ............................................................................................................ 15-5
15.1.3 Example of Data Printout.................................................................................................... 15-7
15.2 Arithmetic Operations ...................................................................................................................... 15-8
15.2.1 Selecting Data .................................................................................................................... 15-8
15.2.2 Arithmetic Operations with Factor....................................................................................... 15-8
15.2.3 Arithmetic Operations with Curve Data............................................................................... 15-9
15.2.4 Operation Result Screen .................................................................................................. 15-11
15.3 Derivative Operations .................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.3.1 Derivative Processing ....................................................................................................... 15-13
15.4 Peak Detection .............................................................................................................................. 15-17
15.5 Area Calculation ............................................................................................................................ 15-21
15.5.1 Area Calculation Processing............................................................................................. 15-23
15.6 Point Pick....................................................................................................................................... 15-26
15.6.1 Point Pick at Even Intervals .............................................................................................. 15-26
15.6.2 Point Pick with Manual Input............................................................................................. 15-27
15.6.3 List Display Screen ........................................................................................................... 15-29
15.7 Print Processing ............................................................................................................................ 15-31
Chapter 16 Utilities
16.1 Utilities Menu Screen....................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.1 Start Program ..................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.1.2 Decimal Display .................................................................................................................. 16-5
16.1.3 Light Source Selection........................................................................................................ 16-6
16.1.4 Printer Setting ..................................................................................................................... 16-7
16.1.5 Setting Data Accumulation Time ........................................................................................ 16-9
16.2 Changing Printer Driver (only when ESC/P-R is selected) ............................................................ 16-10
16.2.1 Preparing USB Memory Stick ........................................................................................... 16-10
16.2.2 Printer Driver Changing Procedure................................................................................... 16-10
Chapter 17 Maintenance
17.1 Maintenance Screen........................................................................................................................ 17-2
17.2 Security Functions ........................................................................................................................... 17-4
17.2.1 Security Function Operations ............................................................................................. 17-4
17.2.2 Setting Security Functions .................................................................................................. 17-7
17.2.3 Authority Setting for Security Parameters........................................................................... 17-9
17.2.4 Changing Password.......................................................................................................... 17-11
17.3 Updating the System Program ...................................................................................................... 17-12
UV-1280 xxi
Chapter 18 Instrument Validation
18.1 Parameter Configuration Screen for Instrument Validation ............................................................. 18-2
18.2 Overview of Validation Items ........................................................................................................... 18-3
18.2.1 Semi-Auto Items ................................................................................................................. 18-3
18.2.2 Auto Items........................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.3 Parameter Configuration Screen ..................................................................................................... 18-6
18.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing the Parameters ................................................ 18-7
18.3.2 Printing/Saving (Text Format)/Displaying Results ............................................................ 18-11
18.3.3 Validation Options............................................................................................................. 18-13
18.4 Executing Validation ...................................................................................................................... 18-15
18.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products......................................................................... 18-17
18.4.2 Example of Executing Validation ...................................................................................... 18-18
18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details ................................................................................................. 18-21
18.5.1 Photometric Accuracy ....................................................................................................... 18-21
18.5.2 Photometric Repeatability ................................................................................................. 18-27
18.5.3 Stray Light......................................................................................................................... 18-33
18.6 Auto Validation Item Details........................................................................................................... 18-38
18.6.1 Noise Level ....................................................................................................................... 18-38
18.6.2 Baseline Flatness.............................................................................................................. 18-42
18.6.3 Baseline Stability............................................................................................................... 18-45
18.6.4 Wavelength Accuracy D2.................................................................................................. 18-49
18.6.5 Wavelength Repeatability D2............................................................................................ 18-53
18.6.6 Initialization Record........................................................................................................... 18-55
Chapter 19 PC Control
19.1 Connecting to a PC.......................................................................................................................... 19-2
19.2 Controlling with Optional Software................................................................................................... 19-4
19.3 Controlling with External Commands............................................................................................... 19-5
19.3.1 Receiving Commands and Protocol.................................................................................... 19-5
19.3.2 Example of Programming ................................................................................................... 19-7
19.3.3 Explanation of Commands and Data ................................................................................ 19-11
19.3.4 Programming with Visual Basic ........................................................................................ 19-12
19.3.5 Command List................................................................................................................... 19-17
Chapter 20 Sample Module Control

20.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation) .................................................................... 20-2
20.2 Multi-cell Holder (multicell (6-cell), CPS Series) .............................................................................. 20-3
20.3 Sipper 160 ....................................................................................................................................... 20-7
20.4 Syringe Sipper ................................................................................................................................. 20-9
20.5 Blank Correction Function ............................................................................................................. 20-11
Chapter 21 Maintenance & Inspection

21.1 Inspection and Maintenance............................................................................................................ 21-2
21.1.1 List of Periodic Inspection & Maintenance Items ................................................................ 21-2
21.2 Inspecting the Sample Compartment .............................................................................................. 21-3
21.3 Checking and Resetting the Lamp Usage Time .............................................................................. 21-4
21.3.1 Checking Procedure ........................................................................................................... 21-4
21.3.2 Resetting Procedure ........................................................................................................... 21-5
21.4 Replacing the Light Source.............................................................................................................. 21-7
21.4.1 Light Source Specifications................................................................................................. 21-7
21.4.2 Lamp Replacement Procedure ........................................................................................... 21-8
21.5 Cleaning the Exterior ..................................................................................................................... 21-15
xxii UV-1280
Chapter 22 Troubleshooting
22.1 Errors during Initialization ................................................................................................................ 22-2
22.2 Problems: Symptoms and Solutions................................................................................................ 22-4
Chapter 23 Reference
23.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 23-2
23.1.1 Hardware Specifications ..................................................................................................... 23-2
23.1.2 Software Specifications ...................................................................................................... 23-4
23.2 Spectrophotometer Basics .............................................................................................................. 23-8
23.2.1 What is Light? ..................................................................................................................... 23-8
23.2.2 Ultraviolet/Visible Spectrum.............................................................................................. 23-10
23.2.3 Bouguer-Beer's Law ......................................................................................................... 23-11
23.2.4 Qualitative Analysis and Quantitative Analysis................................................................. 23-12
23.2.5 Calibration Curve .............................................................................................................. 23-13
23.2.6 Solvent Selection .............................................................................................................. 23-14
23.2.7 Calibration Curve Curvature ............................................................................................. 23-15
23.2.8 Spectrophotometer Types ................................................................................................ 23-17
23.3 Measurement System.................................................................................................................... 23-21
23.3.1 Electrical System .............................................................................................................. 23-21
23.4 List of Cells .................................................................................................................................... 23-22
23.5 Cleaning the Cell ........................................................................................................................... 23-26
Index
UV-1280 xxiii
xxiv UV-1280
1
1 Installation
Chapter 1 General 1
CONTENTS
1
1.1 UV-1280 Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Components ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1
UV-1280 1-1
1.1 1.1 UV-1280 Configuration
This instrument is shipped with the following items. Upon opening the shipping container, confirm that
1
all of the listed parts are accounted for in your shipment.
1
1
2
1
Fig. 1.1 Standard Contents
1
Table 1.1 Standard Contents
1
No. Check Description Part No. Qty.
1 Spectrophotometer 207-20800-42 1
1
2 AC Power Cable 071-60821-08 1
3 UV-1280 Instruction Manual 206-98410 1

1
1-2 UV-1280
1.2 1.2 Components
1.2.1 UV-1280 Main Body, Front and Top Views 1
1
3
1 1
2 1
1
4
Fig. 1.2 Front and Top Views of UV-1280 1
1
No. Name Description
1 LCD This displays the operation menus and measurement results.

1
2 Keypad This is the input component for giving operation commands and numeric
values to the instrument, etc.
^ "1.2.4 Keypad" 1
3 Sample Compartment Open/close this cover when setting the measured sample.
Cover ^ "1.2.3 Sample Compartment"
4 Sample Compartment These are screws for fastening the sample compartment unit.
1
Set Screws
(knurled
thumbscrews)
UV-1280 1-3
1.2 Components
1 1.2.2 UV-1280 Main Body, Rear View
2
1 3
4
1
1
5 1
1 Fig. 1.3 UV-1280 Rear View
1 No. Name Description

1 Power Switch This is the switch for turning the unit ON/OFF.
ON: when | is pushed in.
1
OFF: when  is pushed in.
2 USB Connector You can use these connecters for any of printer, or USB memory stick.
1 You can also connect special accessories described below. In such
cases, however, it is necessary to purchase separately and connect the
1 designated USB conversion adaptor to each accessory.
• 6-cell electronic temperature control cell positioner CPS series
 USB adaptor for CPS (P/N S206-25234-91)
1
• Auto sample changer ASC-5
 USB adaptor for ASC (P/N S206-25235-91)
For installation and connection procedures, refer to the instruction
manual of each accessory.
1 3 USB Connector (for PC) This is the connector for connecting PC during external control
operation.
^ "19.1 Connecting to a PC"
4 Optional Unit Connector This is the connector to connect the "Sipper 160" or "Syringe sipper"
(special accessories).
For installation and connection procedures, refer to the instruction
manual of each accessory.
5 AC Power Connector Connect the enclosed AC power cable to the supply power from an AC
electrical outlet.
^ "2.2 Connecting Power"
1-4 UV-1280
1.2 Components
1.2.3 Sample Compartment 1
4
1
2 1
1
1
1
3
1
Fig. 1.4 Sample Compartment
1
1 Cell Holder The cell holder for the rectangular 10mm light path cells is mounted.
1
^ "23.4 List of Cells"
2 Cell Holder Set Screws The cell holder can be easily removed by loosening the cell holder set
1
screws.
3 Sample Compartment When using a flow cell, etc., holes are needed to pass tubing, etc.
Front Cover
1
through. Therefore, this "Sample Compartment" can be removed and
exchanged with different types of front panels (When mounting another 1
front board, another sample compartment unit is required.).
4 Multi-cell Holder Drive This is the connector for driving the optional "Multi-cell Holder"
1
Connector accessory.
UV-1280 1-5
1.2 Components
1 1.2.4 Keypad
1 6
1
7 5
1 8
2
3
1
9
1
0
a 4 1
1 Fig. 1.5 Keypad

1
1 This is the key for starting and stopping measurement once the parameter
setting has been completed.
1
2 When you press this key, the absorbance (transmittance) at the current
wavelength will automatically be set to 0Abs (100 %T). Make sure that prior
1 to sample measurement a blank cuvette is placed in both sample and
reference sides.
3 This is the key that is used to change the current wavelength.

1
4 When you enter a value, press this key after the value to set the entering
value.
1
5 Use these keys to move the cursor on the screen upward/downward, or left/
right. The left cursor key can also be used to enter a negative (–) value
when entering numeric values.
6 These are the keys corresponding to the functions that are displayed at the
1 bottom of the screen.
7 Use this key to display to the previous screen.
8 Use this key to adjust the screen contrast. Using cursor keys
while holding down this key changes the contrast.
9 Use this key to output a hard copy of the screen.
0 Use these keys to enter numeric values.

-
a Use this key to clear a numeric value entry error. When you press this key,
the numeric value which has been entered will be cleared and then you may
reenter the appropriate value.
1-6 UV-1280
1.2 Components
1.2.5 Light Source Compartment 1
1 1
Fig. 1.6 Light Source Compartment
1

1
1 Deuterium Lamp (D2 This is the ultraviolet range (190 nm to light source switch wavelength*)
Lamp) light source. For the D2 lamp replacement procedure, refer to "21.4
1
Replacing the Light Source".
2 Tungsten Halogen This is the visible & near infrared range (light source switch wavelength*
Lamp (WI Lamp) 1
to 1100 nm) light source. For the WI lamp replacement procedure, refer
to "21.4 Replacing the Light Source".
1
* Light source switch wavelength

The light source switch can be set anywhere in the range from 295 nm to 364 nm in 0.1 nm increments. 1
For details, refer to "16.1.3 Light Source Selection".
UV-1280 1-7
1.2 Components
1
1-8 UV-1280
2
2 Installation
Chapter 2 Installation 2
CONTENTS
2
2.1 Installation Site .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Connecting Power ............................................................................................................................. 2-4 2
2.3 Checking the Light Source Lamp (D2) .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.4 Operation Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization ............................................................................................ 2-9 2
2.6 Performance Check after Installation .............................................................................................. 2-13
UV-1280 2-1
2.1 2.1 Installation Site
2 2.1.1 Installation Requirements and Preparation

To use the UV-1280 properly and safely, install the instrument in an appropriate location that meets
the following requirements.
2
WARNING
When using flammable and toxic samples, be sure to install ventilation equipment at
2
installation site.
2
CAUTION
2
• DO NOT install the UV-1280 in an environment filled with dust or corrosive gas.
2 These conditions will adversely affect the durability and performance of the UV-1280.
• DO NOT install the UV-1280 near an instrument that produces strong magnetic fields.
2
Magnetic fields may adversely affect the accurate performance of the instrument.
Filters may be added to the power supply lines to reduce any electrical noise.
2
• To ensure instrument performance, the installation site should meet the following
requirements.
2
• The ambient temperature must be between 15 °C and 35 °C with minimal temperature
variations.
• Air currents from air conditioners and heating systems must be avoided.
2
• Exposure to direct sunlight must be avoided.
• The site must be free from vibration.
• Humidity must remain between 30 % and 80 %. No condensation.
2
(Humidity must be maintained at under 70 % at ambient temperatures over 30 °C.)
2-2 UV-1280
2.1 Installation Site
2.1.2 Installation Space 2
CAUTION 2
• The weight of the UV-1280 is 10 kg. When selecting the installation location, take into
account the total weight of the UV-1280 and other devices.
Use a desk or stand for installation that can sufficiently support the total instrument
2
weight, having a flat and stable surface with at least 600 mm depth. If these
requirements are not satisfied, the instrument may tip over or fall down, causing an
accident. 2
• Ensure that there is at least 100 mm of clearance between the left side of the UV-1280
and the wall. 2
The power supply unit and the light source unit cooling fan are located on the left side
of the instrument. If location specifications are not met, the air cooling system with fan 2
may work improperly, overheating the instrument and deteriorating its performance.
2
The dimensions of the UV-1280 are as given in the figure below.
2
379 mm
2
416 mm
274 mm
Fig. 2.1
UV-1280 2-3
2.2 2.2 Connecting Power
2 2.2.1 Verifying Power Supply Voltage
2
WARNING
The power supply voltage is indicated on the power supply connector on the side of the
instrument. Be sure to connect the power supply that meets the indicated
2 specifications.
Operating the UV-1280 at supply voltages other than the specified could cause fire,
2 electric shock, and instrument malfunction.
2
Power voltage indication
2
Fig. 2.2
2 The following table shows the power supply voltage, power consumption, and frequency of the UV-1280.
Power Supply Voltage

2 Power Consumption Frequency
(Indication on product nameplate)
100 V - 240 V AC
140 VA 50/60 Hz
2 (100-240 V -)
Verify that the outlet to be used has a sufficient power capacity. Insufficient power capacity may cause blackouts
and voltage drops, affecting other instruments that use the same power supply.
The range of the allowable voltage fluctuation is within ±10 %. If the fluctuation exceeds 10 %, be sure to use a
voltage stabilizer.
2-4 UV-1280
2.2 Connecting Power
2.2.2 Connecting to the Power Outlet 2
WARNING 2
Handle the power supply cable carefully.

Follow the warnings below to avoid cable
damage and the consequent risk of fire,
electric shock, and instrument malfunction. 2
• Do not place heavy objects on the power supply
cable.
• Keep thermal appliances away from the power 2
supply cable.
• Do not modify the power supply cable.
• Do not forcefully bend or stretch the power supply 2
cable.
• Hold the plug when inserting in and removing the
cable from the power outlet. 2
Should the power supply cable become

2
damaged, contact your Shimadzu
representative.
2
CAUTION 2
Verify that the power switch of the UV-1280 is

OFF (i.e., "O" is pressed in) before connecting 2
the electric plug to the outlet.
2
1 Insert the connector of the power supply cable (accessory) into the power supply connector (Fig.
1.3) on the backside of the instrument.
2 Insert the electric plug of the power supply cable into the power outlet.
UV-1280 2-5
2.2 Connecting Power
2 2.2.3 Grounding
2 WARNING
Ground the instrument to prevent electric shock and provide reliable performance of the
UV-1280.
2
The power supply cable supplied with the UV-1280 consists of three wires including a ground wire. When
installing the instrument, be sure to insert the cable into the three-wire system outlet.
2
2-6 UV-1280
2.3 2.3 Checking the Light Source Lamp (D2)
2
WARNING
2
• Before opening the light source compartment cover, turn OFF the instrument power
switch and remove the electric plug from the outlet. Failure to do so may result in fire,
electric shock, and instrument malfunction. DO NOT turn ON the instrument power
while the light source compartment is visually exposed. Ultraviolet light may be
generated, a serious health hazard. 2
• If the UV-1280 has been operating before opening the cover, turn OFF the instrument
and let it stand until the lamp cools down sufficiently. Touching the lamp when it is still
2
hot will burn you.
CAUTION 2
• When removing and installing the light source compartment cover, avoid hitting the
protrusion on the top of the D2 (deuterium) lamp (Fig. 21.8) against the back of the 2
cover. Doing so may cause a vacuum leak in the lamp tube.
• Be sure to wear gloves when handling the light source so as not to leave fingerprints on 2
the glass part. A fingerprint will burn onto the bulb when the light source gets hot, and
light transmission will deteriorate.
2
• Be careful not to break the lamp.
2
According to the procedure described below, check to be sure that the light source D2 (deuterium) lamp did not
become dislodged from the designated position during transportation.
For details on the components on the light source compartment, and the procedure to remove the cover, refer to 2
"21.4 Replacing the Light Source".
2
1 Remove the light source compartment cover.
2 Check to be sure that the D2 lamp is seated well in

the socket with no gap.
D2 lamp
2
Socket
If the lamp is mounted at an angle or there is any

gap, reinstall the lamp so that there is no gap in Mounted to the socket with no gap.
between.
3 Reinstall the light source compartment cover.
Mounted at an angle There is a gap
Fig. 2.3 Checking D2 lamp installation
UV-1280 2-7
2.4 2.4 Operation Precautions
2  Precautions Before Operation
2 CAUTION
• Before turning ON the power switch, check to be sure that nothing is placed in the
sample compartment and cell holder.
If the power is turned ON when a sample cell is mounted to the UV-1280, the light
2
source energy check and wavelength check may be judged as "NG" since the light
beam is obstructed.
2 When this occurs, first turn OFF the power switch, remove the cell, and then turn ON
the power switch again.
2 • If "Sipper 160" (special accessory) is mounted, turn ON the power switch with the flow
cell filled with distilled water.
2 If the sample remains halfway within the cell, the light source energy check and
wavelength check may be judged as "NG" since the beam is refracted or scattered on
the remaining sample.
2 If this occurs, turn OFF the power switch and turn it ON again while pressing down the
sipper 160 suction lever. After the pump of the sipper 160 starts rotating, suction the
2 distilled water from the sample suction port. When the distilled water starts being
drained, release the lever and finish the suction operation.
2
 Precautions During Operation
2
CAUTION
2
• Keep the sample compartment cover closed during measurement or 100 %T (0 Abs)
correction. Any outside light detected on the spectrometer may interfere with accurate
2 measurement and correction.
NOTE
2 100 %T (0 Abs) is the function to correct the current photometric value to 100 %T for transmittance
measurement, and 0 Abs for absorbance measurement. Performing this correction only for the specified
wavelength is called "Auto-zero", and performing within the specified wavelength range is "Baseline
correction".
2-8 UV-1280
2.5 2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization
2.5.1 Power ON/OFF 2
Power switch 2
Fig. 2.4 UV-1280 Power Switch
2
 Turning ON the Power
1 Press "I" on the power switch (Fig. 2.4) to turn ON

the power.
2
2
2 The items to be initialized appear on the screen, and
start being initialized or checked sequentially.
^ "2.5.2 Initialization Operation" 2
2
3 When all initialization items are judged "OK", the
Mode menu screen appears.
NOTE
If the security function is ON, the Login screen is
displayed prior to the Mode menu screen.
^ "3.2 Login Screen (Only When Security
Function is On)"
UV-1280 2-9
2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization
2  Turning OFF the Power
2 1 Press "O" on the power switch (Fig. 2.4) to turn OFF

the power.
2-10 UV-1280
2.5.2 Initialization Operation 2

When the instrument power is turned ON, the spectrometer executes various initializations and
checks for the items shown in Fig. 2.5. The time required for this initialization is approximately four
2
minutes.
Note that if the system program version is 1.02 or lower, the order of WL motor initialization and lamp
motor initialization is reversed.
Light Source Lamp Icon

Indicates the illumination status of the 2
light source lamp.
"W" and "D" stand for the halogen lamp
and deuterium lamp, respectively. This
icon is displayed when the lamp is ON, 2
and not displayed when it is OFF. A
blinking icon indicates that the lamp is
OFF with some errors.
2
Fig. 2.5 Initialization screen

2
Table 2.1 Initialization items
Initialization items Description 2
LSI Initialize Initializes each I/O device.

2
ROM Check Checks program ROM.
RAM Check Checks memory elements (RAM).

2
Filter Initialize Detects the reference position of the stray light filter.
WL Motor Initialize Detects the mechanical wavelength origin position.

2
Lamp Motor Initialize Detects the reference position of the motor that drives the light source
switching mirror.
2
WI Lamp Energy Checks whether or not the WI (halogen) lamp light energy is at a sufficient
level.
WL Origin search Checks 0-order light which is the optical origin.
D2 Lamp Energy Checks whether or not the D2 lamp (deuterium) lamp light energy is at a
sufficient level.
WL Check Checks wavelength by detecting the emission line at 656.1 nm using the
D2 lamp.
Each item is initialized in order, and if the initialization of the item is properly completed, "OK" is displayed next
to the item. If any abnormality is detected, however, "NG" is displayed and the initialization process is
terminated. In such a case, note the item for which "NG" is displayed, and turn OFF the instrument. To learn the
check points when an error occurred, refer to "22.1 Errors during Initialization".
UV-1280 2-11
2 2.5.3 Switching System Language

You can arbitrarily change the UV-1280 system language.
If Japanese language instruction manuals are necessary, please contact your Shimadzu
2
representative and purchase them separately.
• UV-1280series Systerm User's Guide .................... P/N 206-98409
2  Switching Procedure (English to Japanese)
2 1 Turn ON the UV-1280 by pressing the "I" side of the

power switch (Fig. 2.4) while holding down the
key on the keypad.
2
2 2 The UV-1280 starts up in Japanese mode, and the

initialization operation begins.
^ "2.5.2 Initialization Operation"
2
2 Fig. 2.6
2
NOTE
2 The language mode is switched only when turning ON the power switch with the key
pressed. When not intending to change the language mode, turn ON the power switch as usual
without holding down the key.
2
2-12 UV-1280
2.6 2.6 Performance Check after Installation
Once the installation is complete, validate the performance for the following items:
2
• Noise level
• Baseline flatness
• Wavelength accuracy 2
Use the instrument validation function in order to check the performance of the UV-1280. For details
on how to use the function, refer to "Chapter 18 Instrument Validation".
2.6.1 Parameter Settings 2

Set validation parameters in the Parameter Input screen for each item as follows:
 Noise level 2
Perform the validation using the parameters below.

Wavelength : 500 nm 2
Tolerance P-P : 2.00 mAbs or less
RMS : 0.50 mAbs or less
2
Fig. 2.7 Validation parameters for noise level 2
 Baseline flatness 2
Scan range: 1100 - 200 nm

2
Tolerance : ±10.0 mAbs
2
Fig. 2.8 Validation parameters for baseline 2

flatness
 Wavelength accuracy (D2 emission line)
Wavelength: 656.1 nm, 486.0 nm

Tolerance 656.1 nm: ±1.0 nm
486.0 nm: ±1.0 nm
Fig. 2.9 Validation parameters for wavelength

accuracy (D2 emission line)
UV-1280 2-13
2.6 Performance Check after Installation
2 2.6.2 Performing Validation

When you have a printer supporting the instrument (^ "16.1.4 Printer Setting"), connect the printer
with the instrument and perform validation.
2
If not, check the validation results in a text file or the Validation Result screen.
1 Press the [Settings] key in the Parameter

Input screen for the instrument validation.
2
2
Fig. 2.10
2 2 In the Settings screen, set [3. Print init. status] to

[ON].
When a printer is connected, set [1. Auto Print] to
2 [ON].
2 3 Press the key to return to the Parameter

Input screen for the instrument validation.
Fig. 2.11
2
4 In the screen, press the
validation.
key to start the
2
5 Validation for each item is performed.
When a printer is connected, the results are printed
upon completion of validation for each item.
6 When a printer is connected: check the performance

of each item by referring to the printed result.
When no printer is connected: insert a USB memory
Fig. 2.12
device in the USB connector on the back of the
instrument, and press the F2 [WriteTXT] key. Check
the results saved in a text format in the following
folder (VResult.TXT) to see performance for each
item.
\UV1280\ValResult
If the results do not need to be saved as data, you can see the results by pressing the F3 [Result]
key.
2-14 UV-1280
3
3 Before Operating...
Chapter 3 Before 3
Operating... 3
CONTENTS
3
3.1 Screen Display and Keypad .............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Login Screen (Only When Security Function is On) .......................................................................... 3-4 3
3.3 Using the USB Memory Device ......................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4 Handling Internal Data ....................................................................................................................... 3-8
3
UV-1280 3-1
3.1 3.1 Screen Display and Keypad
3
CAUTION
DO NOT press the keys on the operation keypad using a sharp-tipped instrument such as ballpoint
3 pen.
The film on the keys may be torn off or the keys may be damaged.
3
Fig. 3.1 illustrates the relation between the screen of the UV-1280 and the keypad. The modes and
settings in the various screens can be selected using the number keys through or
the function keys through . When selecting modes or settings, it is not necessary to
press the key after you have pressed the number keys or function key. On the other hand,
3 when entering numeric values, such as wavelength settings or display mode, etc., you must press the
key to set that value.
3
Screen title Indicates the current wavelength
and measured value
3
Light Source Lamp Icon
Corresponds to the Indicates the illumination
3 numeric key status of the light source
lamp.
"W" and "D" stand for the
halogen lamp and
3 deuterium lamp,
respectively. This icon is
displayed when the lamp is
ON, and not displayed
3 when it is OFF. A blinking
icon indicates that the
lamp is OFF with some
errors.
3 ^ "Chapter 22
Troubleshooting"
Fig. 3.1 Screen display and keypad
3-2 UV-1280
3.1 Screen Display and Keypad
The basic function of each key is described below. Some keys may be assigned to special functions
3
depending on the screen.
Key Description 3
This is the key for starting and stopping measurement once
parameter setting has been completed. 3
When you press this key, the absorbance (transmittance) at the
current wavelength will automatically be set to 0 Abs (100 %T).
This is the key that is used to change the current wavelength.
When you enter a value, press this key after the value to set the 3
entering value.
Use these keys to move the cursor in the LCD screen upward/ 3
downward, or left/right. The left cursor key can also be used to
enter a negative (–) value when entering numeric values.
3
These are the keys corresponding to the functions that are
displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen.
3
Use this key to display to the previous screen.
Use this key to adjust the screen contrast. Using cursor keys
3
( ) while holding down this key changes the
contrast.
3
Use this key to output a hard copy of the monitor screen.
Use these keys to enter numeric values.

3
~
Use this key to clear a numeric value entry error. When you
press this key, the numeric value which has been entered will be 3
cleared and then you may reenter the appropriate value.
3
UV-1280 3-3
Login Screen
3.2 3.2
(Only When Security Function is On)

The UV-1280 has a security function that allows limiting function availability according to user level.
3
(^ "17.2.2 Setting Security Functions")
3 types of users can be specified for the UV-1280: Administrator, Developer, and Operator. If the
3
security function is ON, you need to login to the UV-1280 as one of those users.
The Login screen (Fig. 3.2) appears when the power is turned ON and the following initialization is
3 complete, or when the current user is logged out.
NOTE
Press the key on the [Mode menu] screen (^ "4.1 Mode Menu Screen") to log out
3
from the current user.
3 In the initial state of the screen, the last logged-in user is displayed. If you enter a correct password
the display will switch to the [Mode menu] screen.
3 Set or change the password for each user in the Security Settings screen (^ "17.2.2 Setting
Security Functions"). No password has been assigned to any user in the initial settings.
NOTE
3
• Be extremely careful not to lose your password.
Note especially that if the password for Administrator is lost, the status cannot be recovered
3 even by attempting to set a new password, since the security function settings become
defunct.
In such cases, the service personnel must work at your installation site for function recovery.
3
Contact your Shimadzu representative.
Fig. 3.2 [Login] Screen
3-4 UV-1280
3.2 Login Screen (Only When Security Function is On)
3.2.1 User Selection and Password 3
1 Press
screen.
[Chg.USER] key in the [Login]
3
2 The [Target User] Selection screen is displayed.

Use the keys to select a user.
3
(Here, [Administrator] is selected.) 3

Press the key to confirm the selection.
3 Enter the password for the selected user. For

example, to enter a password "1234", press the 3
, , , keys in order.
After the entry, press the key to confirm the 3
password.
3
4 The [Mode menu] screen is displayed.
NOTE
Available functions vary according to the rights
assigned to each user.
UV-1280 3-5
3.3 3.3 Using the USB Memory Device
3 NOTE
For details on the procedure for using the USB memory device, refer to the instruction manual
3 of the USB memory device.
A commercially available USB memory device (a flash memory that supports USB1.1) can be
3
connected to the instrument.
The USB connector is located on the backside of the instrument.
3
Fig. 3.3 Connecting the USB memory device
Using the USB memory device, the following operations become available:
3
• Storing measurement parameters and data acquired during measurements:

3 You can store these data in your PC hard disk via the USB memory device.
For the procedure for saving measurement parameters and acquired data, refer to "5.1 Save Files".
3
• Reading measurement data on a commercially available PC software:
The UV-1280 can convert the measurement data to the CSV format, which can be read on any
3 software supporting the format.
For the procedure for converting/saving measurement data in the CSV format, refer to "4.4 File
Management".
3
• Saving the results of instrument validation:
The results of instrument validation can be saved in a text format in a USB memory device.
For the saving procedure, refer to "18.3 Parameter Configuration Screen".
3-6 UV-1280
3.3 Using the USB Memory Device
 Precautions for connecting the USB memory

3
When you connect the USB memory device, the "USB memory icon" is displayed on the right bottom
of the screen.
3
The USB memory can be connected or removed regardless of the power ON/OFF status of the UV-
1280. However, if the USB memory is unplugged during the data transfer, the data within the memory
device may be corrupted. DO NOT remove the USB memory device while the message indicating that 3
the UV-1280 is currently accessing the memory device is displayed.
(USB memory icon)

3
Fig. 3.4
3
UV-1280 3-7
3.4 3.4 Handling Internal Data
When performing measurement, the UV-1280 usually obtains data values containing more decimal
3
places than are displayed on the screen.
For curve data, the UV-1280 saves obtained values as they are. For table data, the UV-1280 rounds
3
obtained photometric values as given below before calculating concentrations, etc, displaying and
saving the results.
3 • Abs (Absorbance): Rounded to four decimal places (i.e. the fifth decimal place is rounded off).
• %T (Transmittance): Rounded to two decimal places (i.e. the third decimal place is rounded off).
NOTE
3 The number of digits of the data displayed on the screen is in accordance with the set value of
[Decimal Display] in the Utilities Menu screen.
^ "16.1 Utilities Menu Screen"
3
3-8 UV-1280
4
4 Mode Selection
Chapter 4 Mode Selection

4
4
The [Mode menu] screen which is displayed after initialization is completed, and the operations which are
shared by the various modes are explained in this chapter. 4
CONTENTS
4
4.1 Mode Menu Screen ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Overview of Various Modes............................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3 Load Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 4-9 4
4.4 File Management ............................................................................................................................. 4-11
UV-1280 4-1
4.1 4.1 Mode Menu Screen
The screen to select a measurement mode to be carried out (the [Mode menu] screen : Fig. 4.1) is
4
displayed.
4
NOTE
4 If the security function ("17.2.2 Setting Security Functions") is ON, the login screen is
displayed. For the login procedure, refer to "3.2 Login Screen (Only When Security Function is
On)".
4
4
1
4
2 3 4 5
4 Fig. 4.1 [Mode menu] screen
4-2 UV-1280
4.1 Mode Menu Screen
No. Key Operation Display Description 4

1 [Photometric] Displays the screen for selecting the
Photometric mode measurement method. 4
• One-wavelength measurement
^ Chapter 6 "Photometric (One-
4
Wavelength)"
• Multi-wavelength measurement
^ Chapter 7 "Photometric 8λ (Multi- 4
Wavelength)"
[Spectrum] Displays the Measurement Parameter

Configuration screen for Spectrum mode.
^ Chapter 8 "Spectrum"
4
[Quantitation] Displays the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen for Quantitation mode.
4
^ Chapter 9 "Quantitation"
[Kinetics] Displays the screen for selecting the Kinetics

mode measurement method. 4
• Kinetics Measurement
^ Chapter 10 "Kinetics" 4
• Rate Measurement
^ Chapter 11 "Kinetics Rate"
4
[Time Scan] Displays the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen for Time Scan mode.
^ Chapter 12 "Time Scan" 4
[Multi- Displays the Measurement Parameter
Component] Configuration screen for Multi-component 4
Quantitation mode.
^ Chapter 13 "Multi-component 4
Quantitation"
[Bio-Method] Displays the screen for selecting the Bio-

4
method mode measurement method.
^ Chapter 14 "Bio-method"
4
[Utilities] Displays the screen for performing the
instrument utility settings.
^ Chapter 16 "Utilities"
2 [LoadParm] Calls the conditions stored in the built-in

memory or USB memory.
^ "4.3 Load Parameters"
UV-1280 4-3
4.1 Mode Menu Screen
4 No. Key Operation Display Description
3 [FileMng.] Used to perform various operations (file loading,

4 CSV conversion, etc.) on stored files in the built-
in memory or USB memory.
^ "4.4 File Management"
4
4 [Mainte.] Displays the screen for performing inspection
and maintenance of the UV-1280 (e.g.
4
instrument validation and usage time check for
the light source lamp), as well as security
function settings.
^ Chapter 17 "Maintenance"
4 5 [PC Ctrl] Allows controlling the UV-1280 via an external
computer.
4 ^ Chapter 19 "PC Control"
– – Logs out the current user when the security
4 function (^ "17.2.2 Setting Security

Functions") is ON.
4-4 UV-1280
4.2 4.2 Overview of Various Modes
You can move from the [Mode menu] screen to one of the 8 measurement modes and 2 functions
4
described below. For details on each mode, refer to the listed reference.
4
 [Photometric] mode
Measures absorbance or % transmittance of a sample at
arbitrary wavelengths. 4
The following 2 measurement methods are available.
* One-wavelength measurement
^ Chapter 6 "Photometric (One-Wavelength)"
4
* Multi-wavelength measurement
(A maximum of eight wavelengths can be set.)
^ Chapter 7 "Photometric 8λ (Multi-Wavelength)"
4
In multi-wavelength measurement, it is possible to select
one of the following five equations based on the data
obtained at up to four wavelengths and then output the 4
calculation results:
• A1-A2
• A1/A2 4
• dA(A1 to A3)
• (K1A1 + K2A2 + K3A3 + K4A4)x K5
• K5x(K1A1 + K2A2)/(K3A3 + K4A4) 4
4
 [Spectrum] mode
Scans a wavelength range to measure the absorbance
and % transmittance of a sample as a function of 4
wavelength.
Single beam energy measurement can also be
4
performed.
Data processing such as peak detection, smoothing, and
4
mathematical calculation may be applied to the
measured spectrum.
4
^ Chapter 8 "Spectrum"
UV-1280 4-5
4.2 Overview of Various Modes
4  [Quantitation] mode
Creates a calibration curve from a standard sample and
quantitates an unknown sample.
4 The following 4 measurement methods are available.
* 1-wavelength measurement
4 * 2-wavelength measurement
* 3-wavelength measurement
* Derivative quantitation
4
In addition, the following 3 methods are available for
calibration curve generation.
* K-factor
* Single point calibration curve
4 * Multi-point calibration curve
^ Chapter 9 "Quantitation"
4
 [Kinetics] mode
Calculates enzyme activity from the time dependent
4 change in absorbance.
Up to 6 samples can be measured at once using a multi-
cell holder (optional).
4
The following 2 measurement methods are available.
4 * Kinetics measurement
* Rate measurement
4 ^ Chapter 10 "Kinetics"
^ Chapter 11 "Kinetics Rate"
4
4-6 UV-1280
 [Time Scan] mode 4

This function is used to measure the change in the rate
of absorbance, transmittance, or energy in the fixed
wavelength. Up to 6 samples can be measured using the 4
multi-cell holder (option).
Data processing such as mathematical calculation may
4
be applied to the measurement data.
^ Chapter 12 "Time Scan" 4
 [Multi-component] mode 4
Enables samples with up to 8 constituent components to
be measured and quantitated.
4
^ Chapter 13 "Multi-component Quantitation"
4
 [Bio-method] mode
In the Bio-method Mode, the following 2 measurement 4
methods are available.
* DNA quantitation
* Protein measurement 4
The [DNA Quantitation] obtains the DNA and protein 4

concentrations based on the measured absorbances.
The [Protein measurement] performs protein 4

quantitation. The following 5 methods are available.
• Lowry method
• BCA method 4
• CBB method
• Biuret method
• UV absorption method
^ Chapter 14 "Bio-method"
UV-1280 4-7
4  [Utilities] mode
This is the mode for setting and changing the basic
operating parameters of the instrument.
4
^ Chapter 16 "Utilities"
4  [Maintenance]
This mode provides the following functions for
maintenance purposes.
4
<Instrument performance/status check>
4 • Instrument Validation function
• Lamp illumination time management
4 <Instrument calibration/correction>
• Wavelength recalibration
4 <User authority management>

• Security settings
4
^ Chapter 17 "Maintenance"
^ Chapter 18 "Instrument Validation"
4
 [PC control]
This mode allows the UV-1280 to be controlled by an
4 external computer.
4 ^ Chapter 19 "PC Control"
4-8 UV-1280
4.3 4.3 Load Parameters
You can load the measurement parameters stored in the built-in memory or USB memory device. (For
4
details on saving parameters, refer to 5.1 Save Files.)
Measurement type
Indicates the measurement 4
mode of the parameter file at the
Cursor (highlighted) cursor position.
4
Asterisk File list
Indicates the file is Displays the list of files stored
saved in the built-in in the built-in memory or USB
memory. memory in alphabetical order.
4
1 Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
pages" of the file list.
4
1 2 3 4
Fig. 4.2 [Load Files] screen

4
4
No. Key Operation Display Description
1 or [Load] Loads the file at the current cursor position

(highlighted). 4
2 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor

position (highlighted). Press the key to 4
return to the [Load files] screen (Fig. 4.2).
4
Header sample
3 [PrevPage] Displays the previous page of the file list.
4 [NextPage] Displays the next page of the file list.
– – Moves a cursor in the file list.
UV-1280 4-9
4.3 Load Parameters
4
NOTE
When using a USB memory device, the file list can only display 2000 files. If more than 2000
4
files exist in the USB memory, a notification message appears and only 2000 files are
displayed. Files are displayed in an alphabetized order.
4
 "Load Parameters" Procedure
4
1 Press
menu] screen.
[LoadParm] key in the [Mode
4
2 The [Load files] screen is displayed.
By pressing the
keys, move the cursor to the desired parameter file.
Press the key, or the [Load] key.
4
4
3 The Parameter Configuration screen for the selected
measurement mode appears, and the parameter
settings in the selected file will be loaded on the
4
screen.
4-10 UV-1280
4.4 4.4 File Management
The UV-1280 creates the following 3 types of measurement files.

4
1. Parameter file
2. Curve data file
3. Table data file 4
When you select [FileMng.] key and narrow down the files to be operated, the File
4
Management will appear, where you can perform file operations on these 3 types of files, such as
copying, deleting, saving in CSV format (^ "4.4.3 Saving in CSV Format"), and displaying the file
4
contents.
NOTE
When using a USB memory device, only 2000 files are displayed in the file list for each
4
measurement file type listed above. Files are displayed in an alphabetized order.
UV-1280 4-11
4.4 File Management
4 4.4.1 Narrowing Down Files

To display the [File Manager] screen, you need to first narrow down the file selection with regard to
memory storage type, file type, and method type.
4
4
[FileMng] key
key key
4
* When [Built-in memory] is selected.

4
key
4 Go to the File Manegement screen

(Fig. 4.4)
4 key * When [USB memory] is selected.
4
key
Go to the [File Manager] screen (Fig. 4.4)
Fig. 4.3 Operational/Screen flow to [File Manager] screen
4-12 UV-1280
4.4 File Management
4.4.2 File Manager Screen 4

In the file list, only the files that have been narrowed down in the previous section 4.4.1 are displayed.
4
File type
Memory type Measurement/data type
Indicates the type of the Indicates the measurement 4
memory where the listed files mode of the data/parameter file
are stored (the built-in memory at the (highlighted) cursor
or USB memory). position.
4
Selected file
The file name is
displayed in a box.
File list
Cursor
4
5 Page number
4
1 2 3 4
Fig. 4.4 [File Manager] screen 4

4
1 [Copy] Saves the selected file under the same name to a
separate memory.
2 [Delete] Deletes the selected file from the memory storage. 4
3 [CSV Conv] Converts the selected file to CSV format and saves it
to the USB memory.
4
^ "4.4.3 Saving in CSV Format"
NOTE
The parameter files cannot be converted to CSV
4
file format.
4 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor 4
position (highlighted). Press the key to
return to the [File Manager] screen (Fig. 4.4).
4
Header sample
5 – Selects a file or cancels the selected file.
UV-1280 4-13
4.4 File Management
4  "File Selection" Procedure
4 1 By pressing the
keys, move the cursor (highlighted) and highlight the
desired file.
4 Press the key to confirm the file selection.
4
2 In the list, the name of the file selected and confirmed
in procedure 1 is displayed in a box.
4 Repeat procedure 1 if you wish to select multiple files
at one time.
4
NOTE
4
A maximum of 32 files can be processed in one
operation simultaneously.
4
 Canceling of "File Selection" Procedure
4
1 Using the
move the cursor (highlighted) and highlight an
keys,
4
already-selected file that is displayed in a box.
2 Press the key to cancel the already-made

selection. (The box will disappear.)
4-14 UV-1280
4.4 File Management
4.4.3 Saving in CSV Format 4

This function is used for converting the curve data or table data acquired in the UV-1280 to the text
data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format, and saving this data.
4
The converted data are saved as the decimal place values specified in [2. Decimal Display] in the
Utilities Menu screen.
4
You can use the converted data on any commercially available software that supports the CSV format.
4
NOTE
The parameter files cannot be converted to the CSV format.
The data file newly created in CSV format is saved under the same name as that of the original file.
4
Note that data files in CSV format can only be saved in the USB memory device.
The data files converted to the CSV format are saved in the folder location described below within the
USB memory. If the folder does not exist, the UV-1280 automatically creates it when saving the data 4
files.
4
File Type Folder Configuration

4
Curve data file converted to the CSV format (*.csv) \UV1280\CData
Table data file converted to the CSV format (*.csv) \UV1280\TData

4
"0610TOL2.SPC" 4
Header part
WL/nm,Abs File name and column title
280.00,0.0068 4
279.95,0.0069
279.90,0.0070
279.85,0.0071 4
Data display
279.80,0.0072
Wavelength values and
279.75,0.0073 photometric values (all data) are
4
listed and delimited with commas.
279.30,0.0083
279.25,0.0085
· 4
·
·
(Conversion example of spectrum curve data)
UV-1280 4-15
4.4 File Management
4
"0613PH81.PHO"
No.,550.0,520.0,500.0,480.0,460.0,Result Header part
4 File name and column title
1,0.524,0.544,0.550,0.542,0.544,0.9768
2,0.502,0.504,0.515,0.491,0.481,0.9997
4 3,0.451,0.439,0.454,0.408,0.382,1.0326 Data display
· Sample No., wavelength values,
photometric values (all data), and
· calculation results are listed and
4 · delimited with commas.
(Conversion example of photometric 8λ table data)
4-16 UV-1280
5
5 Shared Operations
Chapter 5 Shared 5
Operations
5
5
This chapter describes the operations common to several modes of the UV-1280. The operations which are
specific to each mode will be described in the chapter explaining the mode. 5
CONTENTS
5
5.1 Save Files .......................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Load Files .......................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3 Printout ............................................................................................................................................ 5-15 5
UV-1280 5-1
5.1 5.1 Save Files
The files created in each mode of UV-1280 are saved by the following key operations.
5
For details on the save file screen and the operation procedure, refer to "5.1.1 Save Single File".
Meanwhile, for saving multiple files simultaneously, refer to "5.1.2 Save Multiple Files".
5
5 Table 5.1 List of the UV-1280 file type
Number of
Key
5 File Type Operation Screen Display storable files
Operation
(Built-in Memory)
Parameters file* Measurement [SavParam] 24 files

5
Parameter
Configuration Screen
Curve data file Measurement Screen [SavCurve] 8 files
Table data file Measurement Screen [SaveData] 8 files

5
* Note that the measurement parameters for optional accessories (multi-cell holder, sipper, etc.)
connected to the sample compartment are not saved.
5
When the USB memory is connected, files of each type are saved in the folder under the location
5 described below. If the destination folder does not exist, the UV-1280 creates it automatically when
saving the files.
5
File Type Folder Configuration

5
Parameters file \UV1280\Method
Curve data file \UV1280\CData

5
Table data file \UV1280\TData
5 NOTE
The maximum number of the files that can be saved in USB memory depends on the memory
storage size. However, only 2000 files can be displayed in the file list for each measurement
5
file type listed above. Files are displayed in an alphabetized order.
5-2 UV-1280
5.1 Save Files
When browsing the files in USB memory on the computer, they will have the file extensions described
5
in the following.
5
Table 5.2 List of the UV-1280 measurement data files
File 5
Parameters File Table Data File Curve Data File
Measurement Type
Photometric *.mp0 *.pho 5
Photometric 8λ *.mp1 *.pho
Spectrum *.ms0 *.spc 5
Quantitation *.mq0 *.pho
Kinetics *.mk0 *.kit *.tmc
Kinetics Rate *.mk1 *.rat *.tmc

5
Time scan *.mt0 *.tmc
Multi-component *.mm0 *.mcq *.spc

5
Bio-method (DNA Quantitation) *.md0 *.dna
Bio-method (Lowry) *.mq1 *.pho 5

Bio-method (BCA) *.mq2 *.pho
Bio-method (CBB) *.mq3 *.pho 5

Bio-method (Biuret) *.mq4 *.pho
Bio-method (UV method) *.mq5 *.pho 5
UV-1280 5-3
5.1 Save Files
5 5.1.1 Save Single File

When you select [SavParam], [SavCurve], or [SaveData] in each measurement mode, the [Save files]
screen (Fig. 5.1) is displayed.
5
The file list of the [Save files] screen displays the files that have been saved to the built-in memory or
USB memory in the current measurement mode. The name of the file stored in the built-in memory is
5
marked with an asterisk to differentiate the file location.
5 Asterisk
Indicates the file is saved in the
built-in memory.
Input file name
5
Cursor
File list
Character list
Indicates numerals and
5 characters available for
file names.
5
5 Page number
5
1 2 3 4
Fig. 5.1 [Save files] screen (For single file)

5
1 [Save] Saves a file under the input file name.
5 2 [ON/OFF] Toggles ON/OFF of the filename memory function.

ON: The [Save files] screen opens with the last-
entered filename displayed in the Input file name
5
column.
OFF: The [Save files] screen opens with blank in the
5 Input file name column.
3 [PrevPage] Displays the file list on the previous page.

5
4 [NextPage] Displays the file list on the next page.
5 – Moves a cursor in the character list.
– – Inputs the character at the current cursor position.
– – Deletes the last letter in the input file name field.
– – Inputs numbers for a part of the file name.

~
5-4 UV-1280
5.1 Save Files
 "Save files" Procedure 5
1 Use the
move the cursor to the desired character on the
keys to
5
character list.
Press the key to enter the character in the 5
input file name column.
5
2 Repeat the procedure 1 until you finish entering the

desired filename. A maximum of 8 characters can be
entered.
Press [Save] key. 5
5
3 Use the keys to move the cursor to
the desired destination memory.
Press the key to save the file. 5
NOTE 5
If the save is not allowed due to a lack of free
space on the built-in memory, you can move to
5
the screen for deleting unnecessary files in the
built-in memory. (^ "5.1.3 Delete Files in Built-
in Memory") 5
UV-1280 5-5
5.1 Save Files
5 5.1.2 Save Multiple Files

When the following measurements are performed, multiple curve data are obtained at one
measurement. Therefore, all data files are saved simultaneously.
5
• Repeated measurement in the Spectrum mode*
• Measurement using multiple cells in the Kinetics/Time Scan mode
5 * Only when executing the auto-file function with a USB memory device connected. (^ "8.2.2
Auto-file Function")
5
A maximum of 6 characters can be used as a filename since cell numbers or measurement numbers
are automatically attached to the filename.
5
Example) When entering the filename "KIN" for a measurement with 3 cells
File Name Description

KIN01 Time course data at cell position 1
5 KIN02 Time course data at cell position 2
KIN03 Time course data at cell position 3
5 The file list on the [Save files] screen displays only the data files that have been saved to the built-in
memory or USB memory in the currently selected measurement mode. The name of the file stored in
5 the built-in memory is marked with an asterisk to differentiate the file location.
5 Except for the difference of maximum input characters, the function and operation procedure are
identical to those for saving a single file (See 5.1.1).
5
Asterisk
Indicates the file is saved in the
built-in memory.
Input file name
5
5 Cursor
File list
Character list
5 Indicates numerals and
characters available for
file names.
5
Page number
Fig. 5.2 [Save files] screen (For multiple files)
5-6 UV-1280
5.1 Save Files
5.1.3 Delete Files in Built-in Memory 5

When saving files to the built-in memory when enough space does not exist in the memory, a
message (Fig. 5.4) appears asking you whether to delete unnecessary files.
5
When the deletion is selected, the [Delete files] screen (Fig. 5.3) appears.
For the maximum number of files that can be saved in built-in memory, refer to section 5.1, "Table 5.1
5
List of the UV-1280 file type".
5
File type
Measurement/data type
Indicates the type of the files
Selected file
(data) that are currently listed. 5
The file name is displayed
in a box.
File list
Cursor
5
1 2
Fig. 5.3 [Delete files] screen in Built-in Memory

5

1 [Delete] Calls the selected file.
2 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor 5

return to the [Delete files] screen (Fig. 5.3). 5
Header sample
– – Selects a file or cancels the selected file.
UV-1280 5-7
5.1 Save Files
5  "Delete files" Procedure
5 1 Use the
[Yes], and press the
keys to move the cursor to
key.
5
Fig. 5.4
5
5
2 The [Delete files] screen is displayed.
Using the keys, move the cursor to
the data file you wish to delete.
Press the key to confirm the selection.
Fig. 5.5
5
3 The name of the file selected and confirmed in
procedure 2 is displayed in a box.
5
Repeat procedure 2 when you wish to delete multiple
files.
5
NOTE
5 A maximum of 32 files can be processed in one
5
After having marked all data files to be deleted, press
Fig. 5.6
the [Delete] key.
5
4 A confirmation message for the deletion appears.

Use the keys to move the cursor to
5
[Yes], and press the key.
Fig. 5.7
5 The selected files are deleted, and you will return to

the [Delete files] screen (Fig. 5.5). Then, press the
key to save the new file and return to the
previous screen.
5-8 UV-1280
5.2 5.2 Load Files
The files created and saved in each measurement mode of the UV-1280 can be loaded by the
5
following key operations.
File Type Operation Screen Key Operation Reference

5
Parameters file [Mode menu] screen [LoadPam] Section 4.1

5
Curve data file Measurement screen [LoadCurv]
Spectrum (Fig. 8.3)
Time scan (Fig. 12.4) 5
Kinetics (Fig. 10.7)
Kinetics rate (Fig. 11.7)
5
Curve Display screen [LoadCurv]
Multi-component (Fig. 13.9)
Table data file Data Display screen [LoadData]

Photometric (Fig. 6.7)
Photometric 8λ (Fig. 7.9) 5
Quantitation (Fig. 9.15)
Kinetics (Fig. 10.14)
Kinetics rate (Fig. 11.14) 5
Multi-component (Fig. 13.17)
DNA Quantitation (Fig. 14.7)
Lowry method (Fig. 9.15) 5
BCA method (Fig. 9.15)
CBB method (Fig. 9.15)
Biuret method (Fig. 9.15) 5
UV method (Fig. 14.15)
NOTE
When using a USB memory device, only 2000 files can be displayed in the file list for each 5
measurement file type listed above. Files are displayed in an alphabetized order.
5
UV-1280 5-9
5.2 Load Files
5 5.2.1 Load Single File

When loading the parameter files and table data files, the screen for loading a single file is displayed.
For details on loading the parameter files, refer to "4.3 Load Parameters".
5
The file list of the [Load files] screen displays only the files that have been saved to the built-in
memory or USB memory in the current measurement mode. The name of the file stored in the built-in
5
memory is marked with an asterisk to differentiate the file location.
5
File type
Measurement/data type
Indicates the type of the files
5 Asterisk
(data) that are currently listed.
Indicates the file is saved
in the built-in memory.
File list
Cursor
5
5 1 Page number
5
1 2 3 4
Fig. 5.8 [Load files] screen
5
5 1 or [Load] Loads the file at the current cursor position

(highlighted).
5 2 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor

return to the [Load Files] screen (Fig. 5.8).
5
Header sample
5-10 UV-1280
5.2 Load Files
 "Load files" Procedure 5
1 Press
screen.
[LoadData] key in the Data Display
5
Fig. 5.9

Using the keys, 5
move the cursor to the desired table data file.
Press or [Load] key.
5
5
Fig. 5.10
5
3 The selected table data file is loaded.
5
Fig. 5.11
5.2.2 Load Multiple Files

When loading the curve data files, the screen for loading multiple files is displayed.
A maximum of 32 files can be loaded simultaneously.
NOTE
Even though multiple files are loaded, all files are read-only (only displayed) except the latest-
loaded file.
UV-1280 5-11
5.2 Load Files
The file list on the [Load files] screen displays only the data files that have been saved to the built-in
5
memory or USB memory in the currently selected measurement mode. The name of the file stored in
the built-in memory is marked with an asterisk to differentiate the file location.
5
File type
5 Measurement/data type
Asterisk Indicates the type of the files
Indicates the file is saved in (data) that are currently listed.
5 the built-in memory.
5 Selected file File list

The file name is displayed in a
box.
Cursor
5 Page number
5 pages" of the file list.
1 2 3 4
5
Fig. 5.12 [Load Files] screen

5
1 [Load] Calls the selected file.
2 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor

5 position (highlighted). Press the key to
return to the [Load Files] screen (Fig. 5.12).
5
Header sample
5 – Selects a file or cancels the selected file.
5-12 UV-1280
5.2 Load Files
 Load (multiple) files Procedure 5
1 Press
screen.
[LoadCurv] key in the [Mode menu]
5
Fig. 5.13

By pressing the 5
keys, move the cursor to the desired curve data file.
Press key to select the file.
5
5
Fig. 5.14
5
3 The name of the file selected and confirmed in
procedure 2 is displayed in a box.
Repeat procedure 2 if you wish to load multiple files. 5
5
NOTE
A maximum of 32 files can be processed in one
5
5
Fig. 5.15
4 After selecting the file, press [Load] key.
UV-1280 5-13
5.2 Load Files
5 5 The selected curve data files are loaded.
5 NOTE
The data processing can be applied only to the
5 latest-loaded file.
5 Fig. 5.16
5-14 UV-1280
5.3 5.3 Printout
The UV-1280 can provide the following printout forms. For the detailed printout methods and printout
5
formats (layout sample), refer to the chapter for each measurement mode.
 Hard copy of screen 5

Press the key to print a hard copy of the screen.
 Print using function keys

When a function key has a [PrntData] function, as in a mode such as Photometrics in which the
5
measurement results are recorded in table form, all of the tabular data will be printed out. (See
"6.3.2 Data Printout".) 5
 Data Print for each Measurement
In modes (such as Photometric mode) in which the measurement results are obtained as numeric
values, if a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1280 (and communication is established),
5
the measurement results will be printed on the printer for every measurement.
 Print waveform
The waveforms and parameters in a curve data file are printed.
 Print waveform data 5

Execute [DataPrnt] on the Data Processing screen to print out all numeric value data within the
selected curve data file. (See "15.7 Print Processing".)
5
5.3.1 Available Printer

Besides the exclusive screen copy printer, the following commercially available printers which support 5
the following control codes are available for the UV-1280.
5
EPSON: Some of ESC/P-9, ESC/P-24, and ESC/P Raster
HP: Some of PCL 5
Data Print for Print 5

Hard copy of Print using Print
each waveform
screen function keys waveform
Measurement data
5
Printer for Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
screen copy
5
Commercially Yes Yes × No Yes Yes
available
printer 5
CAUTION
When using the ESC/P Raster printer, DO NOT unplug the USB cable before the printer head
returns to its home position. If you do, the printer will fall into an abnormal status in which no
printing commands are accepted.
To plug the USB printer cable to another port or computer after (or while) using with the UV-1280,
be sure to turn OFF the printer power beforehand.
UV-1280 5-15
5.3 Printout
5
5-16 UV-1280
6
6 Photometric (One-Wavelength)
Chapter 6 Photometric 6
(One-Wavelength) 6
6
The photometric measurement is used to measure absorbance (Abs) or transmittance (%T) at an arbitrary
(one-)wavelength. 6
To repeat the measurement, the measurement results may be displayed as a list. A single list allows including a
maximum of 400 measurement results, which may be stored as a single file in the memory of the main unit.
This is a simple quantitation method. A sample concentration C is expressed as C=K × Abs, and when the value 6
for K (K = Conc. of Std / absorbance of Std) is already known, you can enter the value for K and measure the
concentration of unknown samples.
6
CONTENTS
6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 6-2 6

6.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Data Display ...................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6
UV-1280 6-1
6.1 6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen
When you select [1. Photometric] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the
6
Method Selection screen (Fig. 6.1) will be displayed.
Fig. 6.1 Method Selection screen
6 When you select [1. Photometric] (press the key) in the Method Selection screen, the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for the one-wavelength measurement (Fig. 6.2) will be
6 displayed.
To set the measurement wavelength, use the key.

6
Set wavelength
6 Indicates the wavelength that is
currently set.
Photometric value
Indicates Abs or %T
6 measured at the
Calculated value currently set
Indicates the photometric wavelength.
value multiplied by a
6 specified K-factor. Indicates
also the concentration in 5
absorbance measurement.
6 6
^ "6.2.2 Quantitation
by K-factor Method"
1 2 3 4
Fig. 6.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen
6-2 UV-1280
6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

1 [%T/Abs] Toggles between %T (transmittance) and Abs
(absorbance).
6
2 [SmplCmpt] Used to set the sample module. The setting
items include the sample module type, the
6
number of cells, and the operating conditions
for the sipper.
^ "20.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, 6
Sipper Operation)"
3 [MeasScrn] Changes over to the Measurement screen. (Fig. 6
6.3)
4 [SavParam] Stores the current measurement conditions in 6
the built-in memory or USB memory device.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
5 – Specifies the factor to be multiplied to
photometric values.
6
6 – Starts the measurement under the set
parameters and displays the Measurement
screen (Fig. 6.3) 6
– – Specifies the wavelengths for measurement.
The setting range is from 190 nm to 1100 nm in 6
units of 0.1 nm.
– – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen. (Fig. 4.1) 6
If blank correction is required, set the blank sample prior to the measurement and then press the
key. The measured value will be set to 0 Abs (100 %). 6
UV-1280 6-3
6.2 6.2 Measurement
6 6.2.1 Measurement Screen

In the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 6.2), press the [MeasScrn] key or
the key. The Measurement screen will appear.
6
(If the key is pressed, the first measurement run will be carried out with the Measurement
screen displayed.)
6
Set wavelength/
Photometric value
6 The current status is
displayed.
6 Sample No. Calculated value

The assignment rule for the (K x photometric value)
numbers varies according to For absorbance measurement,
the cell holder used. * the concentration can also be
6 displayed.
^ "6.2.2 Quantitation by
K-factor Method"
Cursor
Indicates the sample No. for
the next measurement.
Photometric value
The number of display digits
6 4 follows the setting.
^ "16.1.2 Decimal
Display"
6 5
1 2 3
* When using a single cell or when No. of drive cells is 1, the sample numbers are assigned in sequence, starting from 1. When using multiple
6 cells by attaching a multi-cell, a dash (-) and the cell number are attached to the sample number.
Single cells: [Sample No.]

Multiple cells: [Sample No.] - [Cell No.]
6
Fig. 6.3 Photometric Measurement screen

6
(for one-wavelength measurement)
6-4 UV-1280
6.2 Measurement

1 [Smpl No.] Used to change the sample number for the next
measurement. 6
The sample number can be selected from 0 to
9999.
6
2 [DataDisp] Displays a data table. ^ "6.3 Data Display"
3 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data 6

file to the built-in memory storage or USB
memory device.
6
^ "5.1 Save Files"

6
screen (Fig. 6.3).
NOTE
A maximum of 400 measurements can be
entered in a single table data file. 6
5 – Deletes all the data displayed on the screen.
– – Specifies the wavelengths used for the 6

measurement. The setting range is from
190 nm to 1100 nm in units of 0.1 nm. 6
– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 6.2).
6
UV-1280 6-5
6.2 Measurement
6 6.2.2 Quantitation by K-factor Method

This is a simple quantitation method (K-factor method) used when the absorbance and concentration
are directly proportional (Concentration = K × Absorbance), and a conversion factor K is given.
6
The following is a measurement procedure.
6
1 Press [1. Fac. K] key in the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 6.2).
6
6
2 The input column for [1. Fac. K] is highlighted (Fig.
6.4). Enter a factor with numeric keys.
6
NOTE
You cannot recalculate measured results by
changing the K-factor after the measurement is
completed.
6
Fig. 6.4 Factor Input screen
6
3 Press the key to confirm the input value and
move back to the Measurement Parameter
6 Confirmation screen (Fig. 6.2).
The factor entered in procedure 2 is displayed in the
[1. Fac. K] column.
6
6 4 Press the key while nothing or a blank

sample is placed in the sample compartment.
6
5 Place the unknown sample in the sample
compartment, and press the key to execute
6 the measurement.
6
6 The Measurement screen appears (Fig. 6.5), and
absorbance values (Abs) and quantitation results
(K*Abs) are displayed.
Fig. 6.5 Measurement screen
6-6 UV-1280
6.2 Measurement
6.2.3 Data Print for Each Measurement 6

If a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1280, the measurement results will be printed
on the printer for every measurement.
6
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
parameters are printed.
6
Data and time when the

first measurement was 6
completed
Header Part
6
First measurement
6
Fig. 6.6 Sample printout
6
UV-1280 6-7
6.3 6.3 Data Display
6 6.3.1 Data Display Screen

As the measurement is repeated on the Measurement screen, the data will be scrolled with only the
latest seven measurement results displayed on the screen. The Data Display screen is used to list the
6
measurement results including those which have disappeared from the screen. It also allows for the
printing out of the data table or loading data.
6
6
Data display list
Displays measurement
6 results or all data contained
in a table data file. (The data
are displayed from Sample
No. 1.)
6
3 Page number
Indicates "current page/
6 total pages" of the file list.
1 2
6
Fig. 6.7 Data Display screen
6
6 1 [PrntData] Prints all data displayed in the list.
^ "6.3.2 Data Printout"
6 2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "5.2.1 Load Single File"
6 3 – Allows scrolling the data table to review the hidden
measurement data.
6 Each pressing of the key scrolls the table by 8 data

lines.
6 – – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 6.3).
6-8 UV-1280
6.3 Data Display
6.3.2 Data Printout 6

The entire data can be printed out as a numeric data table on the printer (optional).
6
6
NOTE
Pressing the key on the keyboard in the Measurement screen (Fig. 6.3) or Data 6
Display screen (Fig. 6.7) will produce a hard copy of the displayed screen.
Data and time when the 6

first measurement was
completed
Header Part
First measurement
6
Fig. 6.8 Sample printout

6
UV-1280 6-9
6.3 Data Display
6
6-10 UV-1280
7
7 Photometric 8 λ
(Multi-Wavelength)
7
Chapter 7 Photometric 8λ 7
(Multi-Wavelength) 7
CONTENTS 7
7.1 Photometric 8λ................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 7-3 7
7.3 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4 Data Display .................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7
UV-1280 7-1
7.1 7.1 Photometric 8λ
The [Photometric 8λ] (multi-wavelength measurement) allows you to specify a maximum of 8 arbitrary
7
wavelengths and then measure the absorbance or transmittance at those wavelengths. It is also
possible to select one of the following 5 equations based on the data obtained at up to 4 wavelengths
7
and then output the calculation results.
7 • Two-wavelength calculation
The ratio and difference between the photometric values at two wavelengths are calculated. This
process is applicable for eliminating the effect of any interfering component (difference), scattering
7 due to turbidity, and floating of the baseline due to the production of small bubbles, and also for
evaluating the purity (ratio) (^ "9.5.1 Two-wavelength Quantitation").
7 • Three-wavelength calculation
This process is performed as follows (^ "9.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation"):
A2 – Ad (where Ad = (λ1 – λ2) × A3 + (λ2 – λ3) × A1)/(λ1 – λ3)
7
where λ1~λ3 are measurement wavelengths (arbitrary numbers are to be entered) and A1~A3
are absorbance (or transmittance) values at the measurement wavelengths.
7 The three-wavelength calculation is also applicable for eliminating the effect of any interfering
component, and floating of the baseline that has slanted due to turbidity or any other reason.
• Equation calculation with four-wavelength data

This process is performed as follows:
((K1 × A1 + K2 × A2 + K3 × A3 + K4 × A4) × K5); or
7 (K5 × (K1 × A1 + K2 × A2)/(K3 × A3 + K4 × A4))
where K1~K5 are coefficients (arbitrary numbers are to be entered) and A1~A4 are absorbance
(or transmittance) values at measurement wavelengths λ1~ λ4.
7
For the calculation of this equation, the measurement wavelengths and coefficients are specified
freely. In addition, A1~A4 can be measured while selecting different samples. This provides high
7 versatility.
7
NOTE
The measurement data at each wavelength is rounded to four decimal places.
7
7-2 UV-1280
When you select [1. Photometric] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the
7
7
When you select [2. Photometric 8λ] (press the key) in the Method Selection screen, the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for photometric 8λ (multi-wavelength measurement)
(Fig. 7.2) will be displayed. 7
Set wavelength/ 7
1 Photometric value
Indicates Abs or %T measured
2 at the currently set
wavelength. 7
7
3
7
4
9
7
5 6 7 8
7
7
UV-1280 7-3
1 [Meas. mode] Selects the photometric mode.

7 Pressing the key toggles the mode between
Abs (absorbance) and %T (transmittance).
7 2 [No. of λ] Specifies the number of wavelengths and each

wavelength values.
The specifiable number of wavelengths for one
7
measurement is from 1 to 8, with an input range
is of 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm. (The same
7 wavelength values are not acceptable.)
The measurement will be carried out in the
7 order of λ1, λ2,…λn.
When all the data have been entered, the UV-
1280 automatically goes to λ1.
7
3 [Equation] Selects an equation used for the arithmetic
operation.
^ "7.2.1 Equation"
4 [Change sample Specify whether or not to change the sample

7
each λ] whenever the measurement is performed at
each wavelength.
7 ^ "7.2.2 Changing Sample"
5 [BaseCorr] Allows setting the blank sample prior to the

7 measurement of an unknown sample and then
correcting the baseline under the specified
7 conditions.
6 [SmplCmpt] Used to set the sample module. The setting

items include the sample module type and the
7
operating conditions of the sipper.
^ "20.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell,
7 Sipper Operation)"
7 [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen.

7
8 [SavParam] Used to save the current measurement
conditions to the memory.
7
^ "5.1 Save Files"

screen (Fig. 7.7).
– – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1).
7-4 UV-1280
7.2.1 Equation 7
When you select [Equation] from the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the Equation
Selection screen appears (Fig. 7.3). If you select the desired equation from the list, the measured data
7
will be operated upon with the selected equation after the measurement, and the calculation result will
be displayed with photometric values. Select [None] if no arithmetic operation is required.
7
7
Cursor
7
(Photometric mode: Transmittance) (Photometric mode: Absorbance)
Fig. 7.3 Equation Selection Screen 7
Key Operation Description
Moves the cursor position. 7

Confirms the equation or process at the cursor position.
Returns to the Parameter Configuration screen. 7
* When "dA(A1~A3) (dA(T1~T3))" is selected, the following calculation is performed.

7
(λ1–λ2)×A3 + (λ2–λ3)×A1
Absorbance: A2–
λ1–λ3
7
(λ1–λ2)×T3 + (λ2–λ3)×T1
Transmittance: T2–
λ1–λ3
7
UV-1280 7-5
* The symbols in the equations stand for the following:

7
An (n=1~4): Absorbance at measurement wavelength λn (n=1 to 4)
Tn (n=1~4): Transmittance at measurement wavelength λn (n=1 to 4)
7
Kn (n=1~4): Factor that is specifiable between -9999.9 and 9999.9. The Factor Input screen
(Fig. 7.4) is displayed when an equation has been selected. After entering a factor
7 with numeric keys and confirming with the key, the screen will prompt you
for the next factor entry.
7
Fig. 7.4 Factor Input Screen

7
7
NOTE
If the number of measurement wavelengths does not meet the number of wavelengths in the
7 equation for the multi-wavelength measurement, the measurement cannot be carried out.
7-6 UV-1280
7.2.2 Changing Sample 7

You can specify whether or not to change sample for each wavelength by selecting the [Change
sample each λ] on the Parameter Configuration screen.
7
The available options are described below:
[OFF]
The sample is not changed at each wavelength. The same sample is measured at all the 7
wavelengths specified in "Number of measurement wavelengths". If the sample module
selected in "Sample control" is Multi-cell, the sample in each cell is measured at all the
7
wavelengths by automatically changing the sample to the specified number of cells.
Shown below as an example is the measurement flow chart of the case in which "6-cell" is
selected, the number of measurement wavelengths is set to 3, and the number of cells used 7
is set to 3:
Cell No. 1 Cell No. 2 Cell No. 3 7
The cell moves The cell moves
Fig. 7.5 Measuring operation 7
[Single cell]
This mode is used to change the sample at each measurement wavelength. Change the 7
sample after the measurement at one wavelength, press the key according to the
message displayed on the screen, and then proceed to the next measurement.
7
NOTE 7
The key cannot be used to abort the measurement; instead the key
must be used for this purpose.
7
UV-1280 7-7
[Multi-cell]
7
After the measurement at one wavelength, the multi-cell holder is automatically moved to
change the sample. The maximum number of selectable cells is six. The number of cells
7 used is automatically set to the number of measurement wavelengths. The sample module
must be set to Multi-cell. This mode is not available for the sipper unit.
Shown below as an example is the measurement flow chart of the case in which 6-cell is
7 selected and the number of measurement wavelengths is set to 3:
Cell No. 1 Cell No. 2 Cell No. 3

7
The cell moves The cell moves

7
Fig. 7.6 Measuring operation

7
NOTE
1. If [Multi-cell] is selected, the sipper unit cannot be used.
7 2. To abort the measurement, press the key. In this case, the measurement will be
resumed starting at measurement wavelength λ1 when the key is pressed again.
7-8 UV-1280
7.3 7.3 Measurement
7.3.1 Measurement Screen 7

Pressing the [MeasScrn] key or the key in the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 7.2), the Measurement screen appears as shown in Fig. 7.7. (When the
7
key is pressed the first measurement will be performed.) If the specified number of
wavelengths does not meet the required number for the calculation, the measurement cannot be
7
carried out.
To abort the measurement, press the key. The aborting operation occurs after the
wavelength has been changed. In this case, the result is not displayed and no data is printed out. 7
Sample No. 7
Indicates the current Set wavelength/Photometric
sample number.* value
The current status is displayed. 7
Measured value
Indicates the measured 7
value at each measurement
wavelength.
Equation/Result
Indicates the selected equation and
the calculation result.
4 5 7
1 2 3 7
* When using a single cell or when No. of drive cells is 1, the sample numbers are assigned in sequence, starting from 1. When using multiple
cells by attaching a multi-cell, a dash (-) and the cell number are attached to the sample number. 7
Multiple cells: [Sample No.] - [Cell No.]
7
Fig. 7.7 Photometric Multi-wavelength Measurement Screen

7
UV-1280 7-9
7.3 Measurement
7 measurement.
9999.
7
2 [DataDisp] Function for displaying a data table.
^ "7.4 Data Display"
7
3 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data
file to the built-in memory storage or USB
7
memory device.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
7 4 – Starts the measurement under the set
7 screen (Fig. 7.7).
NOTE
performed as a single table data file.
7 5 – Deletes all measured data or data in the loaded

data file.
7 – – Returns to the Measurement Parameter

7-10 UV-1280
7.3 Measurement

on the printer for every measurement.
7
7
Date and time when 7

the first measurement
was completed
Header part
7
First measurement 7
Fig. 7.8 Example of data printout for each measurement
NOTE 7
A hard copy printer can print data and calculation results for up to only seven lines. Therefore,
measured data and calculation results are printed in one line for each measurement
7
wavelength in the following measurement conditions:
UV-1280 7-11
7.4 7.4 Data Display

This screen allows you to review all measured data or data contained in a loaded file.
It is also possible to print all data on the screen, or load another data file from the memory storage.
7
7
Data Display
Displays the
7 measurement data and
the calculation result for
each sample.
7
3 Page number
total pages" of the file list.
7
1 2

7
1 [PrntData] Prints all data displayed in the list.
7
2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.
7
3 – Switches the data list displayed on the screen.
Each pressing of the key switches to the previous or
7 next sample data.
– – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 7.7).

7
7-12 UV-1280
7.4 Data Display

The entire data can be printed out as a numeric data table on the printer (optional). In the header part,
the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement parameters are
7
printed.
7
NOTE
Pressing the key on the keypad will produce only a hard copy of the screen. 7
The printout form varies according to the connected printer for output. 7
 Output to a hard-copy printer 7

The data is printed in the same form as when printing for each measurement.
(See Fig. 7.8 for a printout example.)
7
 Output to a commercially available printer

The measurement data and the calculation result are printed in a row for each sample.
Date and time when 7

was completed
7
Header
part
7
First
measurement
7
Fig. 7.10 Example of Data Printout 7
UV-1280 7-13
7.4 Data Display
7
7-14 UV-1280
8
8 Spectrum
Chapter 8 Spectrum 8
8
The spectrum mode is used to measure spectra. Measure the absorbance and transmittance spectra of the
sample by performing the wavelength scan. This mode also allows you to measure the energy of a light source
using its single beam.
The measured spectra may be stored as a single file in the memory of the main unit. Data processing such as
peak detection, smoothing, and mathematical calculation may also be applied to those spectra. 8
CONTENTS
8
8.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.3 Displaying Spectrum........................................................................................................................ 8-10 8
8.4 Print Out .......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
UV-1280 8-1
When you select [2.Spectrum] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the
8
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 8.1) will be displayed.
The measurement parameter configuration screens differ slightly for the Abs (absorbance) and %T
8
(transmittance) measurement modes, and for the E (energy) measurement mode (Fig. 8.1).
8 Wavelength/
Photometric value
1 Indicates Abs or %T measured at
the currently set wavelength.
8 2
3
4
8 5
6 Cycle
Displayed when the number of
7
8 scans is two or more.
8
8 d
8 0 a b c
(Abs and %T modes)
8 9
(E mode)
8
8-2 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
8
Operation
1 [Meas. Mode] Selects the measurement mode.

8
You can select one of the following measurement
modes: %T (transmittance), Abs (absorbance), or E
8
(energy). Upon selection, the [Rec. range] value is also
changed to the corresponding range.
2 [Scan range] Sets the range of the wavelength scans. Enter the 8
scan starting and ending wavelength, in that order.
Range 8
Wavelength range 190 nm to 1100 nm
The starting wavelength must be longer than the 8

ending wavelength. The minimum scan range is
determined by the scan pitch setting.
8
(Scan start wavelength) ≥ (Scan end wavelength) +

(Scan pitch)
8
NOTE
If the measurement points led by the calculation
with the specified scan range and scan pitch exceed 8
2001, the scan pitch is changed to the minimum
value that creates less than 2001 points, after the
8
execution confirmation message is displayed.
3 [Rec. range] The recording range is used to input the upper limit/
8
lower limit of Y-axis when displaying the Reaction
Curve on the screen.
Input range 8
Abs -4.000 to 4.000
%T and E -400.0 to 400.0 8
4 [Scan speed] To specify a wavelength scanning rate, select one from
the four options, i.e. Fast, Medium, Slow, and Very 8
slow.
UV-1280 8-3
8 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
5 [Scan pitch] Selects the pitch (interval) at which to obtain data

8
during wavelength scan.
Selection item
8 AUTO The scan pitch is automatically
set according to the scan range.
8 0.1 Measured every 0.1 nm.

0.2 Measured every 0.2 nm.
8 1.0 Measured every 1.0 nm.
8
If [AUTO] is selected, the scan pitch is determined by
8 the selected scan range so that the number of
measurement points becomes maximum and still does
not exceed 2001 (the minimum value out of 0.1/0.2/
8
0.5/1.0/2.0 that meets [Wavelength range/Scan pitch <
2001])
8-4 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
8
Operation
6 [No. of scans] Set the number of times a scan will be repeated.

8
To save all curve data obtained in a repeated
measurement, connect a USB memory device and use
8
the auto-file function (^ "8.2.2 Auto-file Function").
NOTE
When a repeated measurement is performed 8
without connecting the USB memory device, only
the latest acquired data can be saved or printed 8
after the measurement.
Range
8
Range of repetition times 1 to 99 times
• If this is set to 2 or more times, the interval setting will

8
be displayed with the scanning repetitions on the
same display line. (See Fig. 8.1.)
• If this is set to 2 or more times, a multi cell 8
measurement using multi-cell holder cannot be
performed.
• When you press key once, measurement
will be repeated only the set number of times.
8
Scanning interval
This is a time period from a scan start to the next scan
start.
8
• The scanning interval includes the time required for
scanning. If the scanning interval is set to a value 8
longer than the time required for scanning, the UV-
1280 will wait for the time equivalent to the difference 8
between the two and then start scanning. During this
waiting period, the next scanning count and the
8
remaining waiting time are displayed.
• If the time required for scanning is actually longer
than the scanning interval, the scan will be 8
continuously carried out without any waiting time. In
this case, the set value for the scanning interval will 8
be changed to the actually required time.
8
UV-1280 8-5
8 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
7 [Display mode] Selects how to display the spectra.

8
Each time this key is pressed, the parameter toggles
between Sequential and Overlay.
8
Display method
Sequential The screen is renewed for each scan
8 and only the spectrum from that
measurement is displayed.
Overlay The screen is not updated with each
8 scanning result. The spectrum display
for each scan is left as it is so that
8 multiple spectra are overlaid in the
display.
8 8 [Auto-Print] Switches ON/OFF of the auto-print function.

Each pressing of this key toggles between ON and
8 OFF.
Description
ON A screen hard copy and measurement
parameters are automatically printed
after the measurement.
For details on the printout form, refer to
8 "8.4.2 Waveform Format", Fig. 8.9
Example of waveform printout (with
hard copy printer).
8
OFF The automatic printout is not performed.
• For multi-cell measurements and repeated

8 measurements without using the auto-file function,
only the latest-acquired data can be saved or printed
after the measurement. Therefore, if you wish to
8
obtain the printouts of these measurement results,
connect the printer (Communication: ON) and set the
8 auto-print function to [ON] beforehand.
9 [Light source] Selects the light source for the measurement. (E

8 (energy) mode only)
Select a light source for the energy measurement. The
selected light source will be used regardless of the
8
parameter setting for the light source.
8 Light source types

WI lamp Selects the tungsten iodine lamp
(halogen lamp).
D2 lamp Selects the deuterium lamp.
OFF Turns OFF both the WI and D2 lamps.
8-6 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
8
Operation
0 [BaseCorr] Allows you to set a blank sample prior to the

8
measurement of an unknown sample and correct the
baseline.
8
a [SmplCmpt] Set the sample module. The setting items include the
sample module type and the operating conditions of
the sipper. 8
^ "20.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper
Operation)" 8
b [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen.
c [SavParam] Saves current measurement parameters to the built-in 8

memory or USB memory device.
^ "5.1 Save Files" 8
d – Starts the measurement under the set parameters and
displays the Measurement screen (Fig. 8.3). 8
UV-1280 8-7
8.2 8.2 Measurement

When you press the key in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 8.1) or
Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.3), measurement starts and a spectral waveform is plotted in real time
8
(Fig. 8.2).
After the measurement has been finished (stopped), the Curve Display screen will be displayed as
8
shown in Fig. 8.3.
8
Wavelength/Photometric value
The current status is displayed.
8
1
Fig. 8.2 Screen during measurement
8
Key
No. Display Description
8 Operation
1 – Terminates the current measurement and moves to the
8 Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.3).
8
NOTE
8 When [7. Display mode] is set to "Overlay" in the Measurement Parameter Configuration
screen (Fig. 8.1), all spectra are overlaid on the screen graph. However, only the spectrum
data obtained in the latest measurement can be saved, processed, and printed.
8
8-8 UV-1280
8.2 Measurement
8.2.2 Auto-file Function 8

When using a USB memory device, you can save all curve data acquired in a repeated measurement.
8
* The repeated measurement refers to a measurement of which the "No. of scans" parameter is set to
more than [2] in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen.
8
1 If you set a parameter for repeated measurements

and press the key, the confirmation screen 8
appears asking you whether or not to execute the
auto-file function.
8
2 Use
the key.
keys to select [Yes] and press
8
3 The screen for saving multiple files appears. Enter

the file name and press the [Register] key.
8
(^ "5.1.2 Save Multiple Files")
8
4 A repeated measurement is started.
Upon completion of the measurement, the multiple
8
spectrum data obtained are saved to the USB
memory. The file name specified in procedure 3 is
assigned to those data with sequential numbers from 8
"01" attached.
UV-1280 8-9
8.3 8.3 Displaying Spectrum
8 8.3.1 Curve Display Screen

When you complete/terminate measurement, or press the [MeasScrn] key in the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 8.1), the Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.3) appears.
8
In this screen, you can display, save, and print the waveform within measured or loaded spectrum
data.
8
Wavelength/
8 Photometric value
The current status is displayed.
1 2 3 4
Fig. 8.3 Curve Display Screen

8
8 NOTE
Acquired curve data is not yet saved when the measurement has completed. The curve data
will be lost if (1) the next sample measurement is started, (2) another curve data file is loaded,
8
or (3) the measurement parameters are changed.
To save the acquired spectrum data, press the key.
8
8
1 [Zoom] Changes the vertical or horizontal axis range.

8
^ "8.3.3 Zoom Screen"
2 [DataProc] Performs the following data processings on

8
displayed spectra.
• Mathematical calculation, derivative processing,
8
peak detection, Area calculation, point pick and
printout.
^ Chapter 15 "Data Processing"
3 [LoadCurv] Loads the spectrum data files that are stored in the
memory storage.
^ "5.2.2 Load Multiple Files"
8-10 UV-1280
8.3 Displaying Spectrum

4 [SavCurve] Saves the acquired spectrum data to the built-in
memory storage or USB memory device. 8
^ "5.1 Save Files"
– – The measurement is started under the set 8

parameters and the spectrum is displayed.
If pressed during measurement, the measurement is
8
terminated.
– – Prints a hard copy of the screen or the spectrum

8
data.
^ "8.4 Print Out"
– – Returns to the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig.

8
8.1).
– – Displays the reading cursor on the graph to read the 8

wavelength and data values at any arbitrary cursor
position. 8
^ "8.3.2 Reading with Cursor"
UV-1280 8-11
8 8.3.2 Reading with Cursor

If the or key is pressed in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.3), the reading cursor
appears.
8
Using this reading cursor, you can read the wavelength and data values at any arbitrary cursor
position.
8
Furthermore, for listing or printing the data values at multiple wavelengths, refer to the description on
the point pick function (^ "15.6 Point Pick"). For printing all data as numeric values, refer to the
8 description on the print processing function (^ "15.7 Print Processing").
8
Reading cursor
Wavelength/
8 Measured value
Indicates the wavelength and
measured value at the cursor
position.
8
Fig. 8.4 Reading with Cursor screen
8

8
Moves the cursor on the graph and displays the wavelength and
photometric values at the current cursor position.
8
Holding down the key will move the cursor faster.
Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed.

8
Any keys other than The reading cursor disappears, and you will return to the Curve Display
above screen (Fig. 8.3).
8
NOTE
When multiple spectra are overlaid on the graph, the cursor reads the wavelength and
photometric values of the latest measured or loaded spectrum data.
8-12 UV-1280
8.3.3 Zoom Screen 8
When you press the [Zoom] key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.3), the Zoom screen
(Fig. 8.5) will be displayed. 8
The displayed spectrum can be enlarged or reduced by changing the vertical or horizontal axis of the
spectrum (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis). 8
8
NOTE
1. If the curve data is overwritten on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
reduction is applied to the last loaded data. 8
2. If the measurement result is overwritten, the enlargement or reduction is applied to the last
measurement data.
8
8
1 2 3
Fig. 8.5 Zoom screen

8
UV-1280 8-13
1 [InputNum] Enlarges or reduces the graph by directly specifying

8 the vertical or horizontal axis range.
Specify the range value at the cursor position with
numeric keys, and confirm it with the key.
8
Each pressing of key moves the cursor to
[vertical axis upper limit] → [vertical axis lower limit]
8 → [horizontal axis lower limit] → [horizontal axis
upper limit], and finally returns to the Zoom screen
8 (Fig. 8.6).
Cursor
8
Input range/
Input value
8 Displays
available input
range and key
input value.
8
8 NOTE
Data exist only at each scan pitch. Therefore,
when values other than the integral multiple of the
8
scan pitch are entered as horizontal axis values,
the entered values are automatically replaced
8 with the wavelength values nearest to the existing
data values.
8 2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the
displayed spectrum automatically.
8 3 [Restore] Restores the display range to the original state.
– – Prints the curve data with the zoom operation

8 applied.
^ "8.4 Print Out"
8 – – Displays the cursor on the spectrum graph to

activate the cursor reading function.
8 ^ "8.3.2 Reading with Cursor"
8-14 UV-1280
8.4 8.4 Print Out
The graph of the spectrum data can be printed out in "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" or "Hard copy of
8
screen ([Screen copy])". For printing all data as numeric values, refer to the description on the print
processing function (^ "15.7 Print Processing").
8
8.4.1 Print Mode

8
If you press the key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.3), the screen will appear for
selecting a print mode from above.
Move the cursor to the desired mode with the keys, and confirm the selection with
8
the key.
8
8
Cursor
Fig. 8.7 Print form selection screen

8
UV-1280 8-15
8.4 Print Out
8  Print waveform ([Draw curve])

The graph and measurement parameters of a spectrum data are printed out. If a commercially
available printer is selected, the screen for selecting a grid type for the graph output is displayed.
8 Move the cursor to the desired grid type with the keys, and confirm the selection
with the key.
8
8
Cursor
Fig. 8.8 Grid Type Selection screen
When the grid type is confirmed, the spectrum and parameters in measured or loaded curve data are
printed out. The print form varies according to the connected printer for output.
8
^ "8.4.2 Waveform Format"
8
NOTE
Even though multiple spectra are overlaid on the screen, only the latest measured or loaded
8 curve data can be printed out.
8  Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy])

The current screen (spectrum display screen) image when the key is pressed will be printed
in the same size.
8
8-16 UV-1280
8.4 Print Out
8.4.2 Waveform Format 8

First, the print format for the "Print waveform" varies according to the connected printer for output.
The following shows examples of printouts using different types of printers.
8
 Output to a hard-copy printer

8
8
The screen hard copy
excluding the title row
and function row 8
8
Measurement end date
Measurement
parameters 8
Fig. 8.9 Example of waveform printout (with hard copy printer)
UV-1280 8-17
8.4 Print Out
8  Output to a commercially available printer

8
Measurement parameters
Fig. 8.10 Example of waveform printout (with commercially available printer)

8
8-18 UV-1280
9
9 Quantitation
Chapter 9 Quantitation 9
9
The quantitation mode is used to quantify an unknown sample by creating a calibration curve from the standard
sample. The following four types of measurement methods are available according to the number of 9
wavelengths used:
• One-wavelength method: The sample is quantified using its absorbance at a single wavelength. The
operation procedures in this chapter mainly describe this method.
• Two-wavelength method: The absorbance at a wavelength other than the quantitation wavelength is used to
eliminate the interfering components and contaminants (^ "9.5.1 Two-wavelength Quantitation").
• Three-wavelength method: The absorbance of two wavelengths is used to eliminate the interfering
components (^ "9.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation"). 9
• Derivative quantitation: The derivative value (1st through 4th orders) for the spectrum at the quantitation
wavelength is used (^ "9.6 Derivative Quantitation Method").
The calibration curve is created using one of the following three methods: 9
• K factor method: In the equation, "concentration = K x absorbance + B", K and B are predetermined.
• Single-point calibration curve method: One standard sample is measured to create the calibration curve.
• Multi-point calibration curve method: Multiple standard samples (10 maximum) are measured to create the 9
calibration curve.
If the measurement is repeated, the measurement results may be displayed as a list. A single list can include a
maximum of 200 measurement results. This data may be stored as a single file in the memory of the main unit. 9
CONTENTS

9
9.2 Creating a Calibration Curve ........................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation) .................................................................................... 9-16
9.4 List Display ...................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9
9.5 Two/Three-wavelength Quantitation Method................................................................................... 9-20
9.6 Derivative Quantitation Method ....................................................................................................... 9-22
9
UV-1280 9-1
When you select [3. Quantitation] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the
9
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen in Fig. 9.1 will be displayed.
9
Set wavelength/Measured
value
1 Indicates Abs or %T measured
9 at the currently set
wavelength.
2
3
9 4
5
9
0
9
6 7 8 9

9
9
1 [Meas.] Selects the measurement method used for

quantitation.
^ "9.1.1 Select Measurement Method"
9 2 [Method] Selects the calibration method used for
quantitation.
9 ^ "9.1.2 Select Calibration Method"
9-2 UV-1280

3 [No. of Meas.] Specifies how many times the same sample is
to be measured. 9
Input range of repetition count: 1 to 10 times
When the repetition count is set to more than 1
9
• Standard sample: The measurement is
repeatedly performed and the mean value for
absorbance is used. 9
^ "9.2.2 Entering Absorbance"
• Unknown sample: The measurement is
repeatedly performed and both the measured
9
values and mean value are displayed.
^ "9.3.1 Measurement Screen" 9
To abort the repeating measurement, press the
key. In this case, the mean value will
9
not be calculated.
NOTE
The repeating measurement while using a 9
multi-cell or similar holder (optional) with the
multiple cells cannot be carried out. 9
4 [Unit] Specifies the concentration unit for the
Quantitation result by selecting one of the
following units:
None, %, ppm, ppb, g/l, mg/ml, ng/ml, M/L and
9
µg/ml.
You can also register the desired unit other than
those listed above.
9
^ "9.1.3 Select Concentration Unit"
5 [Baseline The baseline is corrected in the wavelength 9

correction] range specified in the measurement
wavelengths. To perform the quantitation by the 9
two-wavelength, three-wavelength, or derivative
quantitation method, set the blank sample on
9
the cell prior to the measurement, and then
correct the baseline.
To abort the correction, press the key.
9
6 [ClbCurve] Switches to the Calibration Curve screen.

^ "9.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve" 9
If a calibration has not been created, switches
9
to the screen for creating the calibration curve
(Concentration Table screen).
^ "9.2 Creating a Calibration Curve"
UV-1280 9-3
7 [SmplCmpt] Sets the parameters for the sample module.

9 The setting items include the sample module
type, the number of cells, and the operating
conditions of the sipper.
9
Sipper Operation)"
9
9 [SavParam] Save measurement parameters, including the

9
calibration curve equation, to the built-in
memory storage or USB memory device.
9 ^ "5.1 Save Files"
0 – If a calibration curve used for quantitation exists

9 or if K-factor method is to be applied, the
measurement is started under the set
9 parameters and the Measurement screen is

displayed.
^ "9.3 Measuring Unknown Sample
9
(Quantitation)"
If a calibration has not been created, switches
to the screen for creating the calibration curve
(Concentration Table screen).
9 ^ "9.2 Creating a Calibration Curve"
9 If it is required to perform a blank correction, place a blank sample and press the key before
measurement.
9 The obtained photometric value will be set to 0 Abs (100 %).
9
NOTE
Changing any parameter (including unit) in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen after
9 creating a calibration curve will result in the deletion of the calibration curve data.
9-4 UV-1280
9.1.1 Select Measurement Method 9

When [Meas.] is selected in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the Measurement
Method screen (Fig. 9.2) is displayed.
9
Select the measurement method from the following four types and then enter the measurement
wavelength as instruction on the screen.
9
Move the cursor to the desired measurement method with the keys, and confirm it
with the key.
9
Cursor 9
9
Fig. 9.2 Measurement Method screen
9
[1λ] (One-wavelength method)
Enter measurement wavelength λ1.
[2λ] (Two-wavelength method) 9
Enter measurement wavelengths λ1 and λ2. λ1 is the quantitation wavelength and λ2 the
wavelength at which to eliminate the interfering components. (^ "9.5.1 Two-wavelength
9
Quantitation")
[3λ] (Three-wavelength method)
Enter measurement wavelengths λ1, λ2 and λ3. λ1 is the quantitation wavelength, and λ2 and λ3
the wavelengths at which to eliminate the interfering components. The entered wavelength
values are automatically arranged as λ1, λ2, and λ3 in this order starting with the longer
wavelength side. (^ "9.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation") 9
[Derivative] (Derivative quantitation method)
Enter the measurement wavelength λ1 and the order of the derivatives. 9
(^ "9.6 Derivative Quantitation Method")
UV-1280 9-5
9 9.1.2 Select Calibration Method

When [Method] is selected in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the Calibration
Method screen (Fig. 9.3) is displayed.
9 Select one of the three quantitation methods, namely [K-facter (C=K*Abs + B)], [1 point calib.],
and [Multi-point calib.], and then set the parameters according to the instructions given on the
screen.
9
Move the cursor to the desired calibration method with the keys, and confirm
it with the key.
9
When the single-point calibration curve or the multi-point calibration curve is selected, measure
the standard sample for creating the calibration curve before measuring an unknown sample.
9
Cursor
9
9
Fig. 9.3 Calibration Method screen
9 • [K Factor]
The relationship between the concentration C and absorbance Abs of a sample is expressed
as C=K × Abs + B, and when the values for the constants K and B are already known, you can
9 manually enter the values for K and B to create the calibration curve.
If K-factor method is selected in the Calibration Method screen, the screen for specifying a
factor is displayed. Input the factor with numeric keys, and press the key. The factor
at the cursor position is confirmed. After the confirmation of K value, the cursor moves to the B
value column. After the B value has been confirmed by the same procedure, the UV-1280
returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 9.1).
9
Input range for K and B: –9999.9 to 9999.9
The number of significant figures is 5 (0.0001 is acceptable).
9
9
Fig. 9.4 Setup screen for calibration curve (K factor method)
9
9-6 UV-1280
• [1 point] (Single point calibration curve method)

9
This will measure the concentration of an unknown sample by finding the value for K in the
calibration curve equation C=K × Abs from a single standard sample of known concentration.
The calibration curve will be a straight line defined by the origin and the absorbance and 9
concentration of the standard sample. The created calibration curve can be reviewed by
pressing the key on the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 9.1).
9
• [Multi-point] (Multi-point calibration curve method)
Set the parameters for creating the calibration curve from multiple standard samples of known
concentrations. A linear, quadratic, or cubic equation can be used as the calibration curve 9
equation. Enter the number of standard samples, the order of the calibration curve equation,
and the zero intercept conditions according to the messages appearing on the screen.
9
The required number of standard sample is equal to or larger than the order of the calibration
curve equation when "0 Intercept" is set to YES, or equal to or larger than the order of the
calibration curve equation plus 1 when "0 Intercept" is set to NO. 9
Number of standard samples: 1 to 10
Order: 1 to 3
Zero intercept: YES/NO 9
The cursor on the screen indicates the item currently specified. Confirming the selection with
the key moves the cursor to the next item.
After all the parameters are specified, the UV-1280 returns to the Measurement Parameter 9
Configuration screen.
Cursor
9
Input value
Input range
9
Fig. 9.5 Setup screen for calibration curve (multi-point calibration curve method)
9
UV-1280 9-7
9 9.1.3 Select Concentration Unit

When [Unit] is selected on the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 9.1), the
Concentration Unit screen (Fig. 9.6) is displayed.
9
Move the cursor to the desired concentration unit using the keys, and confirm it
with the key.
9
To use a unit other than those displayed on the list, select [Unit Regist.] on the screen.
9
Registered unit
Cursor Indicates the unit that has been created
and registered by the user.
9
Fig. 9.6 Concentration Unit screen

9
If [Unit Regist.] is selected, the Unit Registration screen appears (Fig. 9.7).
Using the keys, move the cursor to desired characters on the
9
list, and confirm it with the key.
9
NOTE
A maximum of 6 characters can be entered as a registered unit.
Press the [Register] key to register the unit you have entered. The unit will be displayed in
9
the Concentration Unit screen.
Cursor
9
9
Fig. 9.7 Unit Registration screen
9
9-8 UV-1280
9.1.4 Save Calibration Curve 9

A calibration curve can be saved to memory at the same time that the other measurement parameters
are saved using the [Sav Param] function in the Parameter Configuration screen.
9
(See "5.1 Save Files".)
A saved calibration curve can be recalled at the same time as the other measurement parameters
9
using [Params] in the [Mode menu] screen.
(See "4.3 Load Parameters".)
9
UV-1280 9-9
9.2 9.2 Creating a Calibration Curve
If the single point or multi-point calibration curve is selected for the calibration curve method among
9
the measurement parameters, the calibration curve must be created before an unknown sample is
measured. The calibration curve equation may be stored as a parameters file like other parameters. It
9
is therefore possible to call it using the parameter call function ( key) via the [Mode menu]
screen.
9 When the key is pressed with the Parameter Configuration screen displayed, the screen for
entering concentration of standard sample (concentration table) appears.
9
9.2.1 Entering Concentrations
9 Key in the concentration of standard samples (STD). Their concentrations can be entered at random
regardless of which one is larger or smaller.
9 When the concentrations of all the standard samples are entered, the screen for entering absorbance
appears.
Cursor
9 Indicates where
concentration is to be
entered.
9
Fig. 9.8 Concentration Table (entering concentrations)
9
9-10 UV-1280
9.2 Creating a Calibration Curve
9.2.2 Entering Absorbance 9

Specify the absorbance (Abs) of each standard sample (STD) by selecting one of the following three
methods.
9
When the concentrations are entered, the screen for selecting a method to input absorbance appears.
To select the input method, use the keys to move the cursor to the desired input
9
method, and confirm your selection with the key.
Cursor
9
NOTE
• For the single point curve calibration curve method, select either [Keying-in] or [Measurement
9
input (cell 1 only)].
• If the repetition count is set to more than one (1), you cannot select [Multi-cell sequential
measurement input].
9
 Keying-in ([Key-in]) 9
Enter a value for Abs.
 Measurement input (cell 1 only) ([Meas. (only cell)])
Set the standard samples on the multi-cell holder (optional) in the order of having entered their
concentrations starting with cell 1, and then press the key. 9
If the repetition count is set to more than one, the measurement will be performed repeatedly and the
mean value for absorbance will be used.
9
Fig. 9.9 shows the Standard Sample Measurement screen.
The table on the left side screen displays the concentration and absorbance of each standard sample. 9
When measurements are repeated, the measured values are displayed in the table on the right side
screen. After the repeated measurements are completed, the mean value of the results is displayed 9
on the left side table as the standard sample absorbance.
UV-1280 9-11
9 Measured value at repeated

measurement run
Displays each measured value
Cursor obtained during repeated
9 measurements.
9
Absorbance
Displays the mean value
obtained during repeated
9 measurements.
9
Fig. 9.9 Standard Sample Measurement screen (multi-point calibration method)
9
 Multi-cell sequential measurement input (Displayed only when the Multi-point
calibration curve method is selected)
9 Each cell will be automatically selected to carry out the measurement.
9 Even though using a multi-cell holder that can hold more than 10 cells, no more than 10 standard
samples can be measured. Additionally, if for example 7 standard samples are to be measured with a
6-cell holder, the measurement will be interrupted when the 6th measurement has completed, and the
UV-1280 will return to the standby screen for the next measurement.
9-12 UV-1280
9.2.3 Concentration Table 9

After the input of absorbance has been completed, the Concentration/Abs Data screen (Fig. 9.10)
appears. This screen allows you to review the calibration curve by pressing the key.
9
1 2 3 4
9
Fig. 9.10 Concentration/Abs Data screen (concentration table)
1 [ClbCurve] Switches to the Calibration Curve screen.

^ "9.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve"
9
2 [Change] Allows changing the concentration and
absorbance of the specified standard sample
number. 9
3 [Delete] Deletes the data on the specified standard
sample number. 9
4 [Add] Allows adding each concentration and
absorbance of the standard sample. 9
– – Switches to the Measurement screen and starts
measurement of unknown sample. 9
^ "9.3 Measuring Unknown Sample
(Quantitation)"
9
9
UV-1280 9-13
9 9.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve

The calibration curve can be reviewed on the Concentration Table screen (Fig. 9.10) or the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 9.1).
9
1 2 3 4
9
Fig. 9.11 Calibration Curve screen
9
Key
Operation
1 [Std.Tab] Displays the list of concentration and absorbance of each

9
standard sample. ^ "9.2.3 Concentration Table"
9-14 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
9
Operation
2 [Equation] Displays the calibration curve equation.

9
9
Fig. 9.12 Calibration Curve screen
The correlation coefficient r2 is obtained using the
following equation (only when there is no zero intercept): 9
{ Σ ( Ai – A m ) ( Ci – C m ) } 2
r 2 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
{ Σ ( Ai – A m ) 2 } { Σ ( Ci – C m ) 2 }
9
where
Ai: Absorbance of standard sample
Ci: Concentration of standard sample
9
Am: Mean value of Ai
Cm: Mean value of Ci
NOTE 9
For the quadratic or cubic equation, the value of
K3Ci3 + K2Ci2 + K1Ci + K0 is used for the value Ai.
9
3 [Chg.Ord.] Allows changing the order of the calibration curve.
4 [NewCalib] Creates a calibration curve. The concentration and 9

absorbance values of all the standard samples are
deleted and then the screen for entering concentration
9
appears.
^ "9.2.1 Entering Concentrations"
9
– – Switches to the Measurement screen and starts
measurement of unknown sample.
^ "9.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation)" 9
– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration
screen (Fig. 9.1). 9
UV-1280 9-15
9.3 9.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation)

After the calibration curve has been created successfully, an unknown sample can be measured.
Press the [DataDisp] key or the key while the Measurement Parameter
9
Configuration screen (Fig. 9.1) is displayed. The Measurement screen will appear (Fig. 9.13). If the
key is pressed, the first measurement run will be carried out.
9
Set wavelength/
9 Photometric value
The current status is
displayed.
Sample No.*
9
Concentration
Indicates the concentration
calculated from the
9 calibration curve equation.
9 Absorbance
Cursor
Indicates the sample The number of display digits
No. for the next 5 6 follows the setting.
(See "16.1.2 Decimal
9 measurement.
Display".)
1 2 3 4
9
* The display format of sample No. varies according to the set measurement parameters.
 When measuring a single cell or using the Multi-cell (optional) with the parameter of "Drive cell No." set to "1".
The sample numbers are assigned from 1 sequentially.
 When measuring multiple cells by attaching the Multi-cell (optional), etc.

A hyphen (-) and cell No. are attached to the sample No.
Example) The first measurement at cell position "3" => Sample No.: 1-3
9
 When measurements are repeated
A hyphen (-) and repetition count or "m" signifying a mean value are attached to the sample No.
Example) The second measurement of the first sample => Sample No.: 1-2 (1-m for the mean value)
9
Fig. 9.13 Measurement screen for unknown sample

9
9 1 [Smpl No.] Changes the next measured sample number by
entering a number in a range between 0 and
9 9999.
2 [ClbCurve] Displays the calibration curve.

9 ^ "9.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve"
3 [DataDisp] Displays the list of measurement data or allows
9 printing it out again. ^ "9.4 List Display"

9 file to the memory storage.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
9-16 UV-1280
9.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation)

parameters. 9
NOTE
A maximum of 200 measurements can be 9
entered in a single table data file.
6 – Delete all the data displayed on the screen.
9
– – Returns to the Measurement Parameters
9
9
NOTE
Repeated measurement using a multi-cell or similar holder (optional) with the multiple cells
cannot be carried out. 9
9
9.3.2 Data Print for Each Measurement
If a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1280 (and communication is established), the
measurement results will be printed on the printer every time measurement has finished. 9
9
End Date/Time of First
Measurement
9
Header Part
First Measurement 9
UV-1280 9-17
9.4 9.4 List Display
9 9.4.1 List Display Screen

As the measurement is repeated, the Measurement screen will be scrolled while displaying only the
latest eight measurement results. The list display function is used to display the list of the
9
measurement data.
9
Data display list
9 results or all data contained
in a table data file. (The
data are displayed from
Sample No. 1.)
9
9 Page number
3
9
1 2
Fig. 9.15 List Display screen

9

9
"5.2.1 Load Single File"
9
3 – Allows scrolling the data table to review hidden
measurement data.
9
Each pressing of the key scrolls the table by 8 data
lines.
9
9-18 UV-1280
9.4 List Display

The entire data can be printed out as a numeric data table on the printer (optional). In the header part,
the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement parameters are
9
printed.
9
NOTE
9
End Date/Time of First
Measurement
9
Header Part
9
First Measurement
9
UV-1280 9-19
9.5 9.5 Two/Three-wavelength Quantitation Method
This is an accurate quantitation method which can be used to eliminate the effects of dispersion due to
9
interfering components and contaminants, and in to correct "floating" of the baseline due to bubbles
when such conditions exist.
9
9.5.1 Two-wavelength Quantitation

9
This method quantitates based on the difference between the photometric values at two wavelengths.
This allows for the elimination of the effects of interfering components.
9 Assume that the absorbance of the measured sample is A1 and A2 at wavelengths λ1 and λ2, that the
absorbance of the target component B is B1 and B2, and that the absorbance of interfering component
9 C is C1 and C2 (A1 = B1 + C1, A2 = B2 + C2).
When wavelengths λ1 and λ2 are selected so that C1 is equal to C2, the following equation holds:
9 A1 – A2 = B1 – B2
Thus, the information on the target component remains. Normally, the absorbance wavelength for the
target component is set for λ1.
9
An example of two-wavelength measurement is shown in Fig. 9.17.
9
Measurement curve A
Interfering component C
9 Target component B
9
Fig. 9.17 Schematic diagram of two-wavelength quantitation
9 Quantitation measurement is then performed according to these parameters.
9-20 UV-1280
9.5 Two/Three-wavelength Quantitation Method
9.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation 9

Three-wavelength quantitation also eliminates the effects of interfering components, and is also useful
in eliminating "floating" of sloped baselines due to dust, etc.
9
The following calculation is performed based on the photometric values at three wavelengths.
( λ 1 – λ 2 )A 3 + ( λ 2 – λ 3 )A 1
 Where, A 4 = ------------------------------------------------------------------
A2 – A4 - 9
 λ1 – λ3
Where A1, A2, and A3 stand for the absorbance of the sample at wavelengths λ1, λ2, and λ3. (See Fig.
9
9.18)
The elimination of the effects of an interfering component will be explained below using Fig. 9.18.
If λ1, λ2 and λ3 are taken so that the points S, T and U of the interfering component are connected by 9
a single straight line, then A2-A4 = B2-B4, leaving only the information for the target component.
Normally, the absorbance wavelength for the target component is set for λ2. Quantitation 9
measurement is then performed according to these parameters.
Measurement curve A
9
Interfering component C
Target component B
9
9
Fig. 9.18 Schematic diagram of three-wavelength quantitation
9
UV-1280 9-21
9.6 9.6 Derivative Quantitation Method
This method of quantitation uses the derivative value at a set wavelength(s). Derivative quantitation
9
has the following advantages.
• Absorption bands can be recognized when there are two or more absorption bands overlapping at
9 the same wavelength or at slightly different wavelengths.
• Weak absorption bands which are hidden in portions where the absorbance increases sharply
relative to wavelength.
9 • The single greatest point of absorption can be recognized in broad absorption spectra.
• Since a straight line correlation can be drawn between the derivative value and the concentration,
quantitative analysis becomes simpler in the presence of a background.
9
The 2nd derivative spectrum in a case where two absorption bands overlap at different wavelengths is
shown in Fig. 9.19. (a) is the normal spectrum, where the absorption band B cannot be discerned in
9 the spectrum A + B in which the absorption bands A and B are overlapped. The 2nd order derivative
of this is shown in (b), where the spectrum A + B is obtained by the combination of the derivatives of
9 absorption bands A and B. Thus, the absorption band B, which was hidden in the larger absorption
band A, can clearly be discerned in the 2nd derivative.
9 Refer to "15.3 Derivative Operations" for details on derivative calculations.

Derivative in the quantitation mode is calculated from 17 points of data before and after the center of
the set wavelength. The derivative wavelength difference Δλ is constant at 0.8 nm. In addition, the
9
order of derivative can be set from 1st through 4th.
9 Fig. 9.19 2nd derivative spectrum with two absorption bands - Overlapping at different wavelengths -
9-22 UV-1280
1
10 Kinetics
Chapter 10 Kinetics 1
1
The Kinetics mode allows you to measure the changes in the absorbance (Abs), which occur over time from the
enzyme reaction, and to obtain the activity value of the enzyme from that measurement result. 1
CONTENTS
10
10.1 Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 Measurement................................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.5 Data List ........................................................................................................................................ 10-15
10.6 Print (Output) Format..................................................................................................................... 10-19 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
UV-1280 10-1
10.1 Operation
10.1
When you select [4. Kinetics] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10 When you select [1. Kinetics] (press the key) in the Method Selection screen, the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for kinetics measurement (Fig. 10.3) will be displayed.
10
In the kinetics measurement, it is possible to display the change (Reaction speed) at the rate of
absorbance on the screen and to obtain the change in absorbance quantity of an interval set by the
10
lag time and rate time by calculating its change in quantity per minute. To eliminate the effect of the
background, the measurement is performed at two wavelengths (for measurement and background
correction), and the reaction speed can be obtained by similarly calculating from the time course
change in the difference of the two measured absorbances.
10 Fig. 10.2 shows the relation between the change in the rate of absorbance and the lag time and rate
time. Linear regression of the sampling data between the rate time is carried out by the method of
10 least squares to obtain the rate of change (Δ Abs/min).

Activity values are obtained by multiplying the range of change by four factor values.
10
(Activity value) = (Factor 1) × (Factor 2) × (Factor 3) × (Factor 4) × (Rate of change)
10
10
10
10
10-2 UV-1280
10.1 Operation
1
Measurement time
Lag time Rate time

1
Initial value
1
(Absorbance)
(time)
1
Start Measurement end
1
Fig. 10.2 Lag time and rate time
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
UV-1280 10-3
10.2
Fig. 10.3 shows the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for Kinetics measurement.
10
Set the parameters by pressing the numeric keys corresponding to the item numbers on the screen.
10
Set wavelength/
1 Absorbance
10 2
Indicates Abs measured at the
currently set wavelength.
3
10
4
10 5
6
Sample module
10 (No. of drive cell)
a
Indicates the type of the current
multi-cell holder for sample
control and the number of drive
10 cells.
8 9 0
(BG correction: OFF)

10
10
Measurement wavelength
When the background
correction is ON, the
10 correction wavelength (λb) is
also displayed.
10
a
10
7
10
(BG correction: ON)
10
Key
10 No. Display Description
Operation
1 [Meas. λ] Specifies the measurement wavelength (λ) and the

10 wavelength for background measurement (λb: only
when the background correction is ON).
10 2 [BG Corr.] Indicates whether or not to perform the background

correction.
Each pressing of the key toggles the background
correction ON/OFF.
10-4 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
1
Operation
3 [Meas. time] Specifies Measurement time, Cycle, and Lag/Rate

1
[Cycle] time (start and end times of activity value calculation)
[Lag/Rate] in order. Confirm each of the values using the
1
key.
^ "10.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle
(Measurement Cycle), and Lag/Rate" 1
4 [Factor] Used to input a coefficient for the equation that
connects the rate of change of absorbance in terms of 1
the activity value.
It is possible to specify each of the four factors in the
1
equation below. The input range is from -9999.9 to
9999.9. The number of significant figures is 5. (0.0001
1
is acceptable.)
(Activity value) = (Factor 1) × (Factor 2) × (Factor 3) × 1

(Factor 4) × (Reaction speed)
5 [Rec. range] The recording range is used to input the upper limit/ 1
lower limit of the Y-axis when displaying the Reaction
Curve on the screen.
10
Input range is from -4.000A to 4.000A.
6 [Time scale] The time scale (unit) can be toggled between minutes
and seconds. When the key is pressed the unit of time
is changed from [min] to [sec] and vice versa.
10
7 [BaseCorr] Performs the baseline correction involving the
wavelength specified in [1. Meas. λ]. (Displayed only
when BG correction is ON.) 10
8 [SmplCmpt] Sets the sample module.
^ "20.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper 10
Operation)"
9 [MeasScrn] Measurement results are displayed in tabular format. 10

0 [SavParam] Saves the current measurement parameters.
a – Switches to the Reaction Curve Display screen and
starts the measurement. 10
– – Returns to the Kinetics Method Selection screen (Fig.
10.1). 10
UV-1280 10-5
10 10.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle (Measurement Cycle), and Lag/

Rate
When [3] (Meas. Time, Cycle, and Lag/Rate) is selected in the Measurement Parameter Configuration
10
screen, the following values should be entered:
 Measurement time
10 To set the measurement time, enter the total time to obtain actual absorbance data values. The input
range is from 1 to 9999 seconds (minutes).
10 However, when the background correction is ON or when performing a multi cell measurement with
multi-cell holder, the lower limit of the range is determined by the difference of set wavelengths or the
10 number of drive cells.
10
10
10
10
10
Input range
 Cycle (measurement cycle)

10 Specify the interval (measurement cycle) to acquire measurement data.
Move the cursor on the selection screen with the keys, and confirm the selection
10 with the key.

Up to 2001 data points can be obtained in this measurement method. You cannot select measurement
cycle values that create data points exceeding the limit.
10
10
10
Fig. 10.5 [Cycle] screen

10
10
10-6 UV-1280
The unit of the measurement cycle follows the setting specified in the [6. Time scale] in the
1
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen.
If [Integer] is selected, the cycle input range is as given in the following:
1
When "Measurement time" < 2001 sec. (min.): Integers from 1 to 1000
When "Measurement time" 2001 sec. (min.): Integers from (Measurement time/2000) to 1000
As in the setting of measurement time, however, when the background correction is ON or when 1
performing a multi cell measurement with multi-cell holder, the lower limit of the range is determined
by the difference of set wavelengths or the number of drive cells. 1
 Lag/Rate 1
For Lag (lag time), define the time period which is not counted for activity value calculation. Specify
the time from the measurement start.
1
For Rate (rate time), define the time period which is counted for activity value calculation. Specify the
time from the lag time end (See Fig. 10.2).
The input range for the lag time is from [0 to (Measurement time - Cycle)] (in units of 1). The range for 1
the rate time is from [Cycle to (Measurement time - Lag time)] (in units of 1).
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
UV-1280 10-7
10.3 Measurement
10.3
When the kinetics measurement is started, the reaction curve starts being plotted on the screen in real
10
time (Fig. 10.6).
After the measurement, measurement results are displayed in the data table (^ "10.5 Data List")
10
the screen will be changed to one showing the reaction curve (Fig. 10.7).
The dotted line as shown in Fig. 10.6 indicates the calculation interval of the activity value (the end of
10 lag time and the end of rate time).
10 on the printer for every measurement.
10 Elapsed time/
Photometric value
Indicates the time elapsed after
measurement start and the
10 Lag time end
current absorbance.
10 Rate time end
Time period for activity value

10 calculation
10
1
10 Fig. 10.6 Kinetics Measurement screen
No. Key Operation Description
1 Terminates measurement and displays the Data List Display

10
screen (Fig. 10.13). After the measurement results has been
registered and displayed, the Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.7) is
10 displayed. In the case of multi-cell measurement, the
measurement will be terminated after the last cell measurement
10 has completed. All data measured before the termination can be
considered to be valid.
10
10
10
10
10-8 UV-1280
10.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve
10.4
10.4.1 Curve Display Screen 1

When you complete/terminate measurement, or press the (Curve) key in the Data List
screen (Fig. 10.13), the Curve Display screen appears (Fig. 10.7).
1
1 2 3 4
1
Fig. 10.7 Curve Display screen
NOTE 10
The acquired curve data is not yet saved when the measurement has completed. The curve
data will be lost, if (1) the next sample measurement is started, (2) another curve data file is
loaded, or (3) the measurement and calculation parameters are changed. To save the
acquired curve data, press the key.
10
10
1 [Zoom] Changing the range of Y-axis and X-axis of

10
displayed reaction curve enables zooming of the
reaction curve.
^ "10.4.3 Zoom Screen" 10
2 [DataList] Pressing this function key changes the screen to one
showing the data table. Measurement results 10
(sample number, initial value (Abs), Δa/min, activity
value) will be displayed in tabular format. 10
^ "10.5 Data List"
10
UV-1280 10-9
3 [LoadCurv] Loads a curve data file that is stored in the memory

10 storage.
However, you can load only curve data obtained
under the same parameters (measurement
10
wavelengths, BG correction, and measurement time)
as those currently set.
10 ^ "5.2 Load Files"
The activity value is calculated by the calculation
10 parameters set on the Parameters Setting screen
with respect to the recalled waveform data, and the
results will be displayed.
10
4 [SaveCurv] Saves the acquired reaction curve data to the built-in
memory storage or USB memory device.
10
^ "5.1 Save Files"
– – Starts the measurement under the set parameters.

10
– – Prints a hard copy of the screen or the time course
data.
10
^ "10.4.4 Print Mode"
^ "10.6.1 Waveform Format"
10 – – Returns to the Measurement Parameter
– – Displays the reading cursor on the graph to read the

data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
10
10
10
10
10
10
10-10 UV-1280
10.4.2 Reading with Cursor 1

appears. Using this reading cursor, you can read the data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
1
1
Reading cursor
1
Time/Abs/Cell No. 1
photometric value at the current cursor
position. Indicates also Cell No. for
the multi cell measurement. 1
Fig. 10.8 Reading with Cursor screen 1
10
Moves the cursor on the reaction curve graph and displays the time and
Abs at the cursor position.
10
Selects a reaction curve to be read with the cursor.
When performing a multi cell measurement with multi-cell holder,
multiple reaction curves will be displayed on the graph. 10
Therefore, to review a particular reaction curve, you need to switch the
cell No. and select the target curve by pressing the 10
keys.
Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed. 10

Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears, and the UV-1280 returns to the Curve
above Display screen (Fig. 10.7). 10
10
10
UV-1280 10-11
10 10.4.3 Zoom Screen

When you press the [zoom] key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.7), the Zoom screen
(Fig. 10.9) will be displayed. The displayed reaction curve can be enlarged or reduced by changing
10
the vertical or horizontal axis of the graph (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis).
10
NOTE
10 If the curve data is over-written on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
reduction is applied to the last loaded data.
10
10
10
10
10
10
1 2 3
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10-12 UV-1280
1
Key
Operation
1
1 [InputNum] Enlarges or reduces the graph by directly specifying the
vertical or horizontal axis range.
1
Specify the range value at the cursor position with numeric
keys, and confirm it with the key. Each pressing of
the key moves the cursor to [vertical axis upper 1
limit] → [vertical axis lower limit] → [horizontal axis lower
limit] → [horizontal axis upper limit], and finally returns to 1
the Zoom screen (Fig. 10.9).
1
Cursor
1
Input range/
Input value
Displays
available input 1
range and key
input value.
10
Fig. 10.10 Zoom Screen (during setting)
NOTE
Data exist only at each measurement cycle. Therefore,
when values other than the integral multiple of the cycle 10
are entered as horizontal axis values, the entered values
are automatically replaced with the time values nearest
10
to the existing data values.
2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the displayed
reaction curve automatically.
10
3 [Restore] Restores the display range to the original state.

10
– – Prints the curve data with the zoom operation applied.
^ "10.6 Print (Output) Format"
10
– – Displays the cursor on the reaction curve graph to activate
the cursor reading function.
^ "10.4.2 Reading with Cursor" 10
– – Returns to the Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.7).
10
UV-1280 10-13
10 10.4.4 Print Mode

When you press the key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.7), the screen appears for
selecting a print mode from "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" and "Hard copy of screen ([Screen
10
copy])".
Move the cursor to the desired print mode with the keys, and confirm the selection
10
with the key.
10
Cursor
10
Fig. 10.11 [Print mode] screen
10
 Print waveform ([Draw curve])
Waveforms and measurement parameters of a curve data are printed. ^ "10.6.1 Waveform
10 Format"
For a commercially available printer, the screen for selecting a grid type for graph output is displayed.
10 Move the cursor to the desired grid type with the keys, and confirm the selection
with the key.
10
Cursor
10
Fig. 10.12 [Frame Type] Selection screen
When the grid type is confirmed, the measured or loaded reaction curve and the parameters are
10 printed out.
10  Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy])

The current screen image when the key is pressed will be printed in the same size.
10
10
10
10
10
10-14 UV-1280
10.5 Data List
10.5
10.5.1 Data List Screen 1

As shown in Fig. 10.13, measurement results (Smpl No., Abs (init.), Δ A/min, Activ) will be displayed in
the tabular format. Measurement results for each measurement will be added below. The maximum
1
number of data of measurement results is 200. To display or print out these measurement results,
press the [DataDisp] key to bring up the screen of data display for further processing.
1
Set wavelength/
Photometric Value 1
Sample No. currently set wavelength.
The assignment rule for the
number varies according to 1
the cell holder used.*
Activity value
Reaction speed
1
Cursor
Indicates the sample No. for
the next measurement.
Initial Value
Indicates the absorbance at 1
calculation start. The number
5 6 of display digits follows the
setting.
(^ "16.1.2 Decimal 1
Display")
1 2 3 4
1
* When using a single cell or when No. of drive cells is 1, the sample numbers are assigned in sequence, starting from 1.
When using multiple cells by attaching a multi-cell, a dash (-) and the cell number are attached to the sample number.
Multiple cells: [Sample No.] - [Cell No.] 10
Fig. 10.13 Data List Display screen
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
UV-1280 10-15
10.5 Data List
10
Key
Operation
10
measurement.
10
The sample number can be selected from 0 to 9999.
2 [Curve] Switches to the Reaction Curve Display screen.

10
^ "10.4.1 Curve Display Screen"
3 [DataDisp] Displays and prints all measured data, or loads a table

10
data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "10.5.2 List Display"
10 4 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data file to
the memory storage.
5 – Starts the measurement under the set parameters.

10 NOTE
A maximum of 200 measurements can be entered
10 in a single table data file.
10 – – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration

screen (Fig. 10.3).
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10-16 UV-1280
10.5 Data List
10.5.2 List Display 1

In the screen of the data list, the results of only the 8 immediately previous measurements will be
displayed. In this case, it is possible to display all of the measurement results. It is also possible to
1
output a batch of all measurement results on a printer.
Data display list 1

results or all data
contained in a table data
file. (The data are 1
displayed from Sample
No. 1.)
Page number 1
3
1
1 2

1
Key
10
Operation
1 [PrntData] Prints all listed data or reaction curve data that is

displayed on the screen.
^ "10.5.3 Data Print Format" 10
^ "5.1 Save Files"
10
3 – Allows scrolling the data table to review the hidden
measurement data.
10
Each pressing the key scrolls the table in units by 8
data lines.
10
– – Returns to the List Display screen (Fig. 10.13).
10
10
10
UV-1280 10-17
10.5 Data List
10 10.5.3 Data Print Format

When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen, the screen for selecting a print
format appears. Move the cursor to the desired format with the keys, and confirm
10
the selection with the key.
The print process will be started when the print format is confirmed.
10
Cursor
10
10 Fig. 10.15 [Print format] Selection screen
10
Print Format Description
10 [Table data] Prints all numeric data shown on the data table and the measurement
parameters.
^ "10.6.2 Table Data Format"
10
[Curve data] Prints time and absorbance at each cycle on reaction curve, and also
the measurement parameters.
10
^ "10.6.3 Curve Data Format"
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10-18 UV-1280
10.6 Print (Output) Format
10.6
10.6.1 Waveform Format 1

selecting a print mode (Fig. 10.11).
1
If you select [Draw curve] as a print mode, waveforms and measurement parameters of a curve data
are printed.
1
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the curve data measurement as well as
measurement parameters are printed.
The print format for "Print waveform" varies according to the connected printer for output. 1
1
1
Screen hard copy 1

and function row
1
10
Measurement end
date
Measurement
parameters
10
10
Fig. 10.16 Example of waveform printout (with hard copy printer)
10
10
10
10
10
UV-1280 10-19
10  Output to a commercially available printer
10
10
10
10
10
10
10 Measurement end date
10 Measurement parameters
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10-20 UV-1280
10.6.2 Table Data Format 1

In kinetics measurement, the result can be printed after each measurement, or the entire result can be
printed at once. Both print modes use the same print format.
1
1
End date of first

measurement 1
Header Part
Measurement
parameters
1
First measurement
1
1
Fig. 10.18 Example of table data printout
 Printout for each measurement 1

out on the printer for each measurement (rate interval). 10
 Print all at once

When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 10.14), the screen for
selecting a print format appears. If [Table data] is selected, all measurement results up to that point, or
10
all the data within the currently-loaded table data file will be printed.
10
10
10
10
10
10
UV-1280 10-21
10 10.6.3 Curve Data Format

selecting a print format appears. If [Curve data] is selected, the curve data (time and absorbance at
10
each measurement cycle) within the latest measured or loaded reaction curve will be printed.
10
10 Measurement end date
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Fig. 10.19 Example of curve data printout
10-22 UV-1280
1
11 Kinetics Rate
Chapter 11 Kinetics Rate 1
CONTENTS
1
11.1 Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 11-3 1
11.3 Measurement................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.5 Data List ........................................................................................................................................ 11-15 11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
UV-1280 11-1
11.1 11.1 Operation
When you select [4. Kinetics] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11 When you select [2. Rate] (press the key) in the Method Selection screen, the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen for rate measurement (Fig. 11.2) will be displayed.
11
The kinetics rate measurement mode is used to measure the change in the rate of absorbance for one
wavelength and obtain the change in quantity of absorbance per rate interval.
11
A discriminant is used to determine whether the absorbance is being changed linearly and to display
the linearity (L) or the non-linearity (N). The discriminant is as follows. Linearity (L) is determined by
11
whether the ratio of the rate of change of absorbance during one cycle and the rate of change of one
cycle before are within the proportion (%) set in the criteria.
(Discriminant)
11 |{(change in quantity of absorbance at the last rate interval)-(change in quantity of absorbance at the
rate interval)}/ (change in quantity of absorbance at the last rate interval)| × 100<(criteria)
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-2 UV-1280
11.2
Fig. 11.2 shows the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen.

1
Set the parameters by pressing the numeric keys corresponding to the item numbers on the screen.
1
Set wavelength/
Absorbance
1 Indicates Abs measured at the
2 currently set wavelength. 1
3
1
4
5
1
1
9
1
6 7 8

1
1
1 [Meas. λ] Specifies the measurement wavelength. The

input range is from 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm. 1
2 [Meas. time] Specifies Measurement time, Cycle, and Rate

[Cycle] interval in order. Confirm each of the values with 11
[Interval] the key.
^ "11.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle,
and Interval"
3 [Rec. range] The recording range is used to input the upper 11

limit/lower limit of the Y-axis when displaying the
Reaction Curve on the screen.
11
Input range is from -4.000 A to 4.000 A.
4 [Time scale] The time scale (unit) can be toggled between

11
minutes and seconds. When the key is pressed
the unit of time is changed from [min] to [sec]
and vice versa. 11
11
11
11
UV-1280 11-3
5 [Discriminator] A discriminant is used to determine whether the

11 absorbance is being changed linearly and to
display the linearity (L) or the non-linearity (N).
Discriminant
11
|{(change in quantity of absorbance at the last
rate interval)-(change in quantity of absorbance
11 at the rate interval)} / (change in quantity of
absorbance at the last rate interval)|×100
11 <(Criteria)
^ "11.1 Operation"
11 6 [SmplCmpt] Sets the sample module.

Sipper Operation)"
11
NOTE
Multi-cell measurement with a multi-cell
11
holder is not available in the Rate
measurement.
11
7 [DataList] Measurement results are displayed in tabular
format.
11 8 [SavParam] Saves the current measurement parameters.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
11 9 – Switches to the Data List Display screen and
starts the measurement.
– – Returns to the Kinetics Method selection screen

(Fig. 11.1).
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-4 UV-1280
11.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle, and Interval 1

To set the measurement time, enter the total time to obtain actual absorbance data values. The input 1
1
 Cycle (measurement cycle)
Specify the interval (measurement cycle) to acquire measurement data.
Move the cursor on the selection screen with the keys, and confirm the selection 1
with the key.
Up to 2001 data points can be obtained in this measurement method. You cannot select measurement 1
cycle values that create data points exceeding the limit.
1
Fig. 11.3 [Cycle] screen
The unit of the measurement cycle follows the setting specified in [4. Time scale] on the Measurement
1
Parameter Configuration screen.
1
If [Integer input] is selected, the cycle input range is as given in the following:
When "Measurement time" < 2001 sec. (min.):Integers from 1 to 1000 11
When "Measurement time" 2001 sec. (min.):Integers from (Measurement time/2000) to 1000
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
UV-1280 11-5
11  Interval (rate interval)

In the rate measurement, the reaction speed (Abs/min) at each of the specified rate interval is
obtained.
11 Move the cursor on the selection screen with the keys, and confirm the selection
with the key.
11 Up to 401 measurement points can be obtained in the rate measurement. You cannot select rate
interval values that create measurement points exceeding the limit.
11
11
11
Fig. 11.4 [Interval] screen
11
If [Integer input] is selected, the input range is from [1 to (Measurement time)] (integral multiple of
measurement cycle).
11 The rate interval unit follows the setting specified in [4. Time scale] on the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen. If an [Integer input] is selected, the input range is integers from "(Measurement
11 time/400) to Measurement time" (integral multiples of measurement cycle).
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-6 UV-1280
11.3 Measurement
11.3
The screen displayed during measurement varies according to the screen from which the
1
measurement is started. If a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1280, the measurement result
will be printed for each rate interval, regardless of the displayed screen. (^ "11.6.2 Table Data
1
Format".)
1
11.3.1 Data Display during Measurement
When measurement is initiated from the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 11.2) or
the Data List screen (Fig. 11.13) by pressing the key, the measurement result starts being
1
displayed in the Data List for each rate interval. For details on the displayed item results, refer to "11.5
Data List". 1
Elapsed time/ Photometric 1

value
current absorbance. 1
Displays a countdown for 1

the next measurement if
the measurement interval is
relatively long.
1
11
Fig. 11.5 Screen during measurement (data display)
1 – Terminates the measurement and moves to the 11

Data List Display screen (Fig. 11.13).
11
11
11
11
11
11
UV-1280 11-7
11.3 Measurement
11 11.3.2 Curve Display Screen during Measurement

When the measurement is started from the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 11.7) by pressing the
key, the reaction curve starts being plotted on the screen in real time.
11
11 Elapsed time/ Photometric

value
11 current absorbance.
11
11
11
1
11
Fig. 11.6 Screen during measurement (curve display)
11

11
1 – Terminates the measurement and displays the
Data List Display screen (Fig. 11.13). After the
11 measurement results have been registered and
displayed, the UV-1280 switches to the
Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 11.7).
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-8 UV-1280
11.4

When you complete/terminate measurement, or press the [Curve] key in the Data List
screen (Fig. 11.13), the Reaction Curve Display screen appears (Fig. 11.7).
1
In this screen, you can display, save, or print the reaction curve within measured or loaded spectrum
data.
1
1
1 2 3 4
1
Fig. 11.7 Reaction Curve Display screen
1
NOTE
The acquired curve data is not yet saved when the measurement has completed. The curve
11
data will be lost, if (1) the next sample measurement is started, (2) another curve data file is
loaded, or (3) the screen is switched (to the Parameter Configuration screen). To save the
acquired curve data, press the key.
11

11
displayed reaction curve enables zooming of the
reaction curve.
^ "11.4.3 Zoom Screen" 11
2 [DataList] Switches to the data table screen. Measurement

results (Time (sec), Abs, ΔAbs, Discriminant result) 11
will be displayed in tabular format.
^ "11.5 Data List" 11
3 [LoadCurv] Loads a curve data file that is stored in the memory
storage. 11
^ "5.2 Load Files"
11
UV-1280 11-9
4 [SaveCurv] Saves the acquired reaction curve data to the built-in

11 memory storage or USB memory device.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
11 – – Starts the measurement under the set parameters.
– – Prints a hard copy of the screen or the reaction curve
11 data.
^ "11.4.4 Print Mode"
11
11
data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-10 UV-1280

If the or key is pressed in the Curve Display screen, the reading cursor appears.
Using this reading cursor, you can read the data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
1
1
Reading cursor
1
Time/Abs
photometric value at the
current cursor position. 1

1
Key Operation Description 1

Moves the cursor on the reaction curve graph and displays the time and
Abs at the cursor position. Holding down the key will
11
move the cursor faster.
Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears, and the UV-1280 returns to the
above Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 11.7).
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
UV-1280 11-11

When you press the [Zoom] key in the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 11.7), the Zoom
screen (Fig. 11.9) will be displayed. The displayed reaction curve can be enlarged or reduced by
11
changing the vertical or horizontal axis of the graph (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis).
11
NOTE
If the curve data is overwritten on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
11 reduction is applied to the last loaded data.
11
11
11
11
11
11
1 2 3
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-12 UV-1280

the vertical or horizontal axis range. 1
1
Each pressing of the key moves the cursor
to [vertical axis upper limit] → [vertical axis lower
limit] → [horizontal axis lower limit] → [horizontal 1
axis upper limit], and finally returns to the Zoom
screen (Fig. 11.9). 1
Cursor
1
Input
Range/Input
Value
Displays 1
available
input range
and key input
value. 1
1
Fig. 11.10 Zoom Screen
1
NOTE
Data exist only at each measurement cycle.
Therefore, when values other than the integral 11
multiple of the cycle are entered as horizontal axis
values, the entered values are automatically
replaced with the time values nearest to the
existing data values.
11
2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the
displayed reaction curve automatically.
11

11
applied.
– – Displays the cursor on the reaction curve graph to

11
– – Returns to the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig.
11.7). 11
11
UV-1280 11-13
11 11.4.4 Print Mode

When you press the key in the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 11.7), the screen
appears for selecting a print mode from "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" and "Hard copy of screen
11
([Screen copy])" (Fig. 11.11).
Move the cursor to the desired print mode with the keys, and confirm the selection
11
with the key.
11
Cursor
11

11
Waveform and measurement parameters of a curve data are printed. ^ "11.6.1 Waveform Format"
11 For a commercially available printer, the screen for selecting a grid type for graph output is (Fig. 11.12)
displayed. Move the cursor to the desired grid type with the keys, and confirm the
11 selection with the key.
11 Cursor
11
11 Fig. 11.12 [Frame Type] Selection screen
 Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy])

11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-14 UV-1280
11.5 Data List
11.5
11.5.1 Data List Display Screen 1

As shown in Fig. 11.13, measurement results (Time (sec), Abs, Δ A/min and D) will be displayed in
tabular format. Measurement results for each measurement will be added below. To display or print
1
out these measurement results, press the [DataDisp] key to bring up the data display screen
for further processing.
1
Set wavelength/ 1
Photometric value
The time at the last currently set wavelength.
measurement point for 1
each rate interval is
displayed.
Discriminant result 1
L: Linear
N: Non linear
1
Absorbance Change in quantity of
Indicates the first Abs at absorbance
each rate interval. 4 1
The number of displayed
digits follows the setting.
(See "16.1.2 Decimal
Display".) 1 2 3 1
Fig. 11.13 Data List screen 1

1 [Curve] Switches to the Reaction Curve Display screen
(Fig. 11.7).
^ "11.4.1 Curve Display Screen"
2 [DataDisp] Displays and prints all measured data, or loads

11
a table data file stored in the memory storage.
11
file to the memory storage.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
11

parameters. 11

Configuration screen (Fig. 11.2). 11
11
11
UV-1280 11-15
11.5 Data List
11 11.5.2 List Display

In the screen of the data list, the results of only the 8 immediately previous measurements will be
displayed. In this screen, it is possible to display all of the measurement results. It is also possible to
11
output a batch of all measurement results on a printer.
11
11
Data display list
Displays measurement results
or all data contained in a table
11 data file. (The data are
displayed from Sample No. 1.)
11
11
3 Page number
11 pages" of the file list.
1 2
11
11
11 1 [PrntData] Print all listed data or reaction curve data that is
displayed on the screen.
^ "11.5.3 Data Print Format"

11 ^ "5.2.1 Load Single File"
11 measurement data.
lines.
11
4 – Returns to the Data List screen (Fig. 11.13).
11
11
11
11
11-16 UV-1280
11.5 Data List
11.5.3 Data Print Format 1

When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen, the screen for selecting a print
format appears. Move the cursor to the desired format with the keys, and confirm
1
the selection with the key.
The print process will be started when the print format is confirmed.
1
Cursor
1
1
Fig. 11.15 [Print format] Selection screen
1
Display Description
[Table data] Prints all numeric data shown on the data table and the measurement 1
parameters.
^ "11.6.2 Table Data Format" 1
[Curve data] Prints the time and measured absorbance for each cycle together with
the measurement parameters. 1
^ "11.6.3 Curve Data Format"
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
UV-1280 11-17
11.6 11.6 Print (Output) Format
11 11.6.1 Waveform Format

selecting a print mode (Fig. 11.11). If you select [Draw curve] as a print mode, waveforms and
11
measurement parameters of a curve data are printed.
11
The print format for "Print waveform" varies according to the connected printer for output.
11 The following shows examples of printouts using different types of printers.
11  Output to a hard-copy printer
11
11
Screen hard copy
11 excluding the title row
and function row
11
11
Measurement end
11 date
Measurement
parameters
11 Fig. 11.16 Example of waveform printout (with hard copy printer)
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-18 UV-1280
 Output to a commercially available printer 1
Measurement end date 1
1
1
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
UV-1280 11-19
11 11.6.2 Table Data Format

In rate measurement, the result can be printed for each rate interval, or the entire results can be
printed all at once. Both print modes use the same print format.
11
11
End date/time of first
measurement
11 Indicates the end time of
the first measurement.
Header Part Measurement
11 parameters
11 First measurement
11
11
11
11
11
11 Fig. 11.18 Example of table data printout
11  Printout for each measurement

out on the printer for every measurement (rate interval).
11

11
selecting a print format appears. If [Table data] is selected, all measurement results up to that point, or
11 all the data within the currently-loaded table data file will be printed.
11
11
11-20 UV-1280
11.6.3 Curve Data Format 1

selecting a print format appears. If [Curve data] is selected, the curve data (time and absorbance at
1
each measurement cycle) within the latest measured or loaded reaction curve will be printed.
1
1
Measurement end
date
Measurement 1
parameters
11
11
11
Fig. 11.19 Example of curve data printout
11
11
11
11
11
UV-1280 11-21
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11-22 UV-1280
12
12 Time Scan
12
Chapter 12 Time Scan 1
1
The time scan mode is used to measure the change in the rate of absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T), or
energy (E) in the specified arbitrary wavelength. 1
CONTENTS
1
12.2 Measurement................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3 Displaying Time Course Curve ........................................................................................................ 12-7 1
12.4 Print Format ................................................................................................................................... 12-13
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
UV-1280 12-1
12.1
When [5. Time scan] is selected in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the Measurement Parameter
1212
Configuration screen related to the time scan mode is displayed.
1212
Set wavelength/
Photometric value
1 Indicates Abs or %T measured
12 2 at the currently set wavelength.
3
4
12
5
6
12
Sample module
12 (No. of drive cells)
Indicates the type of the a
current multi-cell holder for
sample control and the number
12 of drive cells.
8 9 0
12 (Abs and %T modes)
12
12
12
7
12
12 (E mode)
Fig. 12.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (E mode)
12
Key
Operation
12
1 [Meas. mode] Selects the measurement mode.
You can select one of the following measurement
12
modes: %T (transmittance), Abs (absorbance), or E
(energy). Upon selection, the [Rec. range] value is also
12 changed to the corresponding range.
2 [Meas. λ] Specifies the measurement wavelength. The input

12 range is from 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm.
12-2 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
12
Operation
3 [Meas. time] Specifies Measurement time and Cycle in order.

12
[Cycle] Confirm each of the values with the key.
^ "12.1.1 Setting Measurement Time and Cycle"
1
4 [Rec. range] The recording range is used to input the upper limit/
lower limit of Y-axis when displaying the Reaction
Curve on the screen. 1
Input range is from - 4.000 A to 4.000 A.
5 [Time scale] The time scale (unit) can be toggled between minutes 1
and seconds. When the key is pressed, the unit of time
is changed from [min] to [sec] and vice versa. 1
6 [Auto-Print] Switches ON/OFF of the auto-print function.
Each pressing of this key toggles between [ON] and 1
[OFF].
ON A screen hard copy and
measurement parameters are 1
automatically printed after the
measurement.
For details on the printout form, 1
refer to "12.4.2 Waveform
Format", Fig. 12.11 Example of
waveform printout (with hard copy
1
printer).
OFF The automatic printout is not 1
performed.
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
UV-1280 12-3
1212 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
7 [Light source] Selects the light source for the measurement. (E

1212
(energy) mode only)
The selected light source will be used regardless of the
12
parameter setting for the light source.
Light source types
12 WI lamp Selects the tungsten iodine lamp
(halogen lamp).
D2 lamp Selects the deuterium lamp.
12
OFF Turns OFF both the WI and D2
lamps.
12
8 [SmplCmpt] Sets the sample module.
12 Operation)"
9 [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.4).

12 0 [SavParam] Enables current measurement parameters to be
saved.
a – Starts the measurement under the set parameters and
12 displays the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.3).

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12-4 UV-1280
12.1.1 Setting Measurement Time and Cycle 12

To set the measurement time, enter the total time to obtain actual absorbance data values. The input
12
However, when performing multi-cell measurement with multi-cell holder, the lower limit of the range is
determined by the number of drive cells.
1
1
Input range
1
Fig. 12.2 Measurement Parameters Configuration screen
 Cycle (measurement cycle) 1

Specify the interval (measurement cycle) to acquire measurement data.
The unit of the measurement cycle follows the setting specified in [5. Time scale] in the Measurement
1
If [Integer input] is selected, the cycle input range is as given in the following:
When "Measurement time" < 2001 sec. (min.): Integers from 1 to 1000 12
When "Measurement time" 2001 sec. (min.): Integers from (Measurement time/2000) to 1000
12
12
12
12
12
12
UV-1280 12-5
12.2 Measurement
12.2
When the measurement is started from the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 12.1)
1212
or Curve Display screen (Fig. 12.4) by pressing the key, the time course change in the
absorbance (transmittance, or energy) starts being plotted on the screen in real time (Fig. 12.3).
1212
After the measurement, the Curve Display screen (Fig. 12.4) will be displayed.
12
Elapsed time/ Photometric
value
12 measurement start and the
current absorbance.
12
12
12
1
12
Fig. 12.3 Time Scan Measurement screen during measurement
12
No. Key Operation Description
12 1 Terminates the measurement and switches to the Curve Display
screen (Fig. 12.4).
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12-6 UV-1280
12.3 Displaying Time Course Curve
12.3

When you complete/terminate measurement, or press the [MeasScrn] key in the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 12.1), the Curve Display screen (Fig. 12.4)
12
appears.
In this screen, you can display, save, and print the waveform within measured or loaded spectrum
1
data.
1
Wavelength/
Photometric value
Indicates the current status.
1
1
1 2 3 4
Fig. 12.4 Curve Display screen 1
NOTE
The acquired time course data is not yet saved when the measurement has completed. The
1
time course data will be lost if (1) the next sample measurement is started, (2) another time
course data file is loaded, or (3) the measurement parameters are changed. To save the 12
acquired time course curve data, press the key.
12
12
12
12
12
12
UV-1280 12-7

1212 displayed time course curve enables zooming of the
time course curve.
12
2 [DataProc] Performs the data processing on measured or
loaded time course data.
12
In the Data Processing screen, the following
processing options are available:
12 Mathematical calculation, derivative processing,
peak detection, area calculation, point pickup and
12 printout.
^ "Chapter 15 Data Processing"
This data processing can only be performed on a
12
single reaction curve. Therefore, for a multiple cell
measurement with multi-cell holder, the Curve Data
12 Selection screen appears for selecting a target curve
(cell No.). Enter the cell No. for the target curve
12 (Input range: 1 to the number of drive cells), and
confirm with the key.
12
12
12
12 Fig. 12.5 Curve Data Selection screen
3 [LoadCurv] Loads a time course data file that is stored in the

12 built-in memory storage or USB memory device.
^ "5.2 Load Files"
12 4 [SavCurve] Saves the acquired reaction curve data to the

memory storage.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
12
– – Starts the measurement under the set parameters.
– – Prints a hard copy of the screen or the time course

12
data.
^ "12.4 Print Format"
12
12-8 UV-1280

Configuration screen (Fig. 12.1). 12
data values at any arbitrary sampling point. 1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
UV-1280 12-9

appears. Using this reading cursor, you can read the data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
1212
Furthermore, for listing or printing data values at multiple sampling points, refer to the description on
the point pick function (^ "15.6 Point Pick"). For printing all data in numeric values, refer to the
12
description on the print processing function (^ "15.7 Print Processing").
12
Reading cursor
12
12
12
12
Time/Abs/Cell
photometric value at the current
12 cursor position. Indicates also Cell
No. for multi-cell measurement.
12
12

12
Moves the cursor on the time course curve graph and displays the time
and Abs at the cursor position.
Selects a time course data to be read with the cursor.

12 When performing multi cell measurement with multi-cell holder, multiple
reaction curves will be displayed on the graph.
12 Therefore, to review a particular reaction curve, you need to switch the
cell No. and select the target time course data by pressing the
keys.
12
12 Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears, and the UV-1280 returns to the Curve
above Display screen (Fig. 12.4).
12
12
12-10 UV-1280
12.3.3 Zoom Screen 12

When you press the [Zoom] key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 12.4), the Zoom screen
(Fig. 12.7) will be displayed. The displayed time course curve can be enlarged or reduced by changing
12
the vertical or horizontal axis of the graph (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis).
1
NOTE
If the curve data is overwritten on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
1
1
1 2 3
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
UV-1280 12-11

the vertical or horizontal axis value.
1212
12
Each pressing, the key moves the cursor
12 limit] → [horizontal axis lower limit] → [horizontal
Cursor
12
Input Range/
Input Value
12 Displays
available input
range and key
input value.
12
12
NOTE
12
Data exist only at each measurement cycle.
Therefore, when values other than the integral
12 multiple of the cycle are entered as horizontal axis
12 replaced with the time values nearest to the existing

data values.
displayed reaction curve automatically.
12
applied.
12 ^ "12.4 Print Format"
– – Displays the cursor on the reaction curve graph to
12 activate the cursor reading function.
12 – – Returns to the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig.

12.4).
12
12
12-12 UV-1280
12.4 Print Format
12.4
The graph of a time course data can be printed out in "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" or "Hard copy of
12
screen ([Screen copy])".
If you wish to output all the data in numeric values, see "15.7 Print Processing".
12
12.4.1 Print Mode

1
When you press the key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 12.4), the screen appears for a
print mode from "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" or "Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy])".
Move the cursor to the desired mode with the keys, and confirm the selection with
1
the key.
1
Cursor

1
Waveforms and measurement parameters in a time course data are printed.
1
(^ "12.4.2 Waveform Format")
For a commercially available printer, the screen for selecting a grid type for graph output is displayed.
Move the cursor to the desired grid type with the keys, and confirm the selection 1
with the key.
1
Cursor
Fig. 12.10 [Frame Type] Selection screen 12

When the grid type is confirmed, the measured or loaded reaction curve and the parameters are
printed out.
 Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy]) 12

12
12
12
12
12
UV-1280 12-13
12.4 Print Format
1212 12.4.2 Waveform Format

The print format for "Print waveform" varies according to the connected printer for output.
1212

12
12
12
Screen hard copy
12 and function row
12
12
Measurement end
date
12 Measurement
parameters
12 Fig. 12.11 Example of waveform printout (with hard copy printer)
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12-14 UV-1280
12.4 Print Format
 Output to a commercially available printer 12
12
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
UV-1280 12-15
12.4 Print Format
1212
1212
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12-16 UV-1280
13
13 Multi-component Quantitation
13
13
Chapter 13 Multi- 1
component Quantitation 1
CONTENTS
1
13.1 Multi-component Quantitation.......................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 13-3 1
13.3 Standard Sample Data .................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.4 Measurement of Unknown Sample ............................................................................................... 13-15
13.5 Data Display .................................................................................................................................. 13-18 1
13.6 Spectrum Display screen............................................................................................................... 13-20
13
13
13
13
13
13
UV-1280 13-1
13.1 Multi-component Quantitation
13.1
The multi-component quantitation mode is the mode in which the concentration of each constituent
1313
component is determined by using the absorption spectrum of the mixed sample with pure standards
or standards made up of multiple constituent components.
1313
1) Mixed samples with up to 8 constituent components can be quantitated.
2) In addition to using pure samples of each constituent component as the standard samples, a
1313 mixed sample in which the concentration of each constituent component is known may also be
used.
The effects of interference among the various constituent components can be minimized by using
13 a mixed sample as the standard sample.
3) Parameter files for this mode store measurement parameters and standard sample data, making
their file size relatively large. Therefore they can only be saved by using a USB memory device.
13
In addition, a spectrum saved in memory can be loaded and used as the standard sample (^
"13.3 Standard Sample Data") or unknown sample data (^ "13.4 Measurement of Unknown
Sample"). However, unlike other parameter files, these can only be saved one at a time.
13
4) The measurement wavelengths can be set at uniform intervals or randomly set.
13
NOTE
13 1) If Multi-component quantitation calculation cannot be performed, e.g. due to an unsuitable
standard sample, the error message "Multi-component calculation error" will be displayed
on the screen.
13
13
13
13
2) If a sample whose absorbance is virtually zero, or a sample with a closely similar absorption
13 spectrum shape is used as the standard sample, isolation quantitation calculations may not be
properly be performed or accurate values may not be found.
3) If a mixed sample with 4 or more constituent components is used as the standard sample, it is
highly probable that isolation quantitation calculations will not be properly performed.
13
13
13
13
13
13-2 UV-1280
13.2
When you select [6. Multi-Component] in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the Measurement
13
Parameter Configuration screen is displayed (Fig. 13.1). Set the parameters by pressing the numeric
keys corresponding to the item numbers on the screen.
13
Set wavelength/ Absorbance

Indicates Abs measured at the 13
1 currently set wavelength.
2
3 1
4
5
6 1
7
8
1
9
d
1
0 a b c
1
1
Key
Operation 1
1 [Scan range] Enter the wavelength range over which the
absorbance will be measured. 1
The input range is from 190 nm to 1100 nm (in units of
1 nm).
1
The scan pitch will be automatically determined by the
scan range specified here.
13
Table 13.1 The relation between scan range
and scan pitch
Scan Range (nm) (Start
wavelength-End Scan Pitch
wavelength)
13
910 nm ≥ (Scan range) 1.0 nm ≥ 500 nm
500 nm > (Scan range) 0.5 nm ≥ 200 nm
200 nm > (Scan range) 0.2 nm ≥ 100 nm 13
100 nm > (Scan range) 0.1 nm
2 [Rec. range] Enter the range for the vertical axis (-4.000 to 4.000) 13
when displaying the absorption spectrum on screen for
a standard sample measurement or unknown sample 13
measurement.
13
UV-1280 13-3
1313 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
3 [Scan speed] Set the wavelength scanning speed from among 4

1313
levels (Fast, Medium, Slow, Very Slow).
4 [Display mode] Select whether to overlay absorption spectra for

1313
standards or unknown samples, or rewrite the
spectrum for each measurement.
13 Each pressing of the key toggles between [Overlay]
and [Rewrite].
13 5 [No. of Enter the number of components that comprise the
component] mixed sample. The entry range is from 2 to 8
13 components.
The number of constituent components is related to
both [6. Standard type] and [7. No. of Standard].
13
If it becomes necessary to change the No. of
standards because there has been a change in the No.
13 of components, you will be instructed on screen to
"Change param".
13 In addition, if [6. Standard type] is set to "Pure", [7. No.
of Standard] will automatically be overwritten with the
same number as the No. of components.
13
6 [Standard type] Select whether the standard sample is a pure sample
made from a single component or a mixed sample of
13
known concentrations of more than one component.
Move the cursor with keys and
13 confirm the selection with the key.
13
Fig. 13.2 [Standard type] Selection screen
7 [No. of Standard] Enter the number of standard samples.

13 For a pure sample, the number will be automatically
entered with the same number as the No. of
13 components.
For a mixed sample, the input range is from (No. of
components + 1) to 16.
13
13
13
13-4 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
13
Operation
8 [Meas. λ] Select the wavelength for measurement of standards

13
and unknowns. The concentration of the sample will
be calculated from the absorbance at specified
13
measurement wavelengths in the spectrum.
Select [8. Meas. λ] to review the currently set
wavelength. 1
1
Fig. 13.3 Set Wavelength Review screen
1
To modify wavelength values, press the
[Input λ] key while this screen is displayed.
1
^ "13.2.1 Input Measurement Wavelength"
Press the key to return to the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen. 1
9 [Standard data] Enter the standard sample concentrations to measure
the standard sample absorbance spectra. 1
^ "13.3 Standard Sample Data"
0 [BaseCorr] Used to correct the baseline under the specified 13

conditions.
a [SmplCompt] Used to set the sample module. The setting items

include the sample module type and the operating
conditions of the sipper.
13
Operation)"
13
NOTE
Multi-cell measurement with multi-cell holder is not
available in the Multi-component Quantitation 13
Mode.
b [MeasScrn] Switches to the Component Concentration screen (Fig. 13
13.15).
13
UV-1280 13-5
1313 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
c [SavParam] Saves the current set parameters as a parameter file.

1313
^ "5.1 Save Files"
1313 NOTE
The parameter file for the Multi-component
Quantitation Mode cannot be saved to the built-in
13 memory since the file size is too large. Please use a
USB memory device when saving the parameter
13 file.
d – Switches to the Measurement screen and starts the
13 measurement.
13
13.2.1 Input Measurement Wavelength
13 You can enter wavelengths by setting an equal interval using the starting wavelength (long
wavelength) as a standard or by numerically entering any desired wavelength values.
When the [Input λ] key is pressed on the Set Wavelength Review screen (Fig. 13.3), the
13
screen for selecting the input method is displayed (Fig. 13.4).
Move the cursor with the keys and confirm the selection with the key.
13
13
13 Fig. 13.4 [Input of Meas. λ] screen
13
13
13
13
13
13
13-6 UV-1280
 Manual Input (Entering Wavelength Values Arbitrarily) 13

When you select [Manual input] in Fig. 13.4, Fig. 13.5 will be displayed.
1 Refer to the input range displayed at the screen

bottom and enter the desired number of wavelengths
Cursor 13
with numeric keys. (The entered value will be

13
displayed at the cursor position.)
No. of wavelengths at the last

NOTE measurement 1
When using pure standards, skip to the next
Available No. of wavelengths
procedure, which is the setting on the Desired This range is determined by the numbers of components
Wavelength Input screen. and standards specified in the Parameter Congifugraion
1
screen.
Lower limit: (No. of components)
Press the key to confirm the input number of Upper limit: (No. of standards) - 1
1
wavelengths.
Fig. 13.5 Input of Number of Meas. λ screen
1
2 The Desired Wavelength Input screen is displayed.

Enter desired wavelength values with numeric keys. 1
(The entered value will be displayed at the cursor
position.)
1
NOTE
You cannot enter two or more of the same 1
wavelength, or wavelengths that are not integral
multiples of the scan pitch.
Cursor
1
Press the key to confirm the input number of
Wavelength input range
wavelengths. The input range is the wavelength range specified in the 1
Fig. 13.6 Input Range of Meas. λ screen 13
3 Repeat procedure 2 until you finish entering all

wavelength values for the specified number of points.
The display will return to the Parameter Configuration 13
screen (Fig. 13.1). ("Defined" will be displayed in [8.
Meas. λ].)
13
13
13
13
UV-1280 13-7
1313  Even Interval (Acquiring Data at Even Intervals)

When you select [Even interval] in Fig. 13.4, Fig. 13.7 will be displayed.
1313
1 Enter the desired wavelength interval with numeric
keys. The value will be displayed at the cursor
position at the bottom of the screen. The minimum
1313
input unit for the interval is 1 nm.
13
13
13 Available wavelength Indicates the last wavelength

interval range* interval at the last measurement.
13 Fig. 13.7 Wavelength Interval Input screen
* The wavelength intervals are determined by measurement

13 wavelength range, No. of components, and No. of standards.
• For pure sample (the minimum unit of 1 nm)
Lower limit: Wavelength range/No. of components + 1 nm
Upper limit: Wavelength range/(No. of components - 1) nm
13 Example)
Wavelength range: 700 nm to 400 nm, No. of components: 5 →
The specifiable minimum value: 61 nm, and the maximum
13 value: 75 nm.
• For mixed sample (the minimum unit of 1 nm)
Lower limit: Wavelength range/(No. of standards- 1) + 1 nm
Upper limit: Wavelength range/(No. of components- 1) nm
13 Example)
Wavelength range: 700 nm to 400 nm, No. of components: 5,
No. of standards: 10 → The specifiable minimum value: 34 nm,
and the maximum value: 75 nm. Fig. 13.8 Example of wavelength definition
13
13
2 Press the key and the measurement
wavelengths will be automatically set in even
intervals starting from the start wavelength (the
longest wavelength in the scan range). ("Defined" will
be displayed in [8. Meas. λ].)
13
13
13
13
13
13-8 UV-1280
13.3 13.3 Standard Sample Data
When you select [9. Standard data] in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 13.1), a
13
standard sample concentration input screen will be displayed.
In this screen, you will enter standard sample concentrations, and load the absorbances at specified
13
wavelengths (Fig. 13.1 [8. Meas. λ]).
You can load the standard sample absorbances from actually measured data or existing spectrum
data files. 13
In either case, however, parameters [1.] through [8.] must be set in the Parameter Configuration
screen beforehand. 1
The Concentration Input screen differs depending on whether the standard sample is pure or mixed.
1
Asterisk
Indicates that the
measurement has been Cursor
completed. 1
1
Standard
(Component) No.
1
5 4
1
1 2 3
(Pure sample) 1
1
Standard No.
Component No.
13
Cursor
Asterisk
Indicates that the
measurement has been 13
completed
13
(Mixed sample) 13
Fig. 13.9 Standard Sample Data Input screen
13
13
UV-1280 13-9
13.3 Standard Sample Data
1 [Curve] Switches to the Spectrum Display screen where you

1313 can confirm the spectral waveform.
^ "13.6 Spectrum Display screen"
Additionally, by using the [LoadCurv] function from
1313
the Spectrum Display screen, you can specify
spectrum data files stored in the built-in memory or
13 USB memory as standard sample data.
^ "13.3.3 Loading from Spectrum (Curve) Data
13 File"
NOTE
13 You can load only spectrum data under
parameters identical to the current parameter
settings (Scan range, Measurement mode, and
13
Scan pitch).
2 [InptConc] Switches to the Concentration Input screen.
13
^ "13.3.1 Entering Concentration"
3 [Calc.] Calculates the parameters for quantitation after all

13
the standard data are entered and measured.
Upon completion of calculation, a message is
13 displayed.
After that, the Measurement (Fig. 13.1) Parameter
13 Configuration screen will be displayed.
4 – Switches to the Measurement screen and starts

standard sample measurement.
13
5 – Moves the cursor on the component (standard
sample) column.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13-10 UV-1280
13.3.1 Entering Concentration 13

The procedure for entering standard sample concentrations is as follows:
13
1 In the Standard Sample Data Input screen (Fig. 13.9),
move the cursor by pressing the
keys ( keys for mixed sample) to the 13
position of the component (standard sample) whose
concentration is to be entered. Then, press the
[InptConc] key. 1
2 The concentration column of the standard sample

selected in procedure 1 will be highlighted (Fig.
1
13.10). Input the concentration using the numeric

keys. 1
3 Press the key to reflect the input

concentration on the concentration table. The
1
concentration column for the next component will

then be highlighted. 1
(Pure sample) 1
NOTE
If the key is pressed without inputting any
concentration value, no change is made to the 1
existing concentration, and the concentration column
for the next component is highlighted.
After the concentration of Component 3 is confirmed, 1
the cursor returns to Component 1 in the case of
example in Fig. 13.10.
1
13
(Mixed sample)
Fig. 13.10 Concentration Input screen
4 After all concentrations are confirmed, press the

key to return to the Standard Sample Data 13
Input screen (Fig. 13.9).
13
13
13
13
UV-1280 13-11
1313 13.3.2 Loading Absorbance

Next, measure the standard sample at the wavelength range specified in the Measurement Parameter
1313 To perform baseline correction, press the [BaseCorr] key in the Measurement Parameter
The following is the procedure for loading absorbance:
1313
13
keys ( keys for mixed sample) to the
position of the component (standard sample) to be
13 measured.
13 2 Place the standard sample in the sample

compartment, and press the key. The
Measurement screen (Fig. 13.11) appears and the
13 measurement begins.
13 NOTE
If the key is pressed during measurement,
the measurement is terminated and the currently
13 obtained data is discarded.

13
3 After the measurement is completed, the absorbance
at the specified wavelength (Fig. 13.1 [8. Meas. λ]) is
13 automatically loaded and the Data Input screen
appears.
The component (standard sample) already measured
13 is marked with "*".
13 NOTE
When the next measurement is started, the
previously measured spectrum data (curve data) is
discarded. If you wish to save the curve data, press (Pure sample)
the key to perform the saving operation.
13 ^ "13.6 Spectrum Display screen"
13 4 Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for each standard

sample, and after all measurements are completed,
press the [Calc.] key.
13 Upon completion of calculation, a message is
displayed.
Press the key to return to the Measurement
13
(Mixed sample)
Fig. 13.12 Standard Sample Data Input
13 screen
13-12 UV-1280
5 The Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

(Fig. 13.1) appears, and the [9. Standard data] column
13
is indicated with "Defined".
13
13.3.3 Loading from Spectrum (Curve) Data File
Instead of performing actual measurement, you can load the absorbance at the specified wavelength 13
(Fig. 13.1 [8. Meas. λ]) from the standard sample spectrum data (curve data) stored in the built-in
memory or USB memory. 1
1
NOTE
You can load only spectrum data (curve data) acquired under the same parameter values (scan
range, photometric mode, and scan pitch) as those currently set. 1
The following is the procedure for the operation:

1

1
keys to the position of the component (standard
sample) to which the data is to be loaded. 1
Press the [Curve] key.
1
2 The Spectrum Display screen appears. Press the
[LoadCurv] key to load the desired curve
data. 1
^ "5.2 Load Files"
13
3 When the curve data is loaded, the data (absorbance

at the wavelength specified in Fig. 13.1 [8. Meas. λ]) is
13
automatically imported. Then the Standard Sample
Data Input screen appears with the data reflected in 13
the list.
The component (standard sample) to which the data
has been loaded is indicated with "*". 13
13
13
UV-1280 13-13
1313 4 Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for each standard

sample, and after all measurements are completed,
press the [Calc.] key.
1313
Upon completion of calculation, a message is
displayed.
1313 Press the key to return to the Measurement
13
13 (Pure sample)
13
13
13
13
(Mixed sample)
13
Fig. 13.14 Standard Sample Data
Input screen
13
13
5 The Measurement Parameter Configuration screen
(Fig. 13.1) appears, and the [9. Standard data] column
is indicated with "Defined".
13
13
13
13
13
13
13-14 UV-1280
13.4 Measurement of Unknown Sample
13.4
13.4.1 Measurement Screen 13

After you finish setting quantitation parameters, press the [MeasDisp] key to switch the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 13.1) into the Component Concentration screen
13
(Fig. 13.13).
13
Set an unknown sample and press key. Then the Spectrum Display screen comes up and
the measurement begins. After setting quantitation parameters are completed, you can start the
measurement by hitting key in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 1
13.1).
When the measurement is over, the display turns to the Component Concentration screen (Fig. 1
13.15), and the concentration of each component in the unknown sample. If an optional screen copy
printer is connected to the UV-1280, the result output will be printed when each of the sample
1
measurements is complete (^ "13.4.2 Data Print for Each Measurement").
1
Set wavelength/
Absorbance
Sample No.
currently set wavelength. 1
1
Concentration
Component No.
(When the sample consists
of 3 components) 1
1
5 6
1
1 2 3 4
Fig. 13.15 Component Concentration screen 13
measurement.
13
9999. 13
13
13
13
UV-1280 13-15
2 [Curve] Switches to the Spectrum Display screen on

1313 which you can confirm and save the spectral
waveform of the unknown sample.
^ "13.6 Spectrum Display screen"
1313
Additionally, by loading spectrum data files
stored in the built-in memory or USB memory in
13 the Spectrum Display screen, the concentration
for each component is calculated and displayed
13 in the Component Concentration screen, just as
if using actually measured data.
13 NOTE
You can load only the spectrum data under
identical parameters to the current parameter
13
settings (Scan range, Measurement mode,
and Scan pitch).
13
3 [DataDisp] Displays the data list of measurement data (Fig.
13.17).
13 ^ "13.5.1 Data Display Screen"

13 file to the memory storage.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
13 5 – Starts the measurement of unknown sample.
NOTE
13 A maximum of 200 measurements can be
performed as a single table data file.
13 6 – Deletes all the data displayed on the screen.

13
13
13
13
13
13-16 UV-1280

If a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1280, the measurement results will be printed on the
printer for every measurement.
13
13
Date and time when

the first measurement 1
Header Part was completed
Component No. 1
First Measurement
Sample No.
1
1
13
13
13
13
13
13
UV-1280 13-17
13.5 Data Display
13.5

When you press the [DataDisp] key in the Component Concentration screen (Fig. 13.15),
the Data Display screen (Fig. 13.17) will be displayed.
1313
In this screen, you can browse through all quantitation results obtained up to that point.
Additionally, you can load the data from the built-in memory or USB memory, and print the quantitation
1313
results all at once.
13
13 Data list
Displays the quantitation
results for an unknown
sample.
13
13
13 3 Page number
pages".
13 1 2

13

13 ^ "13.5.2 Data Printout"

13 ^ "5.2.1 Load Single File"
3 – Allows scrolling the data table for each sample.
– – Returns to the Component Concentration screen

(Fig. 13.15).
13
13
13
13
13
13-18 UV-1280
13.5 Data Display

The entire data can be printed out as a numeric data table on the printer (optional).
13
13
NOTE
1
Date and time when
Header Part was completed
1
Component No.
First Measurement
1
Sample No.
1
13
13
13
13
13
13
UV-1280 13-19
13.6 Spectrum Display screen
13.6
When you press the [Curve] key on the Standard Sample Data Input screen (Fig. 13.9) or
1313
the Component Concentration screen (Fig. 13.15), the Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 13.19) will be
displayed.
1313
1313
13
13
13
13
1 2 3 4
13 Fig. 13.19 Spectrum Display screen

1 [Zoom] Allows changing the ranges of the vertical and
horizontal axes.
13
2 [DataList] Returns to the screen on which the current spectrum
13
was called up (Standard Sample Data Input screen
(Fig. 13.9) or Component Concentration screen (Fig.
13 13.15)).
3 [LoadCurv] Loads a curve data file stored in the memory storage.
13 ^ "5.2 Load Files"
The loaded spectrum data can be used as standard or
unknown sample data for isolation quantitation
calculation.
4 [SavCurve] Saves measured spectrum data to the built-in memory
13
storage or USB memory device.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
13 – – Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed.
– – Displays the cursor on the graph and enables the
13 cursor reading of the data.
– – Returns to the screen on which the current spectrum
13 was called up (Standard Sample Data Input screen
(Fig. 13.9) or Component Concentration screen (Fig.
13.15)).
13
13-20 UV-1280

When you press the or key in the Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 13.19), the
Reading with Cursor screen (Fig. 13.20) will be displayed.
13
In the Reading with Cursor screen (Fig. 13.20) the spectrum data at given measurement wavelength
can be read with the cursor.
13
1
Reading cursor
Time/Abs 1
photometric value at the current cursor
position.
1
1

1
Moves the cursor on the spectrum graph and displays the time and Abs
at the cursor position.
1

13
Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears and the UV-1280 returns to the
above Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 13.19).
13
13
13
13
13
UV-1280 13-21

When you press the [Zoom] key in the Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 13.19), the Zoom
screen (Fig. 13.21) will be displayed.
1313
The displayed spectrum graph can be enlarged or reduced by changing the vertical or horizontal axis
of the spectrum (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis).
1313
13 NOTE
1. If the curve data is overwritten on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
13
2. If the measurement result is overwritten, the enlargement or reduction is applied to the last
measurement data.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13 1 2 3

13
13
13
13
13
13
13-22 UV-1280

the vertical or horizontal axis range. 13
13
to [vertical axis upper limit]→[vertical axis lower
limit]→[horizontal axis lower limit]→[horizontal axis 1
upper limit], and finally returns to the Zoom screen
(Fig. 13.22). 1
Cursor
1
Input range
Input value
Displays 1
available input
range and key
input value.
1
Fig. 13.22 Zoom Screen 1

displayed spectrum automatically. 1
– – Produces a hard copy of the screen with the zoom

1
operation applied.
– – Displays the cursor on the spectrum graph to 1

– – Returns to the Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 13.19).
13
13
13
13
13
UV-1280 13-23
1313
1313
1313
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13-24 UV-1280
14
14 Bio-method
14
Chapter 14 Bio-method 1
1
The Bio-method mode allows you to obtain the DNA and protein concentrations with various quantitation
methods. 1
CONTENTS
1
14.1 Bio-method Selection ...................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2 DNA Quantitation............................................................................................................................. 14-4
14.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB Method, and Biuret Method .................................................... 14-14 1
14.4 UV Absorption Method .................................................................................................................. 14-16
14
14
14
14
14
UV-1280 14-1
14.1 Bio-method Selection
14.1
When you select [7.Bio-Method] in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the screen for selecting a
1414
quantitation method appears (Fig. 14.1). Select the item number for a desired method with numeric
keys while the selection screen (Fig. 14.1) is displayed.
1
1414 2
3
4
14 5
6
14
14
Fig. 14.1 Bio-Method Selection screen

14

14
1 [DNA [DNA Quantitation] performs measurement at
Quantitation] specified two to three fixed wavelengths and
14
obtains the concentration of DNA and proteins,
and absorbance ratio, based on the measured
14 absorbances.
14 You can choose any wavelength for

measurements, including the most commonly
used wavelengths (260 nm/ 230 nm or 260 nm/
14
280 nm). You can add measurements at a
wavelength of 320 nm for back ground
14 correction. You can also set the desired
parameters for calculating the DNA and protein
concentrations in samples.
^ "14.2 DNA Quantitation"
14 2 [Lowry Method] This method offers excellent sensitivity and

reproducibility. Based on reactions to tyrosine
and tryptophan, this method utilizes different
14
absorbance values depending on the type of
protein measured, even if the amount of protein
14 is the same.
^ "14.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB
14 Method, and Biuret Method"
14-2 UV-1280
14.1 Bio-method Selection

3 [BCA Method] This method measures the absorbance at a
wavelength of 562 nm using a reagent called 14
Bicinchoninic Acid. You must take into
consideration that the absorbance is known to
increase with time when this method is used.
Method, and Biuret Method"
4 [CBB Method This method measures the absorbance at a

(Bradford wavelength of 595 nm using a reagent called 1
Method)] Coomassie Brilliant Blue G-250.
^ "14.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB 1
5 [Biuret Method] This method is based on the unique peptide 1

linkage of protein as well as the Biuret reaction
which involves the formation of a colored
1
compound with copper reagent. This method
offers a fast and easy determination of protein
concentration. The drawback is its low 1
sensitivity. In this method, absorbance is
normally measured at a wavelength of 540 to 1
560 nm.
1
6 [UV Method] This method determines protein concentration

1
directly from absorbance value and absorptivity
in the ultraviolet region, without using any color
reagent. This method normally measures 1
absorbance at a wavelength of 280 nm.
^ "14.4 UV Absorption Method" 14
For details on the quantitation methods described above, refer to the following references.
1. Warberg, O., and Christian, W. (1942) Biochem.Z.310, 384-421.
2. Vernon F. Kalb, Jr., and Robert W. Bernlohr (1977) Anal. Biochem. 82, 362-371.
3. Gornall, A.G., Bradawill, C. J. & David, M.M. (1949) J. Biol. Chem. 177, 751-766.
4. Lowry, O. H., Rosebrough, N. J., Farr, A. I. & Randall, R. J. (1951) J. Biol. Chem. 193, 265-275.
14
5. Bradford, M. M. (1976) Anal. Biochem. 72, 248-254.
6. Smith, P. K., Krohn, R. I., Hermanson, G. T., Mallia, A. K., Gartner, F. H., Provenzano, M. D., 14
Fujimoto, E. K., Goeke, N. M., Olson, B. J. & Klenk, D. C. (1985) Anal. Biochem. 150, 76-85.
14
14
UV-1280 14-3
14.2 DNA Quantitation
14.2
1414 14.2.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

When you select [1. DNA Quantitation] in the Bio-Method Selection screen (Fig. 14.1), the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 14.2) is displayed as follows.
In the DNA quantitation, the following equations are used to calculate DNA and protein
concentrations:
Absorbance ratio = A1/A2

1414 DNA = K1 × A1 - K2 × A2 [µg/ml] (Equation 14.1)
Protein = K3 × A2 - K4 × A 1[µg/ml]
14
K1 to K4: Factors
A1: Absorbance at wavelength λ1 (Subtract absorbance at wavelength λb when performing BG
14
correction.)
A2: Absorbance at wavelength λ2 (Subtract absorbance at wavelength λb when performing BG
14
correction.)
The factors used in equation 14.1 and wavelength values for measuring absorbance can be set in the
14 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 14.2).
14
Set wavelength/
Absorbance
14 1 Displays the current status.
2
3
14
14
14
8
14
4 5 6 7
14
14
14
14
14-4 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
14
Operation
1 [λ] Sets the desired wavelength.

14
^ "14.2.2 λ (Wavelength)"
2 [BG Corr.] Indicates whether or not to perform the background

correction.
Background correction is performed by subtracting
absorbance λb from absorbances λ1 and λ2 set in [1. λ].
Each pressing of the key toggles between ON/OFF of the
background correction. 1
Specify the wavelength (λb) for background correction in

1
the item [1. λ].
14
14
14
14
14
UV-1280 14-5
1414 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
3 [Factor] Specifies the equation factors:
For [3. Manual Input], the input range is from - 9999.9 to

9999.9. The minimum input unit is 0.0001 (the number of
significant figures is 5).
1414
14
14
14
Fig. 14.3 Factor Selection screen
The equations used for calculating DNA and protein

14
concentrations (Equation 14.1) are formulated to
eliminate mutual interference, which means that the
equation factors will be automatically determined once
14
two measurement wavelengths (λ1, λ2) are defined.
Table 14.1 Measurement wavelength and factor in the
14 concentration equation (optical pass length: 10 mm)
K1 K2 K3 K4
λ1: 260.0 nm
14 49.1 3.48 183 75.8
λ2: 230.0 nm
λ1: 260.0 nm
62.9 36.0 1552 757.3
14 λ2: 280.0 nm
Therefore, if you select wavelengths in [λ] of the

14 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig.
14.2), the factors are automatically set.
However, the wavelength-factor relationship described in
14 Table 14.1 applies only when using the cell with optical
path length of 10 mm. Therefore, when using a different
cell, it is required to select the [Manual Input]
key to input corrected factors.
For manual input, the input range is from "- 9999.9 to
14
9999.9" and the lowest digit is "0.0001" (5 significant
figures).
Example) When optical path length l = 5 mm,
14
10/ l = 2
Thus, the corrected factors (Kn') can be obtained as
follows:
14
K1' = K1 × 2, K2' = K2 × 2, K3' = K3 × 2, K4' = K4 × 2
14
14-6 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
14
Operation
4 [BaseCorr] Select this to a baseline correction over the range

14
covering all selected wavelengths, using a blank sample.
5 [SmplCmpt] Sets the parameters for the sample module. The setting
items inlluce the sample module, type, the number of
cells, and the operating conditions of the sipper.
Operation)"
6 [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen. 1

7 [SavParam] Saves measurement parameters, including the
calibration curve equation to the built-in memory storage 1
or USB memory device.
8 – Starts the measurement under the set parameters and
displays the Measurement screen (Fig. 14.6). 1
^ "14.2.3 Measurement"
– – Returns to the Bio-method Selection screen (Fig. 14.1).

1
14
14
14
14
14
UV-1280 14-7
1414 14.2.2 λ (Wavelength)

When you select [λ] in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 14.2), the λ
(Wavelength) Selection screen is displayed (Fig. 14.4).
Select the measurement wavelengths at which to measure A1 and A2 used in Equation 14.1. You can
select one of the most frequently used combinations of wavelengths, or input arbitrary wavelengths
manually.
1414
1
14
2
14 3
14
14
14 Fig. 14.4 λ (Wavelength) Selection screen
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14-8 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
14
Operation
1 [λ1=260.0 nm Specifies the wavelengths (shown in the left) displayed in

14
λ2=230.0 nm] the Selection screen (Fig. 14.4) as measurement
[ λb=320.0 nm] wavelengths.
NOTE
If the wavelength combination described above is selected,
the factors suitable for the wavelengths are automatically
set. 1
^ "14.2.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration
Screen" [3. Factor]
1
2 [λ1=260.0 nm Specifies the wavelengths (shown in the left) displayed in
λ2=280.0 nm] the Selection screen (Fig. 14.4) as measurement
1
[ λb=320.0 nm] wavelengths.
1
NOTE
If the wavelength combination described above is selected,
the factors suitable for the wavelengths are automatically 1
set.
^ "14.2.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration 1
Screen" [3. Factor]
3 [Manual Input] Allows you to manually input measurement wavelengths

1
(λ1, λ2, λb) using the numeric keys.
The input range is from 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm (in units of
0.1 nm). 1
14
14
Fig. 14.5 Measurement Wavelength Manual Input Screen

14
14
14
UV-1280 14-9
1414 14.2.3 Measurement

After selecting all the parameters in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 14.2),
press to start measurement. After the measurement, the Measurement screen (Fig. 14.6)
displays the sample No., absorbance values A1, A2, and Ab, absorbance ratio A1/A2 and DNA and
protein concentrations.
If overflow occurs because A1 is divided by A2=0, "####" will appear on the screen.
If a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1280, the measurement results will be printed on the
1414 printer for every sample measurement. ^ "14.2.5 Printout (Output)"
14 Wavelength/Photometric
Sample No. value
The assignment rule for Indicates the current status.
14 the number varies
according to the cell Absorbance
holder used.* Indicates the measurement
values at λ1, λ2, λB.
14
Absorbance ratio
Calculation results
14
14 4 5
14 1 2 3
14  When measuring a single cell or using the Multi-cell (optional) with the parameter of "Drive cell No." set to "1".

14 A hyphen (-) and cell No. are attached to the sample No.
Example) The first measurement at the cell position "3" => Sample No.: 1-3
14
14
14
14
14
14
14-10 UV-1280

1 [Smpl No.] Changes the next measured sample number by
entering a number in a range between 0 and 14
9999.
2 [DataDisp] Displays the list of measurement data.


file to the memory storage.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
1
parameters.
1
NOTE
entered in a single table data file. 1

1
1
14
14
14
14
14
UV-1280 14-11
1414 14.2.4 List Display

Fig. 14.7 shows the Data Display screen, where all measurement results are displayed. In addition,
you can output those results to the printer all at once, or load the data file stored in the built-in memory
or USB memory.
Data display list

1414 Displays measurement results
or all data contained in a table
data file. (The data are
displayed from Sample No. 1.)
14
14
14
3 Page number
14
1 2

14
1 [PrntData] Prints all data listed on the screen.

14 ^ "14.2.5 Printout (Output)"
2 [LoadData] Loads the table data file stored in the memory

14 storage.
14 3 – Allows scrolling the screen. Each pressing of the key
scrolls the screen by 1 sample data set.
14 – – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 14.6).
14
14
14
14
14-12 UV-1280
14.2.5 Printout (Output) 14

Fig. 14.8 shows an example of data printout.
In DNA quantitation, the result can be printed for each measurement, or the entire results can be
14
Date and time when

was completed
Header Part 1
First Measurement
1
Fig. 14.8 Example of data printout for each measurement 1
 Printout for each measurement 1

out on the printer for every measurement of the sample. 1
 Print all at once 1

When you select the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 14.7), all measurement
results up to that point, or all the data within the currently loaded table data file will be printed.
1
NOTE 14
Pressing the key in the Measurement screen (Fig. 14.6) or the List Display screen (Fig.
14.7) will produce only a hard copy of the displayed screen.
14
14
14
14
UV-1280 14-13
Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB Method, and
14.3 14.3
Biuret Method

When you select [Lowry Method], [BCA Method], [CBB Method], or [Biuret Method] in the Bio-Method
Selection screen (Fig. 14.1), the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen is displayed as
follows.
Set wavelength/
Photometric value
Displays the current status.
1414
14
14
1
Indicates the selected
14 quantitation method.
14
Fig. 14.9 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (when Lowry method is selected)
14 Except for [0. Reset parameters (defined value)], the items displayed on the screen are identical to those
for the Quantitation Mode. Since all measurement function, etc., are also the same, refer to " Chapter 9
14 Quantitation" for details on the functions and operation procedures.

This section only describes the parameter configuration functions.
14
14 1 [Reset Resets the measurement parameters to the

parameters pre-defined values.
14 (Lowry)] ^ "14.3.2 Measurement Parameters

(Defined Values)"
14
14
14
14
14
14-14 UV-1280
14.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB Method, and Biuret Method
14.3.2 Measurement Parameters (Defined Values) 14

Table below shows the pre-defined values for each quantitation method. These defined parameters
facilitate the subsequent procedures and can also be arbitrarily modified after the setting.
14
Table 14.2 Measurement Parameters (Defined Values) for Different Bio-Method
Quantitation
Lowry method BCA method CBB method Biuret method
method
Measurement 1λ quantitation 1λ quantitation 1λ quantitation 1λ quantitation

method
Measurement 500.0 nm 562.0 nm 595.0 nm 540.0 nm 1

wavelength (λ1)
Calibration curve Multi-point Multi-point Multi-point Multi-point 1

method calibration curve calibration curve calibration curve calibration curve
method method method method 1
No. of standards 5 5 5 5
Order of multi- Quadratic Quadratic Quadratic Linear 1

point calibration
curve method
1
Zero intercept No No No No
No. of repetitions 1 1 1 1 1
Unit µg/ml µg/ml µg/ml mg/ml
14
14
14
14
14
UV-1280 14-15
14.4 UV Absorption Method
14.4

When you select [6. UV Method] in the Bio-Method Selection screen (Fig. 14.1), the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen will be displayed as follows.
2
1414 3
4
5
14
14
1
9
14
6 7 8
14
14
Key
Operation
14
1 [Reset Resets the changed measurement parameters to the
parameters (UV pre-defined values.
14
method)] Defines values
Quantitation method Defined values
14 Absorbance coefficient 0.6670
Measurement wavelength 280.0 nm
14 No. of repetitions 1
Unit mg/ml
14 2 [Abs coefficent] Enter the desired absorptivity for the protein to be

measured.
The input range is from 0.0001 to 99.999.
The concentration can be calculated by (absorbance/
absorptivity).
14 The frequently used absorptivity BSA (bull serum
albumin) has been selected as the default setting.
14 3 [λ] Select the desired wavelength as which to perform
quantitative analysis. Normally, set it to 280 nm.
14 The input range is from 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm (in
units of 0.1 nm).
14
14-16 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
14
Operation
4 [No. of Meas.] Specifies how many times the same sample is to be

14
measured.
Input range of repetition count: 1 to 10
When the repetition count is set to more than 1
• Standard sample: The measurement is repeatedly
performed and the mean value for absorbance is
used.
• Unknown sample: The measurement is repeatedly
performed and both the measured values and mean 1
value are displayed.
To abort the repeating measurement, press the
key. In this case, the mean value will not be
1
calculated.
NOTE 1
If a multi-cell or similar holder is used with the number
of cells set to more than one, the repeating
1
measurement function takes priority. The interlocked
measurement of multiple cells cannot be carried out.
1
5 [Unit] Specifies the concentration unit for the Quantitation
result by selecting one of the following units:
None, %, ppm, ppb, g/l, mg/ml, ng/ml, M/L and µg/ml 1
You can also register the desired unit other than those
listed above. 1
^ "14.4.2 Select Concentration Unit"
6 [SmplCmpt] Sets the parameters for the sample module. The 1

setting items include the sample module type, the
number of cells, and the operating conditions of the
1
sipper.
Operation)" 14
8 [SavParam] Saves measurement parameters, including the

calibration curve equation.
9 – Starts the measurement under the set parameters and
displays the Measurement screen. 14
^ "14.4.3 Measurement"
– – Returns to the Bio-method Selection screen. 14
14
UV-1280 14-17
1414 14.4.2 Select Concentration Unit

When you press the [Unit] key in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig.
14.10), the Concentration Unit screen (Fig. 14.11) is displayed.
Move the cursor to a desired concentration unit using the keys, and confirm it with
the key.
To use a unit other than those displayed on the list, select [Unit Regist.] on the screen.
1414
14
Registered unit
Indicates the unit that has been
Cursor created and registered by the
14 user.
14
14
14
Fig. 14.11 Concentration Unit screen
If [Unit Regist.] is selected, the [Unit Registration] screen appears (Fig. 14.12).
14
Using the keys, move the cursor to desired characters on the
list, and cofirm with the key.
14
Press the [Register] key to register the unit you have entered. The unit will be displayed in
the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 14.10).
14
14
Cursor
14
14
14
Fig. 14.12 [Unit Registration] screen

14
14
14-18 UV-1280
14.4.3 Measurement 14
Press the [DataDisp] key or the key while the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 14.10) is displayed. The Measurement screen will appear (Fig. 14.13). If
14
the key is pressed, the first measurement run will be carried out.
It a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1280, the measurement results will be printed
on the printer for every measurement of the sample.
Wavelength/Photometric
value
Indicates the current status.
Sample No.* 1
Concentration
Indicates absorbance/ 1
absorbance coefficient.
1
Cursor Absorbance
Indicates the sample The number of display digits
No. for the next 5 6 follows the setting. (See 1
measurement. "16.1.2 Decimal Display".)
1 2 3 4
1
 When measuring a single cell or using the Multi-cell (optional) with the parameter of "Drive cell No." set to "1". 1

A hyphen (-) and cell No. are attached to the sample No. 1
Example) The first measurement at the cell position "3" => Sample No.: 1-3
 When measurements are repeated

A hyphen (-) and repetition count or "m" signifying a mean value are attached to the sample No. 1
Example) The second measurement of the first sample => Sample No.: 1-2 (1-m for the mean value)
1
14
NOTE
The repeating measurement while using a multi-cell or similar holder (optional) with the multiple
cells cannot be carried out.
14
14
14
14
UV-1280 14-19
1414 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
1 [Smpl No.] Changes the next measured sample number by entering

a number in range between 0 and 9999.
2 [Equation] Displays the equation for concentration calculation.
1414
14
14
14
Fig. 14.14 Concentration equation display
3 [DataDisp] Displays the list of measurement data.

14
4 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data file to the

14
memory storage.
^ "5.1 Save Files"
14 5 – Starts the measurement under the set parameters.
Note: A maximum of 200 measurements can be entered
14 in a single table data file.

14 – – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration
screen (Fig. 14.9).
14
14
14
14
14
14
14-20 UV-1280
14.4.4 List Display 14

When you press the [DataDisp] key in the Measurement screen (Fig. 14.13), a list of
measurement results is displayed (Fig. 14.15).
14
As the measurement is repeated on the Measurement screen (Fig. 14.13), the data will be scrolled
with only the latest eight measurement results displayed on the screen. The List Display is the function
that can display the list of all measurement results.
1
Data display list
results or all data
contained in a table data 1
file (The data are
displayed from Sample
No. 1.)
1
3 Page number 1
1
1 2

1

1 [PrntData] Print all data listed on the screen.
^ "14.4.5 Printout (Output)" 1
^ "5.2.1 Load Single File" 1
measurement data. 14
lines.
14
14
14
14
UV-1280 14-21
1414 14.4.5 Printout (Output)

Fig. 14.16 shows an example of data printout.
In UV absorption method, the result can be printed for each measurement, or the entire results can be
1414
Date and time when
was completed
14 Header Part
14
First measurement
14
14

14
14  Printout for each measurement

out on the printer for every measurement of the sample.
14

14 When you select the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 14.15), all measurement
results up to that point, or all the data within the currently loaded table data file will be printed.
14
NOTE
14 Pressing the key in the Measurement screen (Fig. 14.13) or the List Display screen (Fig.
14.15) will produce only a hard copy of the displayed screen.
14
14
14
14
14-22 UV-1280
15
15 Data Processing
15
15
Chapter 15 Data 1
Processing 1
1
The data processing function can be used from the Spectrum mode or the Time Scan mode. This function
allows you to apply the following processing options to the measured waveform data: 1
• Mathematical calculation
• Derivative processing (including smoothing)
• Peak detection 1
• Area calculation
• Point pickup
• Printout 1
CONTENTS
15.1 Processing Options Screen ............................................................................................................. 15-2

15.2 Arithmetic Operations ...................................................................................................................... 15-8
15.3 Derivative Operations .................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.4 Peak Detection .............................................................................................................................. 15-17
15.5 Area Calculation ............................................................................................................................ 15-21
15.6 Point Pick....................................................................................................................................... 15-26 1
15.7 Print Processing ............................................................................................................................ 15-31
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-1
15.1 Processing Options Screen
15.1
Upon pressing the [DataProc] key on the Measurement screen (Spectrum mode) or on the
1515
Curve Display screen (Time Scan mode), the Processing Options screen appears.
The last measured data is displayed and can be processed. To process the data that is already stored
1515 in the built-in memory of the main unit or the USB memory, call the corresponding file using the Call
Curve function.
1515 (Multiple waveforms cannot be displayed simultaneously on the Data Processing screen.)
15
Curve graph
Displays the curve data to be
15 processed.
1~6
15
15 7 8 9 0
Fig. 15.1 Processing Options screen

15

15
1 [Four Allows performing arithmetic operations between
Operations] curve data and values and operation between curve
15
data. However, no data can be calculated if unit
inconsistencies exist between the vertical and
15 horizontal axes.
^ "15.2 Arithmetic Operations"
15 2 [Derivative] Applies the 1st to 4th order differential operation or
smoothing to the curve data.
15 ^ "15.3 Derivative Operations"
3 [Peak] Detects the peaks or valleys of the curve data and

then displays them as a list of values on the vertical
and horizontal axes. Up to 20 peaks or valleys can
be detected.
15
^ "15.4 Peak Detection"
4 [Area Calc.] Calculates the area enclosed by the curve data and
15
the horizontal axis.
^ "15.5 Area Calculation"
15
15-2 UV-1280

5 [Point pick] Displays, as a list, values on the vertical axis against
the horizontal axis at arbitrary or constant intervals of 15
the curve data. Up to 20 points can be displayed.
^ "15.6 Point Pick"
15
6 [Data Print] Prints the measurement parameters and the data at
each sampling point on the curve data.
1
^ "15.7 Print Processing"

1
displayed curve chart enables enlarging/reducing of
the chart.
^ "15.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing" 1
8 [Undo] Undoes the last data processing. You can undo only
the last operation. This item is only displayed when 1
the undo operation is possible.
9 [LoadCurv] Loads curve data files stored in the memory storage. 1

^ "5.2 Load Files"
0 [SavCurve] Saves processed curve data to the memory storage. 1

^ "5.1 Save Files"
– – Returns to the screen on which this function was 1

celled up.
– – Displays the cursor on the graph to activate the

1
cursor reading function.
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-3

When you press the or key in the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1) or in the
Operation Result screen displaying the curve data graph, the Reading with Cursor screen (Fig. 15.2)
1515
will be displayed.
In the Reading with Cursor screen (Fig. 15.2), the curve data at a given measurement time can be
1515 read with the cursor.
15
Reading cursor
15
15
Horizontal value/ Vertical value
Indicates horizontal value
(wavelength or time) and vertical
15 value (photometric value) at the
cursor position.
15 Fig. 15.2 Reading with Cursor screen
15
15 Moves the cursor on the curve graph and displays the horizontal and
vertical values.
15
15 Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears, and the UV-1280 returns to the
above Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1).
15
15
15
15
15-4 UV-1280
15.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing 15
When you press the [Zoom] key on the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1), the Zoom
screen is displayed.
15
15
1 2 3
1
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-5

1515 the vertical or horizontal axis range.
1515
15 limit] → [horizontal axis lower limit] → [horizontal
Cursor
Input range/
Input value
Displays
available input
range and key
input value.
15
15 Fig. 15.4 Zoom screen

NOTE
15 Data exist only at each sampling interval. Therefore,
when values other than the integral multiple of the
sampling interval are entered as horizontal axis
15
replaced with the wavelength (time) values nearest
15 to the existing data values.

15 displayed curve automatically.

15 – – Produces a screen hard copy with the zoom
operation applied.
15 – – Displays the cursor on the graph to activate the
cursor reading function.
– – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig.

15 15.1).
15
15
15-6 UV-1280
15.1.3 Example of Data Printout 15

The printout examples of arithmetic operations (^ "15.2 Arithmetic Operations"), derivative
operations (^ "15.3 Derivative Operations"), and area calculations (^ "15.5 Area Calculation")
15
are given below.
When you press the [DataPrnt] key in the Operation Result screen of each operation, the
screen hard copy of the processed result and measurement parameters of the original data are 15
printed.
1
1
Screen hard copy
1
Measurement parameters 1
1
Fig. 15.5 Example of data printout (arithmetic operation)
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-7
15.2 Arithmetic Operations
15.2
This option allows you to perform arithmetic operations between the curve data and values or
1515
operations between the curve data displayed on the Processing Options screen.
1515
15.2.1 Selecting Data
1515
1 Press the [Four Operations] key on the
Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1) to display the Cursor
15 Operator Selection screen (Fig. 15.6).
Move the cursor to the desired operator with the
15 keys, and confirm with the

key. Fig. 15.6 [Operator] Selection screen
2 The screen appears for selecting the data to be

operated (Fig. 15.7). Select [Curve data file] when
operating a curve data that is stored in the memory,
15 or select [Factor] when performing the four
Fig. 15.7 Data Selection screen
operations with factor.
Move the cursor with the keys, and
15
confirm the selection with the key.
15
15.2.2 Arithmetic Operations with Factor

15
This option allows you to perform the arithmetic operations (+, –, ×, and ÷) between the curve data
and values that have been displayed (called) on the Processing Options screen.
15
15
1 When you select [Factor] as operation target, the
Factor Input screen (Fig. 15.8) is displayed.
15 2 Enter a numeric value (factor) with numeric keys with

the input range of - 9999.9 to 9999.9 (the number of
significant figures: 5, the minimum input unit: 0.0001.)
15
3 After having entered the factor, press the

key to perform the arithmetic operation.
Press the key to return to the Processing Input range/Input value
Displays available input range and key input value.
15 Options screen (Fig. 15.1).
Fig. 15.8 Factor Input screen
15 4 When the operation has completed, the Operation

Result screen (Fig. 15.13) will display the processed
curve data.
15
15-8 UV-1280
15.2.3 Arithmetic Operations with Curve Data 15

You can load the curve data stored in the built-in instrument memory or in USB memory as an
operation target, and perform arithmetic operations.
15
However, no arithmetic operations can be performed on data containing unit inconsistencies between
the vertical axis (Abs, %T, and E) and the horizontal axis (nm, sec, and min).
15
1 When you select "Curve data file" as operation target,

the Load Files screen (Fig. 15.9) is displayed. 1
Use the keys to
move the cursor to the desired curve data, and press 1
the key to load the file.
Press the key to return to the Processing
1
Options screen (Fig. 15.1).
(For details on the Load Files screen functions and
operation procedure, refer to "5.2 Load Files" in this 1
manual.)
Fig. 15.9 Load Files screen
1
2 When the file is loaded, the waveform stored in the

curve data and the file name are displayed.
1
Press the key to perform the arithmetic
operation. The Operation Result screen (Fig. 15.13) 1
is displayed.
Press the key to return to the Load Files 1
screen (Fig. 15.9).
File name of the curve data
Fig. 15.10 Data Review screen
1
3 When the operation has completed, the Operation
Result screen (Fig. 15.13) will display the processed
curve data. 15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-9
1515
NOTE
When performing an arithmetic operation between two curve data sets with different horizontal axis
1515
ranges and sampling intervals, the operation will be performed as follows:
1515  When the horizontal axis range is different

The arithmetic operation will be performed on the
Original data
15 overlapping part of the two data ranges.
Example) Operation target

15
• Original data (wavelength range: 400 nm to data
600 nm)
• Operation target data (wavelength range: 420 nm
to 620 nm)
(Arithmetic operation)
In the case above, the following data is generated: Operation result data
• Operation result data (wavelength range: 420 nm
to 600 nm)
15
(Overlapping horizontal range)

15
Fig. 15.11 Operation of data with different

15 horizontal ranges
 When the sampling interval is different
The arithmetic operation is performed by
15
interpolating the operation target data in Original
compliance with the sampling interval data
15 (wavelength) of the original data, as shown in the

right figure. Interpolated
data
15 Operation target
Example) data
• Original data (sampling interval: 0.2 nm)

15 • Operation target data (sampling interval: 0.5 nm)
Operation
15 In the case above, the following data is generated: result data
• Operation result data (sampling interval: 0.2 nm)
Fig. 15.12 Operation of data with different

sampling intervals
15
15
15
15-10 UV-1280
15.2.4 Operation Result Screen 15

When the arithmetic operation is completed on the Data Review screen, the Operation Result screen
(Fig. 15.13) displays the processed curve data.
15
15
Displays the processed curve
data.
1
1
Indicates the original data*. Indicates the operation target
(factor or curve data).
1 2 3
1
* This screen displays the processed curve data.
[Original]: Curve data measured or loaded before calling the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1)
[Modified]: Curve data that has already been processed 1
[(File name)]: Curve data loaded in the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1).
Fig. 15.13 Operation Result screen 1
1
1 [Zoom] Enlarges or reduces the processed waveform on the

screen.
^ "15.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing"
2 [DataPrnt] Prints a screen hard copy and the measurement

parameters.
^ "15.1.3 Example of Data Printout" 1
3 [SavCurve] Saves the processed curve data to the memory
storage. 15
^ "5.1 Save Files"

15.1).
– – Displays the cursor on the curve graph to activate 15

15
15
UV-1280 15-11
15.3 Derivative Operations
15.3
For the curve data, 1st to 4th order derivative processing or smoothing can be performed. For this
1515
derivative processing, the convolution method digital derivative operation using 17 data pieces
consisting of former and latter data (Savitzky-Golay method)* has been adopted.
1515 * A. Savitzky, M.J.E Golay, "Smoothing and Differentiation of Data by Simplified Least Squares
Procedures", Analytical Chemistry, vol. 36, no. 8, pp. 1627-1639, 1964.
1515
To perform derivative processing, the order of derivative and derivative wavelength (time) difference
must be determined.
15
The derivative wavelength (time) difference is defined by the sampling interval of operated curve data
15
and the coefficient Δλ(N) (ΔT(N)) specified to perform the operation.
[Derivative wavelength (time) difference] = ([Sampling interval] × [Coefficient] × 16) =.. 2
This coefficient defines the interval of data points on the waveform used for the operation. When the
coefficients are defined as "1" and "2", one sampling interval and two sampling intervals are the
respective intervals of the data points picked up for the operation.
15
Operation target data Curve data
Coefficient=1
15
15
Coefficient=2
15
Data point used for operation Derivative wavelength (time) difference

15 (17 points before and after the target)
15 Fig. 15.14 Derivative wavelength (time) difference and coefficient Δλ(N) (ΔT(N))
The greater the coefficient, the greater the derivative wavelength (time) difference, and the less the
15 noise. However, specifying a coefficient larger than appropriate deteriorates the resolution of the
derivative spectrum (^ Fig. 15.18). Determine the coefficient value considering the two elements of
noise and resolution.
15
15
15
15
15-12 UV-1280
15.3.1 Derivative Processing 15
1 Press key [Derivative] on the Processing

Options screen to display the Order Input screen
15
(Fig. 15.15).
15
2 Enter the order of derivative with numeric keys and

confirm it with the key. 1
For the order of derivative, select from 0 through 4.
When 0 is specified, smoothing is performed.
1
Specify the order of derivative.

1
Fig. 15.15 Order Input screen
1
3 Enter the coefficient Δλ (N) or (ΔT (N)) and confirm it
with the key.
For the coefficient, select from 1 through 9. 1
Coefficient Δλ (N)(ΔT(N))
1
Fig. 15.16 Coefficient (Δλ(N) or ΔT(N)) Input

screen
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-13
1515 15.3.2 Operation Result Screen

When the coefficient Δλ(T)(ΔT(N)) is entered, the differentiation is performed and then the result is
displayed. Fig. 15.17 shows the result obtained by processing the data in Fig. 15.16 with the order of
1515
1 and the coefficient of 1 (Δλ = 0.8). The processing result can be saved and the waveform can be
enlarged/reduced.
1515 When the key is pressed, the Processing Options screen appears, but the curve data for the
calculation result is displayed on that screen.
15
15 Displays the processed curve

data.
15
15
1 2 3
15 Fig. 15.17 Operation Result screen
15
15 1 [Zoom] Enlarges or reduces the processed waveform on the

screen.
^ "15.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing"
15
2 [DataPrnt] Prints a screen hard copy and the measurement
parameters.
15
^ "15.1.3 Example of Data Printout"
3 [SavCurve] Saves the processed curve data to the memory

15 storage.
^ "5.1 Save Files"

15.1).
15 – – Displays the cursor on the curve graph to activate
15
15-14 UV-1280
 Example of smoothing processing

15
15
15
1
 Example of 1st order derivative
1
1
Fig. 15.18 Changes in derivative spectrum depending on derivative wavelength difference
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-15
1515
NOTE
In order to calculate the derivative values for each data set, 17 data points consisting of former and
1515
latter data are required (Fig. 15.14). Therefore, when calculating the data set around both ends of
the curve data, the edging data is repeatedly used for the calculation, since no other data is
1515 available.
Example)
When performing derivative processing on the following spectrum data, it is assumed for the
15
calculation that all data sets at wavelengths shorter than 400 nm are 0.1 Abs, and those at
wavelengths longer than 500 nm are 0.2 Abs.
15
Wavelength range: 400 nm to 500 nm
Data at both ends: Absorbance at 400 nm=0.1 Abs, Absorbance at 500 nm=0.2 nm
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15-16 UV-1280
15.4 Peak Detection
15.4
This function detects peaks and valleys on the curve data according to the algorithm described below,
15
and displays the values in the table.
 Peak detection algorithm
For spectra, peaks are searched from the longer wavelength side (right side). For time course curves,
15
peaks are searched from the side of time "zero" (left side).
A maximum of 20 peaks are detected by repeating the following procedures (1) to (3): 15
(1) The program searches a section consisting of six continuously increasing data points (Section A) 1
and a section consisting of six continuously decreasing data points (Section B), appearing after
Section A.
1
(2) The maximum data point detected between Sections A and B is defined as a peak.
(3) Once the peak is detected, the program starts searching the next section consisting of six
continuously increasing data points (Section C). 1
Peak: The maximum point between A and B 1
Peak
1
Section C Section B Section A

1
Valley
Valley: The minimum point between B and C

1
(The center point of the multiple minimum points)
Scanning direction (in the case of spectra)
Peak Valley Peak Valley
Scanning direction Scanning direction

(in the case of time course curve) (in the case of spectra) 15
Fig. 15.19 Peak detection algorithm
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-17
15.4 Peak Detection
When the [Peak] key the pressed in the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1), the peaks
1515
and valleys in the curve data are detected and the Peak Detection screen (Fig. 15.19) is displayed. Up
to 20 peaks or valleys can be detected.
1515 When you select the [Graph] key, the curve data with the marks indicating peaks or valleys
will be displayed.
1515
15
15 Data table
Displays the result of the peak
(valley) detection.
15
1 2 3 4
15
(Peak table)
15
15
15
15
15
15 1 2 3 4
(Valley table)
Fig. 15.20 Peak (Valley) Detection screen
15
15
15
15-18 UV-1280
15.4 Peak Detection
15
1 [Graph] Displays the curve data with the mark indicating

15
peaks or valleys.
15
Peak/ valley
mark
Fig. 15.21 Peak Detection screen (graph)

1
2 [DataPrnt] Prints a screen hard copy, measurement
parameters, and peak (valley) detection results.
^ "Fig. 15.22 Example of data printout (peak 1
detection)"
3 [Peak] Displays the Peak Detection screen (Fig. 15.20 1

(peak table)).
4 [Valley] Displays the Valley Detection screen (Fig. 15.20 1

(valley table))
– – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 1

15.1).
– – Displays the cursor on the curve graph to activate

15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-19
15.4 Peak Detection
1515  Data Printout Example

If you press the [DataPrnt] on the Peak Detection screen, the screen hard copy will be
printed (Fig. 15.22).
1515
1515
15 Screen hard copy

Hard copy excluding
the function row
15
Measurement end
date
Measurement
parameters
15
Peak detection
15 results
15
Fig. 15.22 Example of data printout (peak detection)
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15-20 UV-1280
15.5 15.5 Area Calculation
This function calculates the area of the portion surrounded by the curve data and the specified vertical
15
axis.
The calculation results are expressed as the values α, ß, and α + ß (Fig. 15.28). However, the
calculation method varies according to the data type of the vertical axis (photometric value). 15
 When the type of photometric value is absorbance (Abs) or energy (E) 15

α = the area of the portion bounded by the curve data and a straight line connecting the starting and
ending points on the data
1
The sign of α for the area protruding upwards is (+), and (-) for that protruding downwards.
1
ß = the area of the portion bounded by a straight line connecting the starting and ending points on the
curve data and the horizontal axis
The sign of ß is always (+). 1
Example)
Ending point Starting point

1
Fig. 15.23 Example of area calculation (Abs, E) 1
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-21
15.5 Area Calculation
1515  When the type of photometric value is transmittance (%T)

α = the area of the portion bounded by a straight line connecting the starting and ending points on the
curve data and the horizontal axis
1515 The sign of α for the area protruding upwards is (-), and (+) for that protruding downwards.
1515 ß = the area of the portion bounded by the curve data and horizontal axis (the starting and ending
points)
The sign of ß is always (+).
15
Example)
15
Ending point Starting point
15
Fig. 15.24 Example of area calculation (%T)

15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15-22 UV-1280
15.5.1 Area Calculation Processing 15

Press the [Area Calc.] key on the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1) to display the
Range Setting screen (Fig. 15.25).
15
15
Fig. 15.25 Range Setting screen

1
Using the numeric keys, type in the starting and ending points of the horizontal axis (wavelength or
time) for the area calculation, and confirm with the key.
1
Alternatively, you can specify the starting and ending points using the reading cursor function. To do
so, perform the following procedure:
1
NOTE 1
When the cursor is dipslayed on the screen, data input with numeric keys will not be accepted. To
make the entry with numeric keys available, press the key while the cursor is displayed
on the screen.
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-23
1515 1 Press the keys on the Range

Setting screen (Fig. 15.25) to display cursor on the
curve graph.
1515 Press the keys to move the cursor
to the desired starting point, and confirm it with the
1515 key.
15
NOTE
Holding down the keys moves
15 Fig. 15.26 Input screen for starting point
the cursor faster.
2 Next, the Entry screen for the ending point appears.

Similarly as in procedure 1, enter the ending point by
pressing the keys to move the
cursor to the desired ending point, and confirm it with
the key.
15
If you confirm the positions of the starting and ending
points, the Operation Result screen (Fig. 15.28) will
15
be displayed.
15
Fig. 15.27 Input screen for ending point
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15-24 UV-1280
15.5.2 Operation Result Screen 15

The Operation Result screen (Fig. 15.28) displays curve graph, calculation range, and calculation
result.
15
15
1 2 3
1
Fig. 15.28 Operation Result screen

1
1 [Zoom] Enlarges or reduces the processed waveform on the
screen.
^ "15.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing" 1
2 [DataPrnt] Prints the screen hard copy and the measurement

parameters.
^ "15.1.3 Example of Data Printout"
3 [SavCurve] Saves the curve data to the memory storage.

^ "5.1 Save Files"
– – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 1

15.1).
– – Displays the cursor on the curve graph to activate 15

15
15
15
UV-1280 15-25
15.6 15.6Point Pick
This function is used to pick up the photometric values at specified wavelengths (time) on the curve
1515
displayed on the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1), and display them as a numeric data list.
1515
1 Press [Point Pick] key on the Processing
Options screen (Fig. 15.1) to display the screen for 1
1515 selecting a data pick-up method (Fig. 15.29). 2
(Press the key to return to the Operator
Cursor
15 Selection screen.)
 Data pick-up method Fig. 15.29 Pick-up Method screen
No. Method Description
15 1 Even interval Displays a list of ordinate data for
up to 20 points at a specified
interval from a specified abscissa
(wavelength, time).
^ "15.6.1 Point Pick at Even
Intervals"
2 Manual input Displays the data at arbitrary
wavelengths (or time).
15
^ "15.6.2 Point Pick with
Manual Input"
15
15
2 Move the cursor to a desired method with the
keys, and confirm it with the
key.
15
15
15.6.1 Point Pick at Even Intervals
The screen (Fig. 15.30) appears for specifying a horizontal value (wavelength, time) from which the
data pick-up is started and also the data interval. Enter the start wavelength (time) and interval with
15
numeric keys, and confirm each of the values with the key. A list of the picked up data will be
displayed on the screen (Fig. 15.33).
15 ^ "15.6.3 List Display Screen"
15 Press the key to return to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1).
-Input range of starting abscissa
When horizontal axis is wavelength - Upper limit: Scan start wavelength
Lower limit: Scan end wavelength
When horizontal axis is time - Lower limit: 0
Upper limit: Data end time
15
-Input range of interval: Scan pitch (interval) to 1000
15
15
15-26 UV-1280
15.6 Point Pick
15
NOTE
Data exist only at each scan pitch (cycle). Enter the integral multiple of the scan pitch (cycle) for the
15
starting wavelength (time) and interval.
15
Fig. 15.30 Wavelength (time) Input screen (even interval)

1
15.6.2 Point Pick with Manual Input
First, the screen appears for specifying the number of data to be picked up (Fig. 15.31). 1
Enter the desired number of the data points with numeric keys (input range of 1 to 20), and confirm
with the key. The screen appears for entering each wavelength value at which the point pick 1
is performed (Fig. 15.32).
15
15
Fig. 15.31 Data Point Input screen
15
15
UV-1280 15-27
15.6 Point Pick
In the Wavelength (time) Input screen, you can enter wavelengths (time) for each specified data point.
1515
The data list column initially displays the same number of wavelengths (time) used for the last point-
pick operation as the number of the data points specified. (If the last-picked points are fewer than the
1515 number of specified points, the columns for the differences are displayed as "---".)
1515 Enter the wavelength (time) to perform point pick with numeric keys, and confirm with the
key. The entered value will be highlighted on the data list.
15
After all wavelengths for the specified number of points are confirmed, the List Display screen is
displayed. ^ "15.6.3 List Display Screen"
15
Press the key to return to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1).
Data list
15
Highlighted column
15 Highlight moves to the next
column after the wavelength
(time) is confirmed.
15
Cursor
15 Displays the input value.
15 Fig. 15.32 Wavelength (time) Input screen
15
15
15
15
15
15
15-28 UV-1280
15.6 Point Pick
15.6.3 List Display Screen 15

This screen displays up to 20 data points that have been picked up.
15
15
1
1
Fig. 15.33 List Display screen (Start time 200 sec, Interval 20 sec) 1
1
1 [DataPrnt] Prints a screen hard copy, measurement

1
parameters, and point pick results. For the point
pick at even intervals, all data points picked
within the horizontal range of curve data are
1
printed out, though only 20 data points are
displayed in the List Display screen.
^ "Fig. 15.34 Example of data printout"

15.1).
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-29
15.6 Point Pick
1515  Data Printout Example
1515
1515
Screen hard copy
excluding the function row
15
15
Measurement
parameters
15
Peak detection results
15
15
Fig. 15.34 Example of data printout
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15-30 UV-1280
15.7 Print Processing
15.7
This processing is used to output the data value at each sampling point on the curve displayed on the
15
Processing Options screen (Fig. 15.1).
Once the print process has started, it cannot be cancelled. If you must abort printing nonetheless,
simply unplug the USB cable for the printer from the UV-1280. 15
15
NOTE
The number of display digits of the output data is determined by the setting in [2. Decimal display]
1
of [8. Utilities] on the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1).
1
Measurement end time
Measurement parameters 1
Curve data
All data values for each
sampling point are printed
out.
1
Fig. 15.35 Printout example of data processing
15
15
15
15
UV-1280 15-31
15.7 Print Processing
1515
1515
1515
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15-32 UV-1280
16
16 Utilities
16
Chapter 16 Utilities 16
16
This is the mode for setting the instrument's operating parameters, such as the light source switching
wavelength, printer setup, or number of data columns displayed. 1
The parameters which can be set in this mode are parameters shared with other modes.
These will also be stored internally, even if the power is turned OFF.
1
CONTENTS
16.1 Utilities Menu Screen....................................................................................................................... 16-2 1

16.2 Changing Printer Driver (only when ESC/P-R is selected) ............................................................ 16-10
16
16
16
UV-1280 16-1
16.1 Utilities Menu Screen
16.1
When you select [9. Utilities] in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the Utilities menu shown in Fig.
1616
16.1 will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
1616
5
1616 6
7
1616
16
Fig. 16.1 Utilities Menu screen
16
Key
16 No. Display Description
Operation
1 [Start program] Sets the mode in which the instrument will enter
16 standby when the power is turned ON.
^ "16.1.1 Start Program"
16 2 [Decimal display] Sets the number of decimals of data to be displayed.

^ "16.1.2 Decimal Display"
16 3 [Light Source] Sets the light source switching.

^ "16.1.3 Light Source Selection"
16 4 [Printer] Sets the printer to be used and the format of a hard

copy.
^ "16.1.4 Printer Setting"
16
5 [Clock set] Sets the current time and the date print format.
Use numeric keys to set the clock time.
16
The clock is the 24-hour type and is set either in the
order (Year/Month/Date Hour: Minute: Second) or
16 (Date/Month/Year Hour: Minute: Second). The former
is displayed in numeric forms, but the latter in English
in order to display Month.
Ex.) 10/Dec/07 12:34:56
16
Since it has a battery back-up, it is not necessary to
set the clock every time you turn ON the power.
16
16-2 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
16
Operation
6 [Beep] Sets the buzzer sound to turn ON/OFF.

Each pressing of the key toggles between [ON] and
[OFF].
7 [Data accum. Designates the accumulation time to read data in the

time] Photometric (one- and multi-wavelength), Quantitation,
and Bio-method modes. 16
^ "16.1.5 Setting Data Accumulation Time"
16
16
16
16
16
UV-1280 16-3
1616 16.1.1 Start Program

When you select [Start program] key in the Utilities Menu screen (Fig. 16.1), the screen
below is displayed.
Move the cursor to the desired start program with the key, and confirm with the
key.
Cursor
1616
1616
1616
Fig. 16.2 Start Program Selection screen
16
The selectable start programs are as shown in the following table.
16
Start Program Description
16 Standard menu This mode has been set as a factory default.
Photometric
16 Photometric 8λ
Spectrum
16 Quantitation
Kinetics
16 Kinetics rate
Time course The instrument will stand by at the Measurement Parameter

16 Configuration screen of the selected mode (or measurement
Multi-component quantitation
method).
Bio-method
16 (DNA Quantitation)
Lowry method
16
BCA method
CBB method
16
Biuret method
UV Absorption method
Stored parameter files The selected parameter file stored in the built-in memory or USB
memory device is loaded and the instrument will start up in the
16
Measurement mode for the file contents. To save measurement
parameters, perform [SavParam] in each measurement mode.
16
16-4 UV-1280
16
NOTE
To show the hidden items, scroll the screen display.
16.1.2 Decimal Display

You can switch the number of digits in the photometric data display between "Abs (3) %T (1)" and
"Abs (4) %T (2)".
The value at the minimum digit is rounded off when displayed or printed out. 16
"Abs (3) %T (1)":

16
•Abs (Absorbance):Rounded to three decimal places (i.e. the fourth decimal place is rounded off).
•%T (Transmittance):Rounded to one decimal place (i.e. the second decimal place is rounded
off). 16
•E (Energy):Rounded to one decimal place (i.e. the second decimal place is rounded off).
"Abs (4) %T (2)": 1

•Abs (Absorbance):Rounded to four decimal place (i.e. the fifth decimal place is rounded off).
•%T (Transmittance):Rounded to two decimal places (i.e. the third decimal place is rounded off).
•E (Energy):Rounded to two decimal places (i.e. the third decimal place is rounded off).
1
NOTE 1
Photometric data is saved in CSV format as the decimal place values set here.
1
NOTE
Except for some measurement modes (^ "3.4 Handling Internal Data"), internal floating-point
data (before being rounded off) is used for various operations based on measurement values. 1
The displayed data has been rounded off. Therefore, the value manually calculated from the
photometric data is different from the one resulting from the operation; the fewer the number of
significant digits, the larger the difference.
1
16
16
16
UV-1280 16-5
1616 16.1.3 Light Source Selection

The UV-1280 uses a deuterium lamp (D2 lamp) in the ultra-violet region and a tungsten iodine lamp
(WI lamp) in the visible/near-infrared region.
Select whether to automatically switch between the two light sources according to measurement
wavelengths, or to fix them regardless of the wavelengths.
Cursor 1
1616 2
3
4
1616
Fig. 16.3 Light Source Switching Selection screen
1616

16
1 – [Auto] Enter the wavelength for light source switching with
numeric keys.
16 The input range is from 295.0 to 364.0 nm (in units of
0.1 nm).
16 The factory default is 340.8 nm.
2 – [WI lamp] Regardless of the setting of the measurement
16 wavelength, the WI lamp is always the light source.
3 – [D2 lamp] Regardless of the setting of the measurement
16 wavelength, the D2 lamp is always the light source.
4 – To select the light switch setting, move the cursor to

a desired setting with keys, and
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16-6 UV-1280
16.1.4 Printer Setting 16

When you select [Printer] key in the Utilities Menu screen (Fig. 16.1), the screen below is
displayed.
1
2 16
3
4
5 16
6
16
Fig. 16.4 Printer Setting Selection screen (When "ESC/P-R" is selected) 1
1
Key
Operation
1
1 [Printer] Goes to the Printer Selection screen.
^ " Printer Selection" in this section
1
2 [Date printing] Specifies whether the date should be printed on the
hard copy output or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles the display between 1
[ON] and [OFF].
3 [Function area Specifies whether the function key should be printed 1

printing] on the hard copy output or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles the display between
1
[ON] and [OFF].
4 [Left margin] Sets the left margin of the page (not available in MPU).
The setting range is from 0 to 9. 1
5 [Paper Size] Sets the paper size (not available in MPU).

Each pressing of the key toggles the display between 16
[A4] and [Letter].
6 [Printer Driver] Changes the printer to be used. (Displayed only when

"ESC/P-R" is selected.)
^ "16.2 Changing Printer Driver (only when ESC/P-
16
R is selected)"
The model name of the currently available printer is
displayed on the screen. 16
UV-1280 16-7
 Printer Selection
1616
Printer type Description
DPU Select this when using the special accessory, screenshot printer
DPU.
MPU Select this when using the special accessory, screenshot printer
MPU.
1616 ESC/P-24 Select this when using a printer that supports the ESC/P control
code for EPSON 24-pin printers. This is also applied for laser
printers.
1616
ESC/P-9 Select this when using a printer that supports the ESC/P control
code for EPSON 9-pin printers.
1616
ESC/P-R Select this when using a printer that supports the ESC/Raster
control code for EPSON.
16
Note that driver software must be changed according to the
printer used. Be sure to preselect a driver specific to the printer.
16 ^ "16.2 Changing Printer Driver (only when ESC/P-R is
selected)"
16 PCL Select this when using a printer that supports the PCL control
code for HP.
16
CAUTION
16
When using the ESC/P Raster printer, DO NOT unplug the USB cable before the printer head
returns to its home position. If you do, the printer will fall into an abnormal status in which no
16 printing commands are accepted.
To plug the USB printer cable to another port or computer after (or while) using with the UV-1280,
be sure to turn OFF the printer power beforehand.
16
As long as a printer other than MPU is selected, [4. Left margin] and [5. Paper Size] can be specified.
16 To select a printer, move the cursor to the desired printer type with keys, and
16
Cursor
16
Fig. 16.5 Printer Selection screen

16
16
16-8 UV-1280
16.1.5 Setting Data Accumulation Time 16

For Photometric (one- and multi-wavelength) mode, Quantitation mode and Bio-method mode, you
can select the data accumulation time for acquiring data.
Four options are available: 0.05, 0.2, 0.5 and 2.0 sec. (Default value: 0.2 sec.)
The longer the time become, the less the dispersion of the obtained data, but the number of data
outputs per unit time becomes less.
The number of outputs per second is almost the reciprocal of the accumulation time.
To select the accumulation time, move the cursor to the desired setting with keys, 16
and confirm with the key.
16
Cursor
16
1
Fig. 16.6 [Data accumulating time] Selection screen
NOTE
1
For spectrum measurement, the accumulation time is determined depending on "Scan speed" and
"Scan pitch" specified as measurement parameters.
(^ "8.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen") 1
16
16
16
UV-1280 16-9
Changing Printer Driver (only when ESC/P-R is
16.2
16.2
selected)
When using a printer that supports the ESC/P Raster control code ("ESC/P-R"), the driver software specific to
1616
the printer must be installed on UV-1280 to ensure proper printing operation. Therefore, when a model name
different from that of the currently connected printer is displayed on [6. Printer Driver] in the Printer Setting
Selection screen (Fig. 16.4) be sure to change the printer driver using the following procedure.
To learn about ESC/P-R printers compatible with UV-1280, and how to obtain drivers specific to the printers,
contact your Shimadzu Representative where you purchased the product.
1616 16.2.1 Preparing USB Memory Stick
1616 1) Prepare a USB memory stick, and create the following folders under the root directory.
"\UV1280\DevInfo"
2) Save the printer driver file (*****.drv) you have previously downloaded to the created folder (\DevInfo).
1616 "\UV1280\DevInfo\ *****.drv"
16
16.2.2 Printer Driver Changing Procedure
16
1 Select [8. Utilities] in the [Mode menu] screen. (Press
the key.)
16
16
16
16
2 Select [4. Printer] in the Utilities Menu screen. (Press
the key.)
16
16
16
16
16
16
16-10 UV-1280
16.2 Changing Printer Driver (only when ESC/P-R is selected)
3 Select [1. Printer] in the Printer Setting Selection

screen. (Press the key.)
16
4 The Printer Selection screen will be displayed. Use

the keys to move the cursor to
"ESC/P-R", and confirm the selection with the
key.
16
5 The model name of the currently available printer will

be displayed on [6. Printer Driver] in the Printer
16
Setting Selection screen.

16
6 Plug the USB memory stick that stores the printer

driver file into the UV-1280.
1
1
7 Select [6. Printer Driver] in the Printer Setting
Selection screen. (Press the key.)
1
8 The Printer Driver Selection screen will be displayed.

Use the keys to move the cursor to
1
the model name of the printer to be used. Confirm the
selection with the key. 1
16
16
16
UV-1280 16-11
16.2 Changing Printer Driver (only when ESC/P-R is selected)
1616 9 Verify that the printer model name you have just
selected is displayed on [6. Printer Driver] in the
Printer Setting Selection screen. Then remove the
USB memory stick.
10 Press the
screen.
key to return to the Utilities Menu
1616
1616
1616
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16-12 UV-1280
17
17 Maintenance
17
Chapter 17 Maintenance 17
17
17
The UV-1280 provides a validation function used to validate its performance, and a maintenance function used
to manage the time periods of lamp illumination. 17
CONTENTS
17
17.1 Maintenance Screen........................................................................................................................ 17-2
17.2 Security Functions ........................................................................................................................... 17-4
17.3 Updating the System Program ...................................................................................................... 17-12 17
17
17
17
17
17
17
UV-1280 17-1
17.1 Maintenance Screen
17.1
When the [Mainte.] key is pressed on the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1) used to select each
1717
measurement mode, the [Maintenance] screen appears.
1
2
1717
3
Indicates the accumulated
4 illumination time period of the
5 light source lamp at the current
1717 point.
6
1717
1717
Fig. 17.1 [Maintenance] screen
Key
Operation
1717
1 [Validation] Changes over to the mode used to validate the
performance of the spectrophotometer.
1717 The validation function is used to periodically validate the
performance of the UV-1280 and record the result.
1717 ^ "18 Instrument Validation"
2 [Reset lamp Use this function during the light source lamp replacement
17 usage time] (^ "21.4 Replacing the Light Source") to reset the lamp
illumination time currently recorded/displayed.
Move the cursor to the target lamp with the
17
key, and press the key to reset the
illumination time period.
17
Cursor
17
Fig. 17.2 [Reset lamp usage time] screen
17
17
17-2 UV-1280
17.1 Maintenance Screen
No.
Key
Display Description
17
Operation
3 [λ Aligns the wavelength origin (wavelength recalibration) by

Recalibration] referencing the emission line of the D2 lamp (656.1 nm).
Perform the wavelength recalibration in the following cases:
• To learn the original wavelength accuracy of the UV-1280
after long elapsed power use, to check instrument
functions, etc. 17
• In the case of significant environment temperature
change after the power is turned ON. 17
NOTE 17
• Use the standard sample compartment, and verify that
nothing is placed in the cell holder.
17
• DO NOT open the sample compartment cover during the
calibration.
Wavelength recalibration
The wavelength recalibration is also performed during the 17
initialization process at the instrument startup.
Normally, the wavelength origin does not fluctuate, but it
17
may occasionally shift due to the influence of environment
temperature fluctuations.
Though the shift can be corrected by restarting the UV- 17
1280, this function can correct the shift when the instrument
and light source lamp are at stable temperature. 17
4 [Security Displays the setting screen for security functions, where
settings] you can switch ON/OFF each security function, change 17
passwords, and perform other security operations.
NOTE 17
When the security function is enabled (ON), the setting
screen is displayed only when you have logged in as
17
Administrator.
^ "17.2 Security Functions"
5 [System Use this function to update the system program of the UV- 17
program 1280. For details on procuring the system program, contact
update] your Shimadzu representative. 17
^ "17.3 Updating the System Program"
6 – [WI Lamp life] Displays the part number and product life of the light source
[D2 Lamp life] lamp for replacement.
UV-1280 17-3
17.2 Security Functions
17.2
1717 17.2.1 Security Function Operations

The UV-1280 has a security function that allows restricting function availability according to user level.
When the security functions are enabled, you need to log in to the UV-1280 as one of the following
users before using the instrument: Administrator, Developer, or Operator. (^ "3.2 Login Screen
(Only When Security Function is On)")
If available functions are specified for each user beforehand, you can control function availability
according to user level.
1717 The following is the procedure for setting the security functions:
1717 1 Set the security parameters (^ "17.2.3 Authority Setting for Security Parameters").
In the Security Settings screen (Fig. 17.6), specify which user can use what functions to control the
data and instrument. Table 17.1 shows the security parameters (functions) that can be assigned to
1717
users and the default authority setting for each user.
The default (factory) authority setting assumes user levels defined as follows:
1717 [Administrator]
The administrative manager of the UV-1280, who can use all functions of the instrument
[Developer]
The inspection manager, who can used all functions except those for instrument management
(other than the instrument validation function)
1717
[Operator]
The operator of the UV-1280, who can perform measurements using parameter files created/saved
1717 by the inspection manager, and save the measured data
1717
2 Set the password for each user (^ "17.2.4 Changing Password").
Set the password for each user in the Password Change screen (Fig. 17.10).
17
3 Enable the security functions (^ "17.2.2 Setting Security Functions").
Turn ON the security functions in the [Security settings] screen (Fig. 17.5).
17
17 4 Return to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1) and

press the key.
The current user (Administrator) is logged off, and
17 the Login screen appears (Fig. 17.3), where you can
log in to the UV-1280 as the desired user (^ "3.2
Login Screen (Only When Security Function is On)")
17
17
Fig. 17.3 [Login] screen
17-4 UV-1280
Table 17.1 Security Parameters (Authority) and Default Values

17
Defualt
Parameters Values*1
No. Description
(Authority)
A D O
(Security Parameters 1)
1 Change The right to change parameters in the Measurement √ √
parameters Parameter Configuration screen for each measurement mode
17
2 Change Quantitation mode, Bio-method mode √ √
Calibration • The right to change, add, and delete the standard sample
Curve data in Concentration Table screen 17
• The right to change the order of calibration curve and to
create a new calibration curve in the Calibration Curve 17
screen
3 Load The right to load parameter files for each measurement mode √ √ √
17
Parameter in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1)
Files
4 Save The right to save the currently set parameters as a separate √ √
Parameter file in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for
Files each measurement mode 17
5 Change The right to change parameters in the Utilities Menu screen √ √
Utilities (Fig. 16.1) 17
6 Change The right to change parameters of each item to be validated √ √
Validation for the instrument validation function
17
Settings
7 Load Data • The right to load stored table data files in the (Result) List √ √ √
17
Files Display screen
• The right to load curve data files in the Measurement
screen or Curve Display screen 17
8 Save Data The right to save measurement results as data files in the √ √ √
Files Measurement screen or Curve Display screen 17
9 Data The right to perform the data processing (^ Chapter 15) √ √
Processings from the Measurement screen of the Spectrum mode or the
17
Time Scan mode
17
1 Reset Lamp The right to reset the lamp illumination time in the √
Illumination [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 17.1)
Time 17
2 PC Control • The right to switch to the external control mode √
Mode (^ Chapter 19) from the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1)
• The right to return to the [Mode menu] screen from the
external control mode
UV-1280 17-5
1717 Defualt
Parameters Values*1
No. Description
(Authority)
A D O
3 Copy Files The right to copy the files stored in the built-in memory or √ √
USB memory in the [File Manager] screen (^ "4.4.2 File
Manager Screen")
4 Delete Files • The right to delete the files stored in the built-in memory or √ √
1717 USB memory in the [File Manager] screen (^ "4.4.2 File
Manager Screen")
1717 • The right to overwrite and save data files in each

measurement mode.
• The right to delete the built-in memory files from the screen
1717
displayed when insufficient storage space prevents saving
(^ "5.1.3 Delete Files in Built-in Memory").
1717 5 Convert to The right to convert files in the built-in memory or USB √ √
CSV memory to data files in CSV format in the [File Manager]
screen (^ "4.4.2 File Manager Screen")
*1
The Column sub-captions of "A", "D", and "O" stand for Administrator, Developer, and Operator,
1717 respectively. The tick mark (√) means that corresponding user(s) can use the particular function.
1717
1717
17
17
17
17
17
17
17-6 UV-1280
17.2.2 Setting Security Functions 17

When you press the [Security settings] key on the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 17.1), the
following screen appears.
NOTE
Be extremely careful not to lose your password.
Note especially that if the password for Administrator is lost, the status cannot be recovered even
by attempting to set a new password, since the security function settings become defunct.
17
Contact your Shimadzu representative.
17
Only the Administrator can change the security function settings.
Therefore, if the [Security settings] key is pressed in the [Maintenance] screen, the UV-1280
17
will prompt you to enter the Administrator's password.
17
17
Fig. 17.4 Password-prompting message ([Maintenance] screen)

17
When you enter the Administrator's password and press the key, the [Security settings]
screen (Fig. 17.5) appears. 17
NOTE 17
If you have never set a password (^ "17.2.4 Changing Password"), just press the key
without entering anything. No password has been set to the UV-1280 in its initial setting.
17
17
17
17
17
UV-1280 17-7
1717
1
2
3
4
1717
1717
1717
Fig. 17.5 [Security settings] screen
1717
1 [Security mode] Switches the ON/OFF of the security functions.

Each pressing of the key toggles the display
1717 between [ON] and [OFF].
2 [Password When the security function is ON, specifies the

1717 change] password for logging in.
^ "17.2.4 Changing Password"
1717 3 [Security When the security function is ON, specifies the
parameters] functions user authority available to user.
17 ^ "17.2.3 Authority Setting for Security
Parameters"
17 4 [Start-up in PC Used to set up the UV-1280 to automatically

ctrl] start up in the PC Control mode (Refer to
Chapter 19) after the initialization. Each
17
pressing of the key toggles the display between
[ON] and [OFF] of this function.
17
– – Returns to the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 17.1).
17
17
17-8 UV-1280
17.2.3 Authority Setting for Security Parameters 17

If you press the [Security parameters] key on the Security Setting screen (Fig. 17.5), the
Security Parameters screen is displayed.
The Security Parameters screen displays the various functions in which user availability can be set,
and identifies the users who can access those functions. "A", "D", and "O" stand for Administrator,
Developer, and Operator, respectively.
To switch the screens for "Security parameters 1" and "Security parameters 2", use the 17
keys.
17
For detailed explanation of each parameter, refer to Table 17.1.
17
17
17
Indicates the user who can use the listed function 17
Fig. 17.6 Security Parameters screens 17
17
17
17
17
17
17
UV-1280 17-9
The following is the procedure for indicating which users can use a given security parameter.
1717
Here, the procedure is explained using an example where you indicate the user who can change [5.
Change Utilities] in Security Parameters 1 as "only Administrator".
1 Press the
is displayed.
key when Security Parameters 1
Cursor
The User Selection screen is displayed (Fig. 17.7).

1717
Fig. 17.7 User Selection screen
1717
2 Using the keys, move the cursor to
the position of "Administrator".
1717
When confirming the setting by pressing the
key, you will return to the Security Parameters screen
1717 (Fig. 17.8).
The user who can control the [5. Change Utilities]
parameter is indicated with "A" on the screen.
1717
Fig. 17.8 Security Parameters screen
1717
1717
17
17
17
17
17
17
17-10 UV-1280
17.2.4 Changing Password 17

If you select the [Password change] key on the [Security settings] screen (Fig. 17.5), the
[Target User] screen will appear.
Select the user whose password is to be changed. To select the user, move the cursor to the target
user, and confirm with the key.
Cursor
17
17
Fig. 17.9 [Target User] screen
Next, change the password in the screen subsequently displayed.

17
17
17
17
17
Fig. 17.10 [Password change] screen 17

Enter the password with numeric keys. The available numerals are 0 to 9, and up to 8 digits can be
entered. 17
17
NOTE
Be extremely careful not to lose your password.
Note especially that if the password for Administrator is lost, the status cannot be recovered even 17
by attempting to set a new password, since the security function settings become defunct.
Contact your Shimadzu representative. 17
17
UV-1280 17-11
17.3 Updating the System Program
17.3
Users are able to update the system program of the UV-1280 on their own. Prior to updating, the user
1717
needs to prepare a USB memory device that contains a copy of the system program. For details on
procuring the system program, contact your Shimadzu representative.
The procedure for updating the system program is as follows.
NOTE
If downloading the system program from Shimadzu's website, place the system program file in the
1717 root directory of the USB memory device. Updating cannot be performed correctly if the file is
placed elsewhere.
In addition, do not change the filename. Updating cannot be performed correctly if the filename is
1717
changed.
1717
1 Insert the USB memory device that contains the system program into the USB connector located on
the rear of the instrument.
1717
2 Turn ON power to the instrument.
3 Display the [Maintenance] screen.
1717
4 Press the 5 [System program update] key on the [Maintenance] screen.
1717
5 The message "The system Program will be updated. Are you sure ?" is displayed. Use the
and keys to select [Yes] and then press the key.
1717
17
6 The message "The update is complete. Press any key to restart the UV-1280." is displayed. Press
any key to continue. A few seconds after pressing a key, the initialization screen (Fig. 2.5) is
displayed and the instrument will be re-initialized.
17
7 The system program version is displayed at the lower
right of the initialization screen (Fig. 2.5). Check that
17 the system program has been updated to the desired
version.
17
17
17
System program version
Fig. 17.11
8 When re-initialization is complete, the mode menu
screen (Fig. 4.1) is displayed.
17-12 UV-1280
18
18 Instrument Validation
18
Chapter 18 Instrument 18
Validation 18
18
CONTENTS
18
18.1 Parameter Configuration Screen for Instrument Validation ............................................................. 18-2
18.2 Overview of Validation Items ........................................................................................................... 18-3 18
18.3 Parameter Configuration Screen ..................................................................................................... 18-6
18.4 Executing Validation ...................................................................................................................... 18-15
18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details ................................................................................................. 18-21 18
18.6 Auto Validation Item Details .......................................................................................................... 18-38
18
18
18
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-1
Parameter Configuration Screen for
18.1 18.1
Instrument Validation
When you press the [Maintenance] key in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), the
1818
[Maintenance] screen (Fig. 18.1) will be displayed (^ Chapter 17).
1818
1818
1818
1818
Fig. 18.1 [Maintenance] screen
When you select [1. Validation] (press the key) in the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 18.1), the
Parameter Configuration screen for Instrument Validation (Fig. 18.2) will be displayed.
1818
1818
1818
18
18
18
Fig. 18.2 Parameter Configuration screen for Instrument Validation

18
In this screen, complete the validation setting, select validation items, and execute the validations.
Then you can check instrument function (i.e., the validation process of measurement, evaluation, and
18
printout/save in a text file/display of the results).
For details on the validation functions in the Parameter Configuration screen, see "18.3 Parameter
Configuration Screen".
18
18-2 UV-1280
18.2 Overview of Validation Items
18.2
This section describes the items that UV-1280 allows you to validate with its validation functions.
18
18.2.1 Semi-Auto Items

The semi-auto items are validation items that require validation products such as optical filters.
Therefore, when performing validation using the standard sample compartment, the operator must
perform the key operation and insert/remove the validation products as instructed by the messages
displayed at screen bottom. However, when using an optional multiple-cell such as a multi-cell holder
or CPS series, the validation process can be performed automatically for each validation. For details, 18
refer to "18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details".
18
Table 18.1 List of Semi-Auto Validation Items
Items Description
18
Photometric Accuracy The optical filter for transmittance calibration*1 is measured
(^ 18.5.1) (absorbance or transmittance), and then the deviation of the
measured values from the standard values for calibration 18
(standard values) indicated on the filter is used for the
evaluation.
For this validation, up to 4 types of filters can be simultaneously
used.
To produce a more accurate validation, it is recommended to
perform the validation at or near the reagent (filter) temperature 18
specified in the certificate of the calibration filter.
Moreover, when defining the criteria, add the calibration filter
accuracy described in the certificate. 18
Photometric Repeatability The optical filter for transmittance calibration*1 is used to
(^ 18.5.2) measure the photometric value (absorbance or transmittance) at 18
an arbitrarily specified wavelength three times. The mean value
is obtained, and then the deviation of the measured values from
that mean value is used to evaluate the results. 18
For this validation, up to 4 types of filters can be simultaneously
used.
18
Stray Light Stray light is represented by the ratio of the sum of light intensity
(^ 18.5.3) at wavelengths other than the specified one to the intensity of
light coming from the monochromator at the specified
18
wavelength. It is possible to evaluate the stray light value at the
following wavelengths.
• 220 nm - A solution of sodium iodine (10 g/l) is used.
18
• 340 nm - A solution of sodium nitrite (50 g/l) is used.
The UV-1280 System User's Guide, "23.2.7 Calibration Curve
Curvature" explains absorbance errors due to stray light. Refer to
18
the section when defining the criteria.
*1 The National Institute of Standard and Technology (NIST), the Japan Quality Assurance
Organization (JQA) and other organizations evaluate and supply transmittance (absorbance) filters
used to calibrate spectrophotometers. Various types of the filter are available depending on the
wavelength and the type of vertical axis ranges to be calibrated. 18
UV-1280 18-3
The following table shows a list of validation product names used for the semi-auto validation.
1818
Validation
No. Product name Source or Shimadzu P/N
item
Photometric 1 Optical filter for Procure from the NIST or the

Accuracy / transmittance calibration Japan Quality Assurance
Photometric Organization (JQA).
Repeatability
1818
Wavelength 2 Filter for wavelength Procure from the NIST or the
Accuracy calibration Japan Quality Assurance
Organization (JQA).
1818
Stray Light 3 Sodium iodine solution Procure from a reagent dealer.
(10 g/l)
1818
4 Sodium nitrite solution Procure from a reagent dealer.
(50 g/l)
1818 5 10 mm cubic cell made of P/N 200-34442
quartz
6 Shutter block P/N 202-30338
1818 NOTE
Since the cells 5 are used for 3 and 4, as many are required as the number of reagents to be
measured.
1818
1818
18
18
18
18
18
18
18-4 UV-1280
18.2.2 Auto Items 18

The auto items are validation items that do not require validation products, which can be measured
and evaluated, and their results printed out automatically.
Table 18.2 shows a list of auto validation items.
Table 18.2 List of Auto Validation Items
Items Description
Noise Level The time changes around the absorbance of 0 Abs at the 18
(^ 18.6.1) specified wavelength are measured for 1 minute, and the
deflection of the absorbance at that time is defined as noise level
(P-P). The RMS value* is obtained from the measurement for 1
18
minute, and then both of these values are evaluated.
Baseline Stability The time changes around absorbance of 0 Abs are measured 18
(^ 18.6.3) and then the measured change per hour is defined as baseline
stability. The value for baseline stability is evaluated.
This validation result is greatly influenced by the environment 18
temperature fluctuation.
It is recommended to perform the test when the power has been
turned ON for more than 1 hour (i.e., when the instrument
temperature is stable) in a place where the fluctuation of
environment temperature falls within 2 °C/H.
18
Baseline Flatness The baseline is corrected without a sample. Immediately after the
(^ 18.6.2) correction, the wavelengths are scanned. The curvature of the
spectrum obtained at that time is defined as baseline flatness, 18
and this value is evaluated.
It is recommended to perform the test when the power has been
turned ON for more than 1 hour (i.e., when the instrument 18
temperature is stable).
Wavelength Accuracy D2 Emission line radiated from the deuterium (D2) lamp used as the
(Emission lines) light source for the UV-1280 is measured, and then the deviation
18
(^ 18.6.4) from the emission line wavelength is used to evaluate the
validation result.
18
Wavelength Repeatability D2 Emission line radiated from the deuterium (D2) lamp used as the
(^ 18.6.5) light source for the UV-1280 is measured three times. The mean
value is obtained, and then the deviation of the measured values 18
from that mean value is used to evaluate the results.
* The RMS value is obtained using the following equation: 18
Ai : Absorbance
 (Ai - Am)2 Am : Mean value of absorbance 18
RMS value =
N N : Number of data
18
UV-1280 18-5
18.3 Parameter Configuration Screen
18.3
When [1. Validation] is selected in the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 18.1), the Parameter Configuration
1818
screen for instrument validation (Fig. 18.3) will appear.
In this screen, you can perform general settings for the validation (^ "18.3.3 Validation Options"),
select validation items (^ "18.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing the Parameters"), and
start the validation (^ "18.4 Executing Validation").
The parameters set in this screen are saved to the UV-1280 when the validation is executed.
This means that the parameters of the previous validation are always stored in the instrument.
1818
NOTE
If you return to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1) after changing parameters without executing the
1818
validation, the changed parameters will not be saved to the UV-1280, and the parameters of the
previous validation remain unchanged.
1818
1818
1 2
Highlighted item
1818 Indicates the item has been
selected to be validated.
1818
Sample module
Indicates the sample
module that has been 7
1818 selected in "Validation
Options".
18 3 4 5 6
Fig. 18.3 Parameter Configuration screen for instrument validation

18
18
18
18
18
18-6 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
18
Operation
1 [Semi-Auto Switches to the Semi-Auto Items Selection screen.

items] ^ "18.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing
the Parameters"
2 [Auto items] Switches to the Auto Items Selection screen.

^ "18.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing
the Parameters"
18
3 [Printout] Prints the list of the validation results at the last time.
^ "18.3.2 Printing/Saving (Text Format)/Displaying
Results" 18
4 [WriteTXT] Saves the latest validation results in a text format.
^ "18.3.2 Printing/Saving (Text Format)/Displaying
Results"
18
5 [Result] Displays the latest validation results on the screen.

^ "18.3.2 Printing/Saving (Text Format)/Displaying 18
Results"
6 [Settings] Performs the following settings:

• Auto print: ON/OFF
• Using Multicell (6-cell multi-cell holder, CPS
series): Yes/ No 18
• Print init. Status: ON/OFF
^ "18.3.3 Validation Options"
7 – Starts the validation for the selected items (of which 18

names are highlighted).
18
18.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing the Parameters
Press or key on the Main screen of the instrument validation (Fig. 18.3). The 18
Validation Options screen for the semi-automatic or full-automatic validation will appear.
18
18
18
18
Fig. 18.4 Validation Options screen
18
UV-1280 18-7
An example of selecting validation items and setting validation parameters is given below.
1818
The following example describes the steps for selecting the validation items of "Photometric Accuracy"
and "Wavelength Accuracy D2".
1 Press the [Semi-Auto items] key on the

Parameter Configuration screen for instrument
validation.
1818
1818
1818
1818
2 Press the [1. Photometric accuracy] key on
the [Settings of Semi-Auto items] screen.
1818
1818
1818
18
3 Using numeric keys, enter the item number of the
filter to be validated on the filter selection screen for
photometric accuracy.
18
Since the validation using "Standard filter 2" is
performed in this example, press the key.
18
NOTE
18 If the serial numbers have been input in the
Parameter Setting screen for standard filters, the
numbers are displayed in the Filter Selection
18 screen.
^ "18.5.1 Photometric Accuracy"
18
18-8 UV-1280
4 Press the key to change [1. Inspection] from

[No] to [Yes] in the Parameter Setting screen for
18
"Photometeric accuracy"/ "Standard filter 2".
Set the other parameters at your option. (For details

of the setting methods, see "18.5.1 Photometric
Accuracy".)
18
Press the key after completing the setting.
18
5 Verify that "Standard filter 2" is highlighted in the
Filter Selection screen, and press the key.
18
NOTE
The items to be validated are highlighted.
18
18
6 Verify that [1. Photometric accuracy] is highlighted in

the [Settings of Semi-Auto items] screen, and press
18
the key.
18
NOTE
The semi-auto items to be validated are 18
highlighted.
18
18
7 Press the [2. Auto items] key on the
Parameter Configuration screen for instrument
validation. 18
NOTE 18
The items to be validated are highlighted.
18
UV-1280 18-9
1818 8 Press [4. Wavelength accuracy D2] key on

the [Setting of Auto items] screen.
1818
1818
9 Press the key to change [1. inspection] from
[No] to [Yes] in the Parameter Setting screen for "WL
1818
accuracy D2".
1818 Specify arbitrary values for measurement wavelength

and tolerance. For details on the setting procedure,
refer to "18.6.4 Wavelength Accuracy D2".
Press the key after completing the setting.

1818
1818 10 Verify that [4. Wavelength Accuracy D2] is

highlighted in the [Setting of Auto-items] screen, and
press the key.
1818
NOTE
18 The auto items to be validated are highlighted.
18
18
11 Press the key to go back to the Parameter
Configuration screen.
18
NOTE
18 The items to be validated are highlighted.
18
18-10 UV-1280
18.3.2 Printing/Saving (Text Format)/Displaying Results 18

 Printing Results
When you press key in the Parameter Configuration screen for Instrument Validation (Fig.
18.3), all the recorded validation results are printed out. (Note that the results for items that have not
been validated are not printed out.)
While the "Auto print" command (^ "18.3.3 Validation Options") prints screen hard copies such as
spectral waveforms and time course curves, the "PrintOut" command prints only the validation results. 18
For details on the contents of each validation item, refer to the printout example of each validation item
described in "18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details" and "18.6 Auto Validation Item Details". 18
18
Header Part
The instrument
information is printed. 18
The date and time of the

end of the photometric
accuracy validation is
printed.
18
18
The date and time of the
end of the wavelength
accuracy D2 validation 18
is printed.
18
Fig. 18.5 Example of Printing Results

18
When performing the instrument validation, the UV-1280 stores only the latest result for each
validation item. Therefore, upon the completion of the validation of a new item, the previously obtained
18
result is overwritten by the new one. The date of inspection is stored and printed for each validation
item.
18
NOTE
If a commercially available printer is selected as used, the left margin can be set in a range
18
between 0 and 9. In this case, the printout format is the same as that of a screen hardcopy printer.
To select a printer and then set it up, select [8. Utilities]/[5. Printer] in the Mode screen. (See "16.1.4
Printer Setting".)
18
UV-1280 18-11
1818  Saving in a Text Format

When the F2 key is pressed on the Parameter Configuration screen for instrument validation (Fig.
18.3) while connecting a USB memory device, all stored validation results are saved in the USB
memory device in a text format (only items for which validation is performed).
The file is saved in the following folder.

\UV1280\ValResult
1818 The file name is VResult.TXT.
1818 NOTE
If a file with the same name exists, it will be overwritten.
1818
The contents of the text file to be saved are the same as those output by "Printout". Spectral
1818 waveforms and time course curves are not saved, and only the results are saved.
described in "18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details" and "18.6 Auto Validation Item Details".
1818 NOTE
The results are saved in English regardless of the display language of the instrument.
1818
 Displaying Results
When the F3 key is pressed on the Parameter Configuration screen for instrument validation (Fig.
1818
18.3), all stored validation results are displayed on the screen (only items for which validation is
performed).
18
The displayed contents are the same as those output by "Printout". Spectral waveforms and time
18 course curves are not displayed, and only the results are displayed.
18 described in "18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details" and "18.6 Auto Validation Item Details".
18 NOTE
The header part and initialization result record are not displayed.
18
NOTE
The results are saved in English regardless of the display language of the instrument.
18
18-12 UV-1280
18.3.3 Validation Options 18

When the key is pressed on the Parameter Configuration screen for instrument validation
(Fig. 18.3), the Validation Settings screen appears.
1
2
3 18
18
18
18
Fig. 18.6 Validation Settings screen
18
Key
Operation
1 [Auto print] Select whether or not to perform Auto print after each 18
validation. Each pressing of the key toggles between
[ON] and [OFF].
If Auto print is set to [ON], the result is printed whenever 18
each validation option is completed. If a spectrum or time
course is measured during the validation, the
corresponding graph is also printed out (as a hard copy of 18
the screen). For the print format, see the sections of each
validation option that describe changing the parameter.
18
NOTE
1)The printout format does not depend upon the printer.
Therefore, the result is printed out in the same format on 18
both a screen hardcopy printer and a commercially
available printer.
2) When a screen hardcopy printer is used with Auto 18
print set to [ON], the validation result cannot be
printed out if the printer is set to "OFF LINE".
18
18
UV-1280 18-13
1818 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
2 [Using Select whether or not to use the optional multicell (6-cell)

Multicell] or CPS series for validation. Using the
keys, move the cursor to the desired sample module, and
Cursor
1818
1818
Fig. 18.7 Sample Module Selection screen
1818 When executing semi-automatic validation items using a

multi-cell holder (6-cell) or CPS series, the validation can
be implemented by automatically switching filters and
1818 reagents to be used. For the instruction of how to use
these options and the operation details, refer to the
instruction on each validation item (18.5).
3 [Print init. Allows you to select whether or not to print the results of
status] initialization and various self-diagnosis checks performed
1818 when the power is turned ON. Each pressing of the key
toggles between ON and OFF.
If [Print init. status] is set to [ON], the selected
1818 initialization items and the results are recorded and
printed out.
The date and time of the end of
1818 the initialization
18
18
18
(Printout format of the initialization result record)

18
– – Returns to the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig.
18.3).
18
18
18-14 UV-1280
18.4 Executing Validation
18.4
When you press the key in the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 18.3), the validation for
18
highlighted items is started.
First, the UV-1280 checks the expiration date of the validation products used.
If any one of the validation products registered to the executed semi-auto item has expired, the entire
validation process is terminated and you will return to the Parameter Configuration screen
(^ "18.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products").
The validations are executed from semi-auto items to auto-items.

18
Since the semi-automatic validation is carried out interactively, the operator must type in data and add/
remove validation products in accordance with the messages displayed on the screen.
18
Validation item/Current status 18

Indicates the validation item in progress
and the current status.
This example ("1/2") shows that total
four validation items have been 18
selected and the first item is being
executed.
Operation message
18
18
Fig. 18.8 Validation Execution screen (Photometric accuracy)

18
The validation results will be displayed and saved for each validation item upon completion of the
validation.
18
When the auto print function is enabled (^ "18.3.3 Validation Options"), the results will be
automatically printed. For printout examples, refer to "18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details" and
"18.6 Auto Validation Item Details".
18
The key functions during validation are given in the following: 18
Key Operation Description 18

Terminates the current validation item, and returns to the Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 18.2). (No more validation is executed.)
18
Terminates the current validation item, and proceeds to the next
validation item.
Any keys other than the Allows you to proceed to the next operation when an operation
above message is displayed.
18
UV-1280 18-15
1818
NOTE
Although the current validation (item) is terminated, the results of the validation items completed up
to that point are saved. Therefore, those results can be printed out, saved in a text format, and
displayed (^ "18.3.2 Printing/Saving (Text Format)/Displaying Results").
For examples of screen displays during validation, refer to "18.4.2 Example of Executing Validation".
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
18
18
18
18
18
18
18-16 UV-1280
18.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products 18

For the semi-auto validation items, the performance assurance period for validation products, and
validities of standard values and calibration values can be entered in the Validation Parameter Setting
screen. (^ "18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details")
18
18
Validity date for 18

validation products
18
Fig. 18.9 Validation Parameter Setting screen (Photometric accuracy)
When starting the validation process using the instrument validation function, first the UV-1280 checks 18
the expiration date of the validation products.
If any one of the validation products for the scheduled validation items is expired, the entire validation 18
is aborted.
(The following message appears, and by pressing any key you will return to the Parameter
18
Configuration screen for the instrument validation (Fig. 18.3)).
18
18
In such a case, verify the validation product expiration date in the Parameter Configuration screen for 18
the item in question, and change any discrepancies to the correct product information.
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-17
1818 18.4.2 Example of Executing Validation

An example of executing the validation is given below.
The following example describes the steps for executing the validation items of "Photometric
accuracy" and "Wavelength accuracy D2".
Note that the validation parameters in the example below are those specified in "18.3.1 Selecting a
Validation Item and Changing the Parameters".
1818
1 Verify that the title of the validation item to be
executed is highlighted in the Parameter Cofiguration
screen for instrument validation.
1818 (This example shows that "Photometric accuracy"
and "Wavelength accuracy D2" will be executed.)
1818
1818
2 Press the key to start the validation.
(The validation of the photometric accuracy is started.)
1818
3 Verify that nothing is placed in the sample
compartment as instructed in the message, and
1818 press the key to start baseline correction.
1818 (The baseline correction is performed.)
18 4 When the baseline correction is completed, the next

message appears. Insert the standard filter to follow
the message, and press the key.
18
18
5 The photometric values at the specified wavelengths
are measured sequentially, and the evaluation
results are displayed simultaneously based on the
deviation from the standard value.
18
18 NOTE
When "Auto print" is set to "ON" (^ "18.3.3
Validation Options"), the validation results are
automatically printed (^ Fig. 18.9).
18
18-18 UV-1280
6 When the measurements and evaluations are

completed for all wavelengths, the message in the
18
figure at right appears.

Remove the standard filter, verify that nothing is
placed in the sample compartment as instructed in the
message, and close the sample comartment cover.
Press the key to proceed to the next 18

validation item.
(The validation of the wavelength accuracy D2 is started.) 18
7 The Validation screen for [Wavelength accuracy D2]

is displayed, and the waveform is plotted in real time.
18
18
When both 486.0 nm and 656.1 nm are selected for
measurement wavelengths, first the emission line of
656.1 nm is measured, and the result is displayed at
the bottom of the screen. Then, the Measurement
screen for the emission line 486.0 nm immediately
18
appears, and the measurement is started.
18
NOTE
When "Auto print" is set to "ON" (^ "18.3.3 18
Validation Options"), the validation results are
automatically printed (^ Fig. 18.9).
18
8 When all scheduled validation items are completed,

you will return to the Parameter Configuration screen 18
for the instrument validation.
18
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-19
1818
Header Part
Instrument information is
printed.
Printed when completing the
photometric accuracy
validation.
Validation end time is printed

for each validation item.
1818
1818
1818
1818
validation of wavelength
accuracy D2 at 656.1 nm
emission line.
1818
1818
1818
18
18
validation of wavelength
accuracy D2.
18
18 The date and time of the

end of the wavelength
accuracy D2 validation is
printed.
18
Fig. 18.10 Example of Auto print
18
18-20 UV-1280
18.5 18.5Semi-Auto Validation Item Details
18.5.1 Photometric Accuracy 18

In the validation of the photometric accuracy, the optical filter for transmittance calibration is measured
(absorbance or transmittance), and then the deviation of the measured values from the standard
values for calibration (standard values) indicated on the filter is used for the evaluation.
For the validation, the calibrated four types of filters are available.
If you enter the item number of each filter on the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig. 18.11) with
numeric keys, the screen appears for setting the validation parameters for the filter (Fig. 18.12). Press
the key to return to the Validation Options screen for the semi-auto items (Fig. 18.4). 18
18
Serial number
Displays the serial number
Highlighted row
entered in the Parameter
Indicates the filter to be
Setting screen (Fig. 18.12). 18
validated.
18
18
Fig. 18.11 Standard Filter Selection screen 18
18
1
2 18
3
Measurement λ
Standard values
18
4
5 18
6
18
18
7
Fig. 18.12 Parameter Setting screen for photometric accuracy (standard filter 2)
18
UV-1280 18-21
18.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details
1818 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the photometric

accuracy is validated or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and
[No].
2 [Meas. Mode] Select the unit of photometric values. Each pressing of

the key toggles between [Abs (Absorbance)] and [%T
1818 (Transmittance)]. By this operation, the filter standard
value and tolerance are also switched to those
specified for the selected photometric mode.
1818
NOTE
The standard value and tolerance for the filter in the
1818 absorbance/ transmittance mode are separately
stored. Therefore, if the measurement mode is
changed to Transmittance when the standard value
1818 and tolerance were entered in the Absorbance mode,
the values entered in the Absorbance mode will not be
converted into the ones in the Transmittance mode.
3 [Standard values] Enter the measurement wavelengths and standard

values for the filter.
1818
Measurement λ Specify the wavelengths at which
to measure the photometric
1818 values. The wavelength entered
here is the wavelength tolerance
for the optical filters used for the
1818 validation. For the photometric
accuracy validation, five different
wavelengths can be specified.
18
Standard value Enter the standard values
corresponding to the
18 measurement specified in the item
above. The unit of standard values
changes according to the unit
18 specified in [2. Meas. Mode] on
the screen shown in Fig. 18.12.
The input range of standard
18 values is between 0.000 and
4.000 Abs and between 0.00 and
99.99 %.
18
18
18-22 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
18
Operation
4 [Serial number] Enter the serial number of the filter. The number
entered here will be saved as a validation parameter
for the photometric accuracy and printed out together
with the validation result.
18
18
18
18
Fig. 18.13 [Setting serial No.] screen
Press the keys to move the cursor

to the desired character in the list. Then, press the
key to enter the selected character in the
input filename column. After you finish entering the
18
serial number by repeating the same procedure, press
the [End] key to return to the Parameter
Setting screen (Fig. 18.12).
18
NOTE
If you press the [End] key without entering
any serial number, no serial number will be set. 18
5 [Good THRU] Enter the validity for the standard value of the filter.
The date entered here is saved as a validation 18
parameter and used to automatically check to see
whether the validation expires or not when the
validation is performed. If a filter with expired validity is 18
used, the validation cannot be performed.
(^ "18.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation
Products") 18
NOTE
The format for displaying the date is the same as
specified in [8. Utilities]/[5. Clock set] on the Mode 18
screen.
18
18
UV-1280 18-23
1818 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
6 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the

validation result.
The unit of the tolerance changes according to the unit
specified in [2. Meas. Mode] in Fig. 18.12. The
tolerance input range is between 1 and 99 mAbs for
absorbance (Abs) and between 0 and 99 % for
transmittance.
1818 The tolerance for transmittance is set as a relative
value. Therefore, if, for example, the tolerance is set to
± 2 % of the standard value 23.92 (%T), the allowance
1818 range will be "23.92 ± 0.48 (23.44 - 24.40) %T"
.
obtained by [23.92 × (2/100) =. 0.48].
1818 NOTE
To define tolerances, the calibration accuracy of the
standard filter must be considered.
1818 For example, if the filter accuracy (relative accuracy to
transmittance) is ± 1 %, the value converted to
absorbance will be approx. "± 0.0043 Abs". Therefore,
when checking whether the instrument photometric
accuracy falls within ± 0.004 Abs by using a 10 %
transmittance filter, define the tolerance as "within
±0.008 Abs (the fourth decimal place is rounded off)".
1818
7 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for photometric accuracy to the
recommended value (default value).
1818 The recommended value is within ±3 mAbs near 0.5
Abs or within ±5 mAbs near 1.0 Abs.
NOTE
1818
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic
inspection performed by Shimadzu.
18 – – Returns to the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig.
18.11).
18  Filter arrangement when using a multi-cell holder (6-cell) or CPS series

When using an optional multi-cell holder (6-cell) or CPS series, set the standard filters as shown in
18 Fig. 18.14.
Cell 6: Standard Filter 4

18
18 Cell 4: Standard Filter 2
Cell 2: (None)
Cell 1: (None)
18
(Sample module front)
Fig. 18.14 Set positions for standard filter
18-24 UV-1280
 Validation flow 18
After the validation is started, carry out the validation process as instructed by messages displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The validation flow of the photometric accuracy using standard filter 2 is shown below. If multiple
standard filters are to be used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each filter.
[UV-1280 Operation] [Validation Procedure] [Multi-cell holder in use]

18
(Start the validation.) (Moves to cell 1.)
• Remove the standard filter, 18

The message appears. • Remove the standard filter, etc. used for the previous
etc. used for the previous validation.
validation. • Set the standard filter. (Fig. 18
• Verify that nothing has been 18.14)
set on the cell holder.
Baseline Correction → Press the key. 18
Measure the blank value at each

measurement wavelength.
18
The message appears.*1 Insert the standard filter 2 into (Moves to cell 4.)
the cell holder.
→ Press the key. 18
Measure the "Standard filter 2" and 18

Evaluate. (Fig. 18.16)
18
Auto Print*2 (Fig. 18.17)
18
Proceed to the next validation. (Moves to cell 1.)
18
1
* Not displayed when using the Multi-cell.
*2 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "18.3.3 Validation
Options")
18
Fig. 18.15 Validation flow of photometric accuracy

18
18
UV-1280 18-25
1818
Indicates the deviation for

(Measured value - Standard
value).
1818
1818
1818
Fig. 18.16 Validation Results screen for photometric accuracy (in progress)
1818 The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below:
1818
Evaluation result
Validation end time
1818
1818
18
Fig. 18.17 Auto print format for photometric accuracy
18 The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations at all
validation wavelengths for the filter are within tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is
18 printed out.
18
18
18
18-26 UV-1280
18.5.2 Photometric Repeatability 18

In the validation of photometric repeatability, the optical filter for transmittance calibration is used to
measure the photometric value (absorbance or transmittance) at an arbitrarily specified wavelength
three times. The mean value is obtained, and then the deviation of the measured values from that
mean value is used to evaluate the results.
For this validation, the calibrated four types of filters are available.
If you enter the item number of each filter on the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig. 18.18) with
numeric keys, the screen appears for setting the validation parameters for the filter (Fig. 18.19). Press 18
the key to return to the Validation Options screen for the semi-auto items (Fig. 18.4).
18
Serial number
Highlighted row
Displays the serial number 18
entered in the Parameter
Indicates the filter to
Setting screen (Fig. 18.19).
be validated.
18
18
18
Fig. 18.18 Standard Filter Selection screen
18
1 18
2
3
18
4
5
6 18
18
18
7
Fig. 18.19 Parameter Setting screen for photometric repeatability (standard filter 2)
18
UV-1280 18-27
1818
Key
Operation
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the validation is

performed or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No].
2 [Meas. Select the unit of photometric values. Each pressing of

1818 Mode] the key toggles between [Abs (Absorbance)] and [%T
(Transmittance)]. By this operation, the tolerance is also
switched to that specified for the selected photometric
1818 mode.
NOTE
The tolerance in the absorbance/transmittance mode is
1818 independently stored.
Therefore, for example, if the measurement mode is
changed to Transmittance when the standard value and
1818 tolerance were entered in the Absorbance mode, the
values entered in the Absorbance mode will not be
converted into the ones in the Transmittance mode.
3 [Wavelength] Enter a wavelength at which to measure the photometric

value.
1818
4 [Serial Enter the serial number of the filter. The number entered
number] here will be saved as a validation parameter for the
1818 photometric repeatability and printed out together with the
validation result.
1818
18
18
18
18
Press the keys to move the cursor to
the desired character in the list. Then, press the
key to enter the selected character in the input filename
18
column. After you finish entering the serial number by
repeating the same procedure, press the [End]
key to return to the Parameter Setting screen (Fig.
18.19).
NOTE
18 If you press the [End] key without entering any
serial number, no serial number will be set.
18-28 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
18
Operation
5 [Good Enter the validity for the standard value of the filter. The
THRU] date entered here is saved as a validation parameter and
used to automatically check to see whether the validation
expires or not when the validation is performed. If a filter
with expired validity is used, the validation cannot be
performed.
(^ "18.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products") 18
NOTE
The format for displaying the date is the same as
specified in [8. Utilities]/[6. Clock set] on the Mode screen 18
(Fig. 4.1).
6 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the 18

validation result.
The unit of the tolerance changes according to the unit
specified in [2. Meas. Mode] in Fig. 18.19. The tolerance 18
input range is between 1 and 99 mAbs for absorbance
(Abs) and between 0 and 99 % for transmittance.
7 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for photometric accuracy to the

The recommended value is "within ± 4 mAbs" for
18
absorbance (Abs) or "within ± 1 %T" for tolerance (%T).
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic 18
inspection (repeatability near 1 Abs) performed by
Shimadzu.
18
– – Returns to the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig.
18.18).
18
18
18
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-29
1818  Filter arrangement when using a multi-cell holder (6-cell) or CPS series
When using the optional cell holder such as multicell (6-cell) or CPS series, set the standard filters as
shown in Fig. 18.21.

1818
1818 Cell 2: (None)
Cell 1: (None)
1818
(Sample module front)
1818 Fig. 18.21 Set positions for standard filters
 Validation flow
1818 The validation flow of the photometric repeatability using standard filter 2 is shown below. If multiple
standard filters are to be used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each filter.
1818
NOTE
When using the Multi-cell, standard filters cannot be removed nor inserted.
1818
18
18
18
18
18
18
18-30 UV-1280
[UV-1280 Operation] [Validation Procedure] [Multi-cell holder in use] 18

• Remove the standard filter,

The message appears. • Remove the standard filter, etc. used for the previous
etc. used for the previous validation.
validation. • Set the standard filter. (Fig.
• Verify that nothing has been 18.21)
Execute Auto Zero at the → Press the key. 18
18
The message appears*1. Insert the standard filter 2 into (Moves to cell 4.)
the cell holder.
→ Press the key. 18
Measure the standard filter 2 for the 18

first time.
The message appears*1. Remove the standard filter 2

from the cell holder, and insert
18
it again (removal and insert).
→ Press the key.
Measure the standard filter 2 for the

18
second time.
18
The message appears*1. Remove the standard filter 2
and insert it again. 18
→ Press the key.
18
Measure the standard filter 2 for the
third time.
18
Print out the result (Fig. 18.23).

18

18
Proceed to the next validation. (Returns to cell 1.)
*1 Not displayed when using the Multi-cell.

*2 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "18.3.3 Validation 18
Options")
Fig. 18.22 Validation flow of photometric repeatability
UV-1280 18-31
1818
Indicates the mean

1818 value of three measured
values.
Indicates the deviation
for (Mean value -
1818 Standard value).
1818
Fig. 18.23 Validation Execution screen for photometric repeatability

1818
The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below:
1818
Evaluation result
Validation end time

1818
1818 Measured value Deviation
18 Fig. 18.24 Auto print format for photometric repeatability
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations between all
18 measured values at the validation wavelength and the mean value are within the tolerance, [Pass] is
printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
18
18
18
18
18-32 UV-1280
18.5.3 Stray Light 18

Stray light is represented by the ratio of the sum of light intensity at wavelengths other than the
specified one to the intensity of light coming from the spectroscope at the specified wavelength.
In this validation, the transmittance measured at a specific wavelength using an arbitrary test filter is
defined as stray light, and this value is evaluated. Up to four validation wavelengths can be used for
validation.
If you enter the item number of each filter on the Test Filter Selection screen (Fig. 18.25) with numeric
keys, the screen appears for setting the validation parameters for the filter (Fig. 18.26). Press the 18
key to return to the Validation Options screen for the semi-auto items (Fig. 18.4).
18
Highlighted row Serial number

Indicates the filter to be Displays the serial number 18
validated. entered in the Parameter
Input screen (Fig. 18.26).
18
18
18
Fig. 18.25 Test Filter Selection Screen
18
1 18
2
3
18
4
18
18
18
Fig. 18.26 Parameter Setting screen for stray light (test filter 2)
18
UV-1280 18-33
1818
Key
Operation
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether stray light is validated or

not. Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No].
2 [Wavelength] Enter a wavelength at which to measure the stray light.
3 [Serial Enter the serial number of the filter. The number entered here will
1818 number] be saved as a validation parameter for the stray light and printed
out together with the validation result.
1818
1818
1818

1818
Press the keys to move the cursor to the
desired character in the list. Then, press the key to
1818 enter the selected character in the input filename column. After
you finish entering the serial number by repeating the same
procedure, press the [End] key to return to the
1818 Parameter Setting screen (Fig. 18.26).
NOTE
18 If you press the [End] key without entering any serial
number, no serial number will be set.
4 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the validation result.
18 The tolerance input range is between 0.00 and 9.99 %.
18
18
18
18
18-34 UV-1280
No.
Key
Display Description
18
Operation
5 [Recomnd] This allows you to set the recommended values (default values)
when placing the following solution filters as test filters 1 to 4.
The recommended values for each validation are shown below.
Test Test Test Test
Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 4
Corresponding filter Sodium Sodium – –
18
iodine nitrite
solution solution
(10 g/l) (50 g/l) 18
Measurement λ 220 nm 340 nm – –
Tolerance 0.05 % 0.05 % 0% 0%
18
(recommended value) Max. Max.
18
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic inspection
performed by Shimadzu.
– – Returns to the Test Filter Selection screen (Fig. 18.25).
18
 Filter arrangement when using a multi-cell holder (6-cell) or CPS series
When using the optional cell holder such as multicell (6-cell) or CPS series, set the test filters as 18
shown in Fig. 18.28.
18
Cell 6: Test Filter 4
Cell 5: Test Filter 3 18

Cell 4: Test Filter 2
Cell 3: Test Filter 1 18

Cell 2: Shutter block
18
Cell 1: (None)
(Sample module front) 18
Fig. 18.28 Set positions for test filters

18
18
UV-1280 18-35
1818  Validation flow

The validation flow of the stray light using test filter 2 is shown below. If multiple test filters are to be
used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each filter.
[UV-1280 Operation] [Validation Procedure] [Multi-cell holder in use]

1818
1818
The message appears. • Remove the standard filter, • Remove the standard filter,
etc. used for the previous etc. used for the previous
1818 validation. validation.
• Verify that nothing has been • Set the test filter. (Fig. 18.28)
1818 → Press the key.
Execute Auto Zero at the
1818 The message appears*1. Insert the shutter block into the (Moves to cell 2.)
cell holder.
→ Press the key.
1818
Perform the measurement with the
light flux blocked
1818 (Measurement of 0 %)
The message appears*1. Remove the shutter block from (Moves to cell 4.)
18 the cell holder, and insert the
test filter 2 into the cell holder.
→ Press the key.
18
Measure the test filter 2.
18
Print out the result (Fig. 18.30).

18

18
Proceed to the next validation. Returns to cell 1.
*1 Not displayed when using the Multi-cell.

18
Options")
Fig. 18.29 Validation flow of stray light
18-36 UV-1280
18
Indicates the stray light for

("Sample" - "0 %"). 18
18
18
Fig. 18.30 Validation Results screen for stray light
The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below: 18
18
Evaluation result
Validation end time

18
18
Fig. 18.31 Auto print format for stray light

18
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the stray light values of all
tested "test filters" are within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
18
NOTE 18
The header is added to the above format when the result is actually printed out. (For further details
of the header, see 18.3.2.)
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-37
18.6 Auto Validation Item Details
18.6
1818 18.6.1 Noise Level

In the validation of noise level, the time changes around the absorbance of 0 Abs at the wavelength
specified for each model are measured for 1 minute, and the deflection of the absorbance at that time
is defined as noise level (P-P). The RMS value is obtained from the measurement for 1 minute and
then both of these values are evaluated.
For this validation, the noise level of up to two wavelengths can be validated.
If you enter the item number of validation wavelength on the Validation Wavelength Selection screen
1818 (Fig. 18.32) with numeric keys, the screen appears for setting the parameters for the validation at the
wavelength (Fig. 18.33). Press the key to return to the Validation Options screen for the
auto-validation items (Fig. 18.4).
1818
1818
Highlighted row Validation wavelength
Indicates the filter to be Displays the wavelength
validated. entered in the Parameter
1818 Setting screen (Fig. 18.33).
1818
1818
1818 Fig. 18.32 Validation Wavelength Selection screen for noise level
18
1
18 2
3
18
18
18
Fig. 18.33 Parameter Input screen for noise level (noise level 1)
18
18-38 UV-1280
18
Key
Operation
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the validation is performed

or not.
2 [Wavelength] Enter a wavelength at which to measure noise level.
3 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the measurement 18

result of noise level in a range between 0.01 and 9.99 (mAbs). In
the validation of noise level, both of the P-P (maximum noise
width) value and the RMS value are evaluated. Therefore, the 18
tolerances for both values need to be entered.
when measuring at the following wavelengths as noise level 1 to
18
2.
The recommended values for each noise level are shown below.
18
Noise level 1 Noise level 2
Validation 500 nm 250 nm
(P-P) (P-P)
Tolerance 2.00 mAbs 2.00 mAbs
(recommended value) (RMS) (RMS) 18
0.50 mAbs 0.50 mAbs
18
NOTE
performed by Shimadzu. 18
– – Returns to the Validation Wavelength Selection screen (Fig.
18.32).
18
18
18
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-39

The validation is automatically implemented.
The validation flow of the noise level 1 is shown below. If multiple validation wavelengths are to be
used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each wavelength.
[UV-1280 Operation]
1818 (Start the validation.)
Execute Auto Zero at the validation wavelength of noise level 1.

1818
1818 Perform the 1-minute time course measurement at the validation wavelength
of noise level 1.
1818
Display the validation result of noise level 1.
(Fig. 18.35)
Auto print*1 (Fig. 18.36)

1818
1818 Proceed to the next validation.
1818 Options")
Fig. 18.34 Validation flow of noise level

18
18
18
18
18
18 Fig. 18.35 Validation Results screen for noise level
18-40 UV-1280
The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below.
18
18
Screen hard copy
18
18
18
Evaluation result
Validation end time
18
Fig. 18.36 Auto print format for noise level

18
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the maximum noise width
(P-P) at the validation wavelength and the RMS value obtained from the measurement result are
18
within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
18
18
18
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-41
1818 18.6.2 Baseline Flatness

In the validation of baseline flatness, the baseline is corrected without putting a sample in the sample
module. Immediately after the correction, the wavelengths are scanned. The curvature of the
spectrum obtained at that time is defined as baseline flatness, and this value is evaluated.
1
2
1818
3
1818
1818
1818
4
Fig. 18.37 Parameter Input screen for baseline flatness
1818

1818
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the
validation is performed or not.
1818 Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes]
and [No].
2 [Scan range] Enter the wavelength range in which baseline

18
flatness is to be measured.
The input range is between 190 and 1100.
18 3 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the
measurement result of baseline flatness in a
range between 0.1 and 99.9.
18
4 [Recomnd] Resets the validation wavelength and tolerance
for baseline flatness to the recommended
18 values (default values).
The recommended tolerance value is within
± 10.0 mAbs.
18 NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the
periodic inspection performed by Shimadzu.
– – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen

(Fig. 18.4).
18
18-42 UV-1280
 Validation flow 18
The validation of baseline flatness must be performed when the UV-1280 is in a stable state.
Therefore, unless at least one hour has elapsed after the power has been turned ON, you are
prompted to select forcibly performing the validation or holding it until one hour elapses.
18
18
Fig. 18.38 Selection screen for validation execution
The validation flow of the baseline flatness is shown below.

18
[UV-1280 Operation] 18
(Start the validation.)
Correct the baseline at validation wavelength (range).
18
Perform auto-zero correction at 700 nm.
18
Measure the spectrum at validation wavelength (range).
18
Display the validation result of baseline flatness. (Fig. 18.40)

18

18
Proceed to the next validation.

18
Options")
18
Fig. 18.39 Validation flow of baseline flatness

18
18
UV-1280 18-43
1818
1818
1818
1818
Fig. 18.40 Validation Results screen for baseline flatness
1818 The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below.
1818
1818
Screen hard copy
1818
18
18
18 Validation end time

Evaluation result
18
Fig. 18.41 Auto print format for baseline flatness
18 The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the curvature of the
baseline is within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
18
18-44 UV-1280
18.6.3 Baseline Stability 18

In the validation of baseline stability, the time changes around absorbance of 0 Abs are measured and
then the measured change per hour is defined as baseline stability. The value for baseline stability is
evaluated.
In baseline stability validation, only one wavelength can be validated (Fig. 18.42).
If you press one of the numeric keys corresponding to the item numbers, the Parameter Input screen
for the item (Fig. 18.42) is displayed. Press the key to return to the Validation Options screen
for the auto-validation items (Fig. 18.4). 18
18
1
2
3 18
18
18
4 18
Fig. 18.42 Parameter Input screen for baseline stability (baseline stability 1)
18
Key
Operation
18
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the validation is performed
or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No]. 18
2 [Wavelength] Enter the wavelength at which to measure baseline stability.
The input range is between 190 and 1100 (nm).
18
3 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the measurement result of
baseline stability in a range between 0.1 and 9.9 (mAbs/H).
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-45
1818 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
when measuring at the following wavelengths as baseline
stability.
The recommended values for each baseline stability are shown
below.
Baseline Stability
1818
Validation 700 nm
Tolerance (recommended value) Within 2.0 mAbs/H
1818
NOTE
1818 performed by Shimadzu.
– – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen (Fig. 18.4).

1818
 Validation flow
The validation of baseline stability must be performed when the UV-1280 is in a stable state.
Therefore, unless at least one hour has elapsed after the instrument has been in the idle state, you
1818 are prompted to hold it until one hour elapses.
1818
1818
Fig. 18.43 Selection screen for validation execution
18
18
18
18
18
18
18-46 UV-1280
The validation flow of the baseline stability is shown below.

18
[UV-1280 Operation]
Execute Auto Zero at the validation wavelength of baseline stability.
18
Perform the 1-hour time course measurement at the validation wavelength of
baseline stability.
18
Display the validation result of baseline stability (Fig. 18.45).
18

18
Options") 18
Fig. 18.44 Validation flow of baseline stability
18
18
18
18
18
18
Fig. 18.45 Validation Results screen for baseline stability

18
18
UV-1280 18-47
The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below.
1818
1818
Screen hard copy
1818
1818
1818
Evaluation result
Validation end time
1818
Fig. 18.46 Auto print format for baseline stability
1818 The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the curvature of the
baseline is within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
1818
18
18
18
18
18
18
18-48 UV-1280
18.6.4 Wavelength Accuracy D2 18

In the validation of wavelength accuracy, emission line radiated from the deuterium (D2) lamp used as
the light source for the UV-1280 is measured, and then the deviation from the emission line
wavelength is used to evaluate the validation result.
1
2 18
3
18
18
18
Fig. 18.47 Parameter Input screen for wavelength accuracy D2

18
Key
Operation 18
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the photometric
accuracy D2 is validated or not. 18
2 [Wavelength] Emission lines at 486.0 and 656.1 nm are radiated from

the D2 lamp. Select which emission line is used or 18
whether both emission lines are used or not.
To select the validation wavelength, move the cursor to
the desired wavelength with the keys, 18
and confirm with the key.
18
18
Fig. 18.48 [Test wavelength] Selection screen

18
3 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the validation result
of accuracy D2 in a range between 0.1 and 9.9 (nm).
18
UV-1280 18-49
1818 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
4 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for wavelength accuracy D2 to the

The recommended value is within ± 1.0 nm.
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic
inspection performed by Shimadzu.
1818
– – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen (Fig. 18.4).

The validation flow of the wavelength accuracy using D2 lamp (656.1 nm, 486.0 nm) is shown below.
1818
[UV-1280 Operation]
1818
Measure the spectrum in a range between 670 ~ 640 nm.
1818
Display the validation result at the emission line of 656.1 nm.
(Fig. 18.50)
1818
Print out the waveform (screen hard copy) *1 (Fig. 18.51).

1818
Measure the spectrum in a range between 500 ~ 470 nm.

18
Display the validation result at the emission line of 486.0 nm.

18
18 Print out the waveform (screen hard copy) *1 (Fig. 18.51).
18 Print out the result*1 (Fig. 18.51).
18 Proceed to the next validation.
Options")
Fig. 18.49 Validation flow of wavelength accuracy with D2

18
18-50 UV-1280
18
18
18
18
Fig. 18.50 Validation Results screen for wavelength accuracy with D2 (in progress)
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-51
1818
1818
Screen hard copy
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
18
18
Evaluation result
Validation end time
18
18 Fig. 18.51 Auto print format for wavelength accuracy with D2
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations at all the
18
validation wavelengths are within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
18
18-52 UV-1280
18.6.5 Wavelength Repeatability D2 18

In the validation of wavelength repeatability, the mean value is obtained from the detected
wavelengths at which the same emission lines as those radiated from the UV-1280 light source
deuterium (D2) lamp (656.1 nm) have been measured three times, and then the deviation of the
measured values from that mean value is used to evaluate the results.
1 18
2
18
18
18
3
18
Fig. 18.52 Parameter Input screen for wavelength repeatability D2
18
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the 18

validation is performed or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes]
and [No]. 18
2 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the
measurement result of wavelength repeatability 18
D2 in a range between 0.1 and 9.9.
3 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for wavelength

repeatability to the recommended value (default 18
value).
The recommended value is within ± 0.3 nm.
18
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the
periodic inspection performed by Shimadzu. 18
– – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen
(Fig. 18.4).
18
UV-1280 18-53

The validation flow of the wavelength repeatability is shown below.
[UV-1280 Operation]
1818 (1) Measure the spectrum at 660 ~ 650 nm.
1818
(2) Detect the peak wavelength.
1818
Repeat steps (1) through (2) another two times. (Fig. 18.54)
1818
1818
Options")
1818
Fig. 18.53 Validation flow of wavelength repeatability
1818
18
18
18
18
18
Fig. 18.54 Validation Results screen for wavelength repeatability
18
18-54 UV-1280
18
Evaluation result
Validation end time
Measured value
18
18
Fig. 18.55 Auto print format for wavelength repeatability

18
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations at all the
validation wavelengths are within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
18
18.6.6 Initialization Record

Every time the UV-1280 is turned ON, it is initialized and various self-diagnostics are performed.
If the validation is started when the parameter [Print init. status] is set to [ON] in the Validation Settings 18
screen (Fig. 18.6), the results of the initialization and various self-diagnostics that have been
performed when the power is turned ON can be printed out. 18
Validation end time

Evaluation result 18
18
18
18
Fig. 18.56 Auto print format for initialization record
18
18
18
UV-1280 18-55
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
1818
18
18
18
18
18
18
18-56 UV-1280
19
19 PC Control
19
19
Chapter 19 PC Control 19
19
19
19
PC Control Mode is the mode in which the UV-1280 is controlled by an external personal computer (PC).
In the PC Control mode, the UV-1280 can be controlled using control programs created as necessary. 19
CONTENTS
19
19.1 Connecting to a PC ......................................................................................................................... 19-2
19.2 Controlling with Optional Software .................................................................................................. 19-4
19.3 Controlling with External Commands............................................................................................... 19-5 19
19
19
19
UV-1280 19-1
19.1 Connecting to a PC
19.1
To control the UV-1280 from an external computer, a device driver "Virtual COM port driver" must be
19
installed on the computer.
NOTE
To install the "Virtual COM port driver", it is necessary to use the Installation CD (207-21439-91)
optionally available.
19
19
For VisEase (207-26411-91), "Virtual COM port driver" is included in the installation CD.
19
If the driver is installed, the computer recognizes the UV-1280 as a COM port device, even though
they are physically connected between USB ports. Therefore, to control the UV-1280, you need to
19 refer to the COM port No., which is indicated as "UV-1280 Series" in [Ports (COM & LPT)] on the
device manager.
19 The following describes the procedures for installing the "Virtual COM port driver" and verifying the
COM port No. used for the PC Control.
19
1 Press the [Virtual COM Port Driver for USB] button to start the installation.
When the following window may appears during the installation, click [Install] to continue the
19
installation.
19
19
19
19
Fig. 19.1
19
19-2 UV-1280
19.1 Connecting to a PC
2 Set the UV-1280 to the PC Control mode.

19
In the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 4.1), switch the UV-1280 to the PC Control mode by pressing the
[PC Ctrl] key.
19
19
19
19
19
Fig. 19.2 PC Control Mode screen

19
3 Connect a USB cable.
Connect a USB cable between the USB connector on the backside of the UV-1280 (see Fig. 1.3
19
in this manual) and the USB connector on the PC.
19
4 Take note of the USB Connection COM Port number.
The number is required for setting the COM Port for communications in UVProbe. 19
To check the number again, right-click the hardware eject icon located at the lower rightmost
position of the window to display the COM Port number.
19
19
19
19
Fig. 19.3
NOTE
When re-confirming the COM port number, take care not to take out the COM Port by mistake.
UV-1280 19-3
19.2 Controlling with Optional Software
19.2
UV-1280 can be controlled by a PC using the optional software.

19
For installation and operation of the optional software, refer to the instruction manual provided with the
optional software.
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19-4 UV-1280
19.3 Controlling with External Commands
19.3
The UV-1280 can be controlled from the PC by using control programs created as necessary.
19
19.3.1 Receiving Commands and Protocol

When you select the [PC Ctrl] key in the [Mode menu] screen, the following screen is
displayed. It becomes possible to communicate with PC via the USB interface.
19
19
19
19
19
19
Fig. 19.4 PC Control Mode screen
19
The exchange of signals (communication) with the PC must be performed with one being the
"speaker" and the other the "listener". In this case, the speaker will be referred to as the master and
the listener as the slave.
19
The exchange of signals is performed under a set procedure (protocol). These signals comprise not
only commands and data, but also codes for the control of the procedure (control codes). The control
codes shown in the table below are used in the exchange of signals between the UV-1280 and a PC.
19
Table 19.1 Control Codes
Control Code 19
Direction Function
(Hexadecimal)
ENQ ($05) Master to Slave Enquiry code sent when you wish to send commands or 19
(Enquiry) data. In particular, the first ENQ of a series of
transactions also indicates the start of communication.
EOT ($04) Master to Slave Code for announcing the end of communication. Use this
(End of Transmission) when there are no more data to be sent.
19
ESC ($1B) Bi-directional Code sent when you wish to interrupt communication.
(Escape)
ACK ($06) Slave to Master Code returned from receiving side in affirmative
(Acknowledge) response to a command, data, or code which has been
sent.
NAK ($15) Slave to Master Code returned from receiving side in negative response
(Negative Acknowledge) to a command, data, or code which has been sent.
NUL ($00) Master to Slave Code for recognizing the end of a variable-length signal,
(Null) such as a command or data, etc. This is also called the
terminator.
UV-1280 19-5
The types of commands sent from the PC to the UV-1280 can be generally classified as follows
19
according to the direction of the data flow.
a. Write command ........ Sets the status of the UV-1280.
b. Read command........ Recognizes the status of the UV-1280.
The procedures for these commands have several types. A time chart is shown below. In the figure,
the "——" mark indicates the master. Please note that the master and slave roles alternate in the
19 communication process.
a. Write command .......Protocol A

19
PC
ENQ
COMMANDS
ACK
NUL
19
EOT
ACK
ACK
Write
19 UV-1280
Status
Time to send one code

19
b. Read command .......Protocol B, Protocol B'
19
Time
PC
COMMANDS
ENQ
19
ACK
ACK
ACK
NUL
19
ENQ
ACK
ACK
EOT
Read DATA
NUL
UV-1280 Status
19 There are also repeating commands in this portion.

This is Protocol B'.
19
The write command in a) is protocol A; the type in which data are received only once from the external
computer at the read command in b) is protocol B;, and when there are multiple data received it is
called protocol B'.
19
19
19-6 UV-1280
19.3.2 Example of Programming 19

This section further details the three transmission procedures, protocol types A, B, and B' described in
the previous section, so that they can be used for your programming purpose.
N in the text stands for repetition count and is assumed to be 5 in this example.
In the flow chart, repetition count and time-out checks are omitted.
 Protocol type A 19
(1) Establishment of communication link 1 in flowchart 1

Before transmitting a command, the master station (PC in this example) issues the ENQ code to 19
a subordinate station (the UV-1280 in this example) to prompt it to receive the command data.
The subordinate station returns ACK to notify the master station that it is ready to receive the
command data. 19
<Error handling>
• If NAK is returned in response to the transmission of ENQ, ENQ is retransmitted. If NAK is still
19
returned after this retry has been made N times (5 times in this example), the master station
determines that there is an error at the subordinate station and ends the retries.
• If any code other than ACK and NAK is returned, the master station ignores it and waits for the 19
next reply.
• If there is no reply for a given time, the master station retransmits ENQ. If no reply is received
after the Nth retransmission, the master station determines that there is an error at the 19
subordinate station and ends the retransmission.
(2) Transmission of command data 2 in flowchart 1
If the communication link is established successfully, the master station (PC in this example) 19
transmits the command data. When the subordinate station (the UV-1280 in this example)
receives the command data successfully, it returns ACK to the master station. At this point, the
19
master station and the subordinate station change over to each other.
<Error handling>
• If NAK is returned in response to the transmission of the command data, the previously 19
transmitted data is retransmitted. If NAK is still returned after the Nth retransmission, the
master station determines that an error has occurred at the subordinate station, and ends the
retransmission. 19
• If any code other than ACK and NAK is received, the master station ignores it and waits for the
next reply.
• If there is no reply for a given time, the master station retransmits ENQ. If no reply is received 19
after the Nth retransmission, the master station determines that an error has occurred at the
subordinate station and ends the retransmission.
19
(3) Ending 3 in flowchart 1
When the master station (the UV-1280 in this example) processes the command data and
finishes this processing, it transmits EOT to the subordinate station (PC in this example). 19
The subordinate station waits until EOT is transmitted, and then returns ACK to end the
communication.
UV-1280 19-7
Flowchart 1
19
Start
ENQ has been transmitted.
1 character has been received.

19 1 No
19 Has ACK been received?

No
Has NAK been received?
Yes
Yes
19 Has a command character string been transmitted?

19 No
2
Has ACK been received? Has NAK been received?

19 No Yes
Yes
19 1 character has been received.
19 3 Has EOT been received?

No
Yes
19
ACK has been transmitted.
End
19
19
19
19
19-8 UV-1280
 Protocol types B and B' 19

(1) Establishment of communication link
This is the same as in protocol type A.
(2) Transmission of command data

This is the same as in protocol type A.
19
(3) Reception of answered-back data 1 in flowchart 2
When the master station (the UV-1280 in this example) processes the command data and
finishes this processing, it issues the ENQ code to prompt the subordinate station (PC in this 19
example) to receive the data. The subordinate station waits until ENQ is received, and then
returns ACK to notify the master station (the UV-1280 in this example) that it is ready to receive
the data. Receiving this ACK, the main station (the UV-1280 in this example) starts sending the 19
data.
In the case of protocol B', there are multiple data sets involved. Therefore, each time the
subordinate station (PC in this example) receives data, it transmits ACK to notify the master
19
station (the UV-1280 in this example) that it has received the data.
<Error handling> 19
• If no answered-back data is transmitted for a given time, ENQ is retransmitted. If no data is
returned after the Nth retransmission, the master station (the UV-1280 in this example)
determines that an error has occurred at the subordinate station and ends the retransmission. 19
• If the next character is not received for a given time when character string data is being
received on a character basis, NAK is immediately returned.
(4) Abortion of data reception 2 in flowchart 2 19
When the subordinate station (PC in this example) is receiving multiple data sets using protocol
type B', it transmits ESC rather than ACK if it wants to abort the data reception.
19
The master station (the UV-1280 in this example) aborts the data transmission and closes the
communication link. If the master station (the UV-1280 in this example) becomes unable to
transmit data due to any error that has occurred during the data transmission, it transmits ESC 19
rather than the data to close the communication link.
(5) Ending 3 in flowchart 2

19
When the master station (the UV-1280 in this example) finishes transmitting all the data, it sends
EOT. Receiving EOT, the subordinate station (PC in this example) determines that the data
reception has been finished, and then sends ACK to ends the communication. 19
19
19
UV-1280 19-9
Flowchart 2
19
Start
ENQ has been transmitted.

19 No

No
Has NAK been received?
Yes
Yes
19 Has a command character string been transmitted?

19 No
Has ACK been received? Has NAK been received?

19 No Yes
Yes
19 1 character has been received.
19 1 Has ENQ been received?

No
Yes
19
ACK has been transmitted.
Data has been received.

19 No
19 3 Has EOT been received?

No
Has ESC been received?
Yes
Yes 2
End
19
19-10 UV-1280
19.3.3 Explanation of Commands and Data 19

The commands which can be sent from an external computer are made up of the following elements.
• Command code
Commands • Parameter
• Terminator 19
A command code consists of a single lower-case alphabetic code. The number of a parameter
depends on the command code. Commands can be divided into those with no parameter, those with 19
only one parameter, and those with multiple parameters. When there are multiple parameters, it is
necessary to separate the parameters with a symbol (delimiter). The symbol "," (comma) is used as
the delimiter. Since all parameters are sent as ASCII text, if you wish to set the number 15, this would 19
be expressed in hexadecimal as $31, $35. NUL is used as the terminator.
Data which is sent from the UV-1280 have the following structure.
19
• Data code
Data • Parameter
19
• Terminator
Only "d" command has a Data Code "d"; any other commands have no Data Code. There is only one 19
parameter, reflected by a text string. If the parameter is 10.36, it would be expressed in hexadecimal
as $31, $30, $2E, $33, $36. NUL is used as the terminator.
19
CAUTION
Do not carry out communication by starting any created software program from an external PC 19
during initialization (Fig. 2.5) of the spectrophotometer. If any communication command is
transmitted during initialization, the spectrophotometer initialization may not finish successfully.
When controlling the spectrophotometer using a created software program, switch to the PC 19
Control mode and then start communication only after initialization completes.
19
19
19
19
UV-1280 19-11
19 19.3.4 Programming with Visual Basic

This section describes the programming method using Visual Basic*. You will define the Windows API
functions on Visual Basic, and by calling up the functions, you can control the UV-1280 from the
external computer.
Note that the UV-1280 cannot be controlled from the SerialPort class newly added in Visual Basic
MSComm control and in .NET Framework 2.0.
19 This chapter assumes readers have basic knowledge of Visual Basic, and use Visual Basic Ver.6.0,
Visual Basic .NET 2005 and 2003 as their development environment.
19  Programming with Visual Basic Ver.6.0
19
1 Defining the API Functions
Define the four Windows API functions (CreateFile, WriteFile, ReadFile, and CloseHandle)
required for the UV-1280 external control as described below.
(In Visual Basic Ver.6.0, you can import the definitions of API functions from the bundled "API
19 viewer" software. For the detailed procedure, refer to the Microsoft help services.)
'Start Communication: Define CreateFile

19 Public Declare Function CreateFile Lib "kernel32" Alias "CreateFileA" ( _
ByVal lpFileName As String, _
ByVal dwDesiredAccess As Long, _
19 ByVal dwShareMode As Long, _
ByVal lpSecurityAttributes As Long, _
ByVal dwCreationDisposition As Long, _
19 ByVal dwFlagsAndAttributes As Long, _
ByVal hTemplateFile As Long _
) As Long
19
'Send command: Define WriteFile
Public Declare Function WriteFile Lib "kernel32" ( _
19
ByVal hFile As Long, _
lpBuffer As Any, _
ByVal nNumberOfBytesToWrite As Long, _
19
lpNumberOfBytesWritten As Long, _
ByVal lpOverlapped As Long _
19 ) As Long
'Receive data: Define ReadFile

Public Declare Function ReadFile Lib "kernel32" ( _
ByVal hFile As Long, _
lpBuffer As Any, _
19 ByVal nNumberOfBytesToRead As Long, _
lpNumberOfBytesRead As Long, _
ByVal lpOverlapped As Long _
) As Long
'End communication: Define CloseHandle

Public Declare Function CloseHandle Lib "kernel32" ( _
ByVal hObject As Long _
) As Long
* Microsoft® is a registered trademark. Visual Basic and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
19-12 UV-1280
2 Using the API Functions

You can externally control the UV-1280 using the defined API functions as follows:
19
1) Starting Communication
Start communication using the CreateFile function.
Example) Start communication through the COM1 port. 19
Dim hCom As Long

Dim strComPort As String 19
strComPort = "COM1"
'Start communication: 19
hCom = CreateFile( strComPort, _
GENERIC_READ Or GENERIC_WRITE, _
0, 0, OPEN_EXISTING, _ 19
0, 0 )
19
2) Sending Command
Send a command to the UV-1280 using the WriteFile function.
19
Example) Send ENQ($05).
19
Dim bRet As Boolean
Dim lBytesWritten As Long
19
'Send command:
bRet = WriteFile( hCom, &H5, 1, lBytesWritten, 0 )
19
3) Receiving data
Receive data from the UV-1280 using the ReadFile function. 19
Example) 1 character is received.

19
Dim bRet As Boolean
Dim lBytesRead As Long 19
Dim wDataReadAry(100) As Byte
'Receive data: 19
bRet = ReadFile( hCom, wDataReadAry(0), 1, lBytesRead, 0 )
4) Ending communication
End the communication using the CloseHandle function.
Example) End the existing communication.
'End communication:
CloseHandle ( hCom )
UV-1280 19-13
19  Programming with Visual Basic .Net (2005 and 2003)
1 Defining the API Functions

Define the four Windows API functions (CreateFile, WriteFile, ReadFile, and CloseHandle)
required for the UV-1280 external control as described below.
19 'Start Communication: Define CreateFile

Public Declare Auto Function CreateFile Lib "kernel32.dll" ( _
ByVal lpFileName As String, _
19 ByVal dwDesiredAccess As Int32, _
ByVal dwShareMode As Int32, _
ByVal lpSecurityAttributes As IntPtr, _
19 ByVal dwCreationDisposition As Int32, _
ByVal dwFlagsAndAttributes As Int32, _
ByVal hTemplateFile As IntPtr _
19 ) As IntPtr
'Send command: Define WriteFile

19 Public Declare Auto Function WriteFile Lib "kernel32.dll" ( _
ByVal hFile As IntPtr, _
ByVal lpBuffer As Byte(), _
19 ByVal nNumberOfBytesToWrite As Int32, _
ByRef lpNumberOfBytesWritten As Int32, _
ByVal lpOverlapped As IntPtr _
19
) As Boolean
'Receive data: Define ReadFile

19
Public Declare Auto Function ReadFile Lib "kernel32.dll" ( _
ByVal hFile As IntPtr, _
ByVal lpBuffer As Byte(), _
19
ByVal nNumberOfBytesToRead As Int32, _
ByRef lpNumberOfBytesRead As Int32, _
19 ByVal lpOverlapped As IntPtr _
) As Boolean
19 'End communication: Define CloseHandle

Public Declare Auto Function CloseHandle Lib "kernel32.dll" ( _
ByVal hObject As IntPtr _
) As Boolean
19
19-14 UV-1280
2 Using the API Functions

You can externally control the UV-1280 using the defined API functions as follows:
19
1) Starting Communication
Start communication using the CreateFile function.
Example) Start communication through the COM1 port. 19
Dim hCom As IntPtr

Dim strComPort As String 19
strComPort = "COM1"
'Start communication: 19
hCom = CreateFile( strComPort, _
GENERIC_READ Or GENERIC_WRITE, _
0, IntPtr.Zero, OPEN_EXISTING, _ 19
FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, IntPtr.Zero )
19
2) Sending Command
Send a command to the UV-1280 using the WriteFile function.
19
Example) Send ENQ($05).
19
'Define the object that converts Unicode strings to ASCII strings(for Visual Basic
.Net 2005*):
Dim oEnc As System.Text.Encoding _ 19
=System.Text.Encoding.GetEncoding ("windows-1252")
Dim bRet As Boolean 19

Dim byBuffer () As Byte
Dim nBytesWritten As Int32
19
'Obtain the ASCII string:
byBuffer = oEnc.GetBytes(Chr (&H5))
19
'Send command:
bRet = WriteFile( hCom, byBuffer, byBuffer.Length, nBytesWritten, IntPtr.Zero )
19
* For Visual Basic .Net 2003, define the object that converts Unicode strings to ASCII strings as
19
follows:
Dim oEncoder As System.Text.ASCIIEncoding
Dim oEnc As System.Text.Encoding = oEncoder.GetEncoding ("windows-1252")
UV-1280 19-15
3) Receiving data
19
Receive data from the UV-1280 using the ReadFile function.
Example) 1 character is received.
Dim bRet As Boolean

19 Dim byBuffer() As Byte
Dim nBytesRead As Int32
19 'Receive data:
bRet = ReadFile( hCom, byBuffer, 1, nBytesRead, IntPtr.Zero )
19
4) Ending communication
19 End the communication using the CloseHandle function.
Example) End the existing communication.

19
'End communication:
CloseHandle ( hCom )
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19-16 UV-1280
19.3.5 Command List 19

The terminator symbol has been omitted from the command format places in the command list. When
sending to the UV-1280, send a terminator code (NUL) appearing right after the content shown in the
table as the actual command. The symbols "n" and "m" in the command format indicate parameters.
The protocol types are A, B, and B' and correspond with the time chart in the table.
Table 19.2 Command List 19

Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes
a A Measure Performs wavelength scan. The measured data are 19

stored in the continuous data memory area in the UV-
1280. Use the f command when retrieving data.
19
c A Baseline correction Performs baseline correction.
The baseline is corrected for the range specified by
the scan range h command. 19
d B Data output trigger Outputs the current data. When this command is sent,
the UV-1280 performs one measurement and outputs
19
the data as shown below.
dk
The parameter k is the current data and is formatted 19
as shown below, according to the measurement mode.
Abs: ±x.xxxy
Not Abs: ±xxx.xy 19
The sign of the parameter is output only if the
parameter is negative, while a space is output if the
parameter is positive. In addition, y is output if 19
"Decimal Display" of "Utilities" is set to "Abs (4) %T
(2)".
hn, m A Scanning range Sets the scanning range. The parameters n and m 19
correspond with the start wavelength and end
wavelength. Use the symbol "," (comma) as the
delimiter between the parameters.
19
190 ≤ n,m ≤ 1100
n-m ≥ 10
19
jn A Scanning speed Sets the scanning speed. The parameter n
corresponds with the speed number as shown below. 19
n = 1: Fast
n = 2: Medium
n = 3: Slow 19
n = 4: Very Slow
In A Light source switching Switches the light source position. The parameter n
corresponds with the light source position as shown
below.
n = 0: WI lamp
n = 1: D2 lamp
This command is valid only if the measurement mode
is "Energy".
UV-1280 19-17
19 Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes
vn A Measurement mode Sets the measurement mode. The parameter n

corresponds with the mode number as shown below.
n = 1: %T
n = 2: Abs
19 n = 3: Energy
wn A Wavelength setting Sets the wavelength. The parameter n uses the value
(go to λ) which is 10 times the wavelength being set. To set a
19 wavelength of 500.0 nm, set 5000. n must meet the
following condition.
1900 ≤ n ≤ 11000
19
x A Auto zero Performs auto-zeroing (sets the absorbance under the
current conditions at zero, or the current transmittance
19 at 100 %).
y A WI lamp ON/OFF Controls the ON/OFF of the WI light source lamp. The
parameter n corresponds with the lamp illumination
19
status as shown below.
n = 0 : OFF
n = 1 : ON
19
z A D2 lamp ON/OFF Controls the ON/OFF of the D2 light source lamp. The
parameter n corresponds with the lamp illumination
19 status as shown below.
n = 0 : OFF
n = 1 : ON
19
fn B' Transfer file data Retrieves data which have been stored in the memory
of the UV-1280 by the measure command a. The
19 parameter n is the number of data points that you wish
to retrieve, and allows you to retrieve n pieces of data
from the start of the file (in the case of a spectrum,
19 from the long wavelength end). If you set the
parameter to a number which is greater than the
number of data points saved in memory, processing
19 will end at the point where you run out of data. N
meets the following condition.
1 ≤ n ≤ 2001
The data will be output as follows.
k
19 For the data which is sent, it is necessary to send an
ACK response for each piece of data. The parameter k
is a pairing of the wavelength at the time of
measurement and the data. The format is as follows,
depending on the measurement mode at the time (Top
is Abs, bottom is not Abs).
zzzz.z ΔΔ±x.xxxy
19-18 UV-1280
Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes 19

zzzz.z ΔΔ±xxx.xy
z is the wavelength, x and y are the measurement data
and Δ represents "space" data. The sign of the
parameter is output only if the parameter is negative,
while a space is output if the parameter is positive. In 19
addition, y is output if "Decimal Display" of "Utilities" is
set to "Abs (4) %T (2)".
nx, y, z A Syringe sipper control Controls the syringe sipper. The parameters x, y, and z 19
correspond with the suction speed, operation mode,
and capacity, as shown below. Use a "," (comma) as
the delimiter between the parameters. 19
Suction speed (ml/sec)
x = 1 : 1.2
x = 2 : 0.6 19
x = 3 : 0.3
x = 4 : 0.2
x = 5 : 0.1
19
Operation mode
y = 0 : Initialization
y = 1 : Suction
19
y = 2 : Discharge (discard)
y = 3 : Discharge (return)
19
y = 4 : Cancel initialization
Capacity (ml)
0 ≤ z ≤ 1000 (x 0.01 ml)
19
This command is valid only if the syringe sipper is
connected to the UV-1280 sample compartment.
Sn A Syringe sipper lamp Controls the ON/OFF of the syringe sipper indication 19
ON/OFF lamp. The parameter n corresponds with the lamp
illumination status as shown below.
n = 0 : OFF 19
n = 1 : ON
This command is valid only if the syringe sipper is
connected to the UV-1280 sample compartment. 19
o A Sipper suction Executes the sipper suction operation. The settings
19
done on the UV-1280 are used for the sipper
parameters at the Spectrum mode, such as pump
speed and sip time, etc. This command is valid only if
19
a sipper 160 is connected to the sample compartment
module.
p A Sipper purge Executes the sipper purge operation. The settings

done on the UV-1280 are used for the sipper
parameters at the Spectrum mode, such as pump
speed and purge time, etc. This command is valid only
if a sipper 160 is connected to the sample
compartment module.
UV-1280 19-19
19 Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes
qn A Move cell position Moves the cell position of the multi-cell holder or CPS
series. Parameter n decides the direction.
n = 1: Move 1 cell forward
n = 2: Move to the cell 1 (Multicell)
19 Move 1 cell backward (CPS series)
This command is valid only if a multi-cell holder or
CPS series is connected to the UV-1280 sample
19 compartment.
q B Check cell position Checks the cell position of the multi-cell holder or CPS
series.
19 When this command is executed, data are returned
from the UV-1280 as follows.
k
19 The parameter k corresponds with the cell position
number as follows.
1≤k≤6
19 This command is valid only if a multi-cell holder or
CPS series is connected to the UV-1280 sample
compartment.
19
r B Check ASC nozzle Checks the nozzle condition in the auto-sample
changer ASC-3 or ASC-5 (optional). If this shows that
19 the nozzle is lowered, the sample suction operation
can begin.
When this command is executed, data are returned
19 from the UV-1280 as follows.
k
The parameter k corresponds with the nozzle status
19 number as follows.
0 = nozzle is raised
1 = nozzle is lowered
19 This command is valid only when the ASC-3 or ASC-5
is connected.
19 mn A Option initialization Executes the initialization of option unit connected to

the sample compartment.
n = 0: initialization (standard cell)
n = B: Multicell Sample Comparment (6 cell)
n = C: CPS series
19
19-20 UV-1280
2
20 Sample Module Control
20
20
Chapter 20 Sample Module 20
Control 20
20
20
CONTENTS
20
20.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation) .................................................................... 20-2
20.2 Multi-cell Holder (multicell (6-cell), CPS Series) .............................................................................. 20-3 20
20.3 Sipper 160 ....................................................................................................................................... 20-7
20.4 Syringe Sipper ................................................................................................................................. 20-9
20.5 Blank Correction Function ............................................................................................................. 20-11 20
20
20
20
UV-1280 20-1
Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper
20.1 20.1
Operation)
When you call up the Sample Control screen from the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen
20
in the different modes, you can set the measurement parameters for the sample module.
20
1 Press the [SmplCmpt] key to display the
Sample Compartment Control screen (Fig. 20.1).
20
20
20
Fig. 20.1 Sample Compartment Control
screen (When standard cell is selected)
20
20
2 If you wish to change the sample module, press the
[Sample module] key. The Sample Module Cursor
Selection screen will be displayed (Fig. 20.2).
20
3 To select the sample module, move the cursor to the
desired module with the keys, and
20
Fig. 20.2 Sample Module Selection screen
20
The following 5 accessories can be mounted in place of the standard sample module and operated
20 along with the main instrument.
Accessory Name
20 Sample Module
(Optional)
Description
[6 cell] Multicell Sample The cell holder can hold up to six 10 mm square cells.
20 Compartment ^ "20.2 Multi-cell Holder (multicell (6-cell), CPS Series)"
[CPS] CPS series 6-position multi-cell equipped with temperature control

function
^ "20.2 Multi-cell Holder (multicell (6-cell), CPS Series)"
[Sipper 160] Sipper 160L/C/U/T Performs measurements while drawing sample into a flow cell
using a peristaltic pump).
^ "20.3 Sipper 160"
[Syringe sipper] Syringe Sipper N/CN Performs measurements while drawing sample into a flow cell
using a syringe.
^ "20.4 Syringe Sipper"
20-2 UV-1280
20.2 Multi-cell Holder (multicell (6-cell), CPS Series)
20.2
When using a 6-cell multi-cell holder or CPS series, multiple samples can be measured sequentially.
2
However, the availability of sequential measurement varies, and also a use limitation exists according
to the measurement mode. Check the following table to learn the variations:
20
Sequential
Measurement Mode Remark
Measurement
Photometric
measurement
– 20
(One-wavelength)
^Chapter 6
20
Photometric The motion in the sequential measurement differs
measurement 8λ depending on the set value for the function
(Multi-wavelength) switching samples for each measurement 20
^Chapter 7 wavelength.
(^"7.2.2 Changing Sample") 20
Spectrum mode • The blank correction function (reagent blank
^Chapter 8 correction, cell blank correction) is not available.
20
(^"20.5 Blank Correction Function")
• Only the data for the last cell can be saved or
printed after measurement. However, if the auto 20
print function is enabled, the measurement result
can be printed for each cell.
(^"8.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration 20
Screen" [Auto-Print])
Quantitation mode When performing a repeated measurement, the 20

^Chapter 9 sequential measurement of multiple cells is not
available.
20
Kinetics measurement When performing background correction (BG
^Chapter 10 correction: ON), the sequential measurement of
20
multiple cells is not available.
(^"10.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration
Screen") 20
Kinetics rate
measurement × –
^Chapter 11
Time scan mode

–
^Chapter 12
Multi-component
quantitation mode × –
^Chapter 13
UV-1280 20-3
20 Measurement Mode
Sequential
Remark
Measurement
Bio-method mode When performing a repeated measurement, the

20
^Chapter 14 sequential measurement of multiple cells is not
available.
When you select [6 cell], [8 cell] or [CPS] in the Sample Module screen (Fig. 20.2), the Sample
Compartment Control screen (Fig. 20.3) will be displayed.
20
To use the 6-position Multi-cell holder, it is necessary to initialize them (i.e., to detect the origin of the
cell position) when they are installed on the UV-1280.
20 To perform the initialization, verify that the 6-position Multi-cell holder is mounted to the sample
compartment, and press the key.
20
20 NOTE
• The initialization of CPS series is executed independently when the power to the designated
controller is turned ON.
20 • Before the initialization, check to be sure that the name of the cell holder mounted to the
instrument is displayed in [1. Sample module] in Fig. 20.3.
20
20
20
20
20
20
20-4 UV-1280
20
20
20
20
(When the cell position is not initialized)
20
20
1 The sample module selected
in Fig. 20.2 is displayed.
2
3 20
4
20
20
20
5 6 7 8
(When the cell position is initialized) 20
Fig. 20.3 Sample compartment control screen ("6 cell" / "CPS" selected)
20
Key
Operation
1 [Sample module] Changes the sample module being used.

Operation)"
2 [Drive cell No.] Enters the number of cells being used.
3 [Reagent blank Indicates that the sample being used as the reagent
corr. (cell 1)] blank has been placed in the cell position 1. Enter the
key to switch the display between [YES] and
[NO].
UV-1280 20-5
20 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
4 [Cell blank corr.] Sets whether or not to perform cell blank correction on
20
the measurement results.
Enter the key to switch the display between
[YES] and [NO].
If [YES] is set, [Cell Blk] appears.
20 Note that the cell blank correction function is not
available in the Spectrum mode.
20 5 [Initial] Detects the origin of the cell position. When "CPS" is

selected, this is not displayed.
20 NOTE
To detect the cell holder origin of the CPS series, turn
ON the power to the designated controller.
20
6 [Cell 1] Moves cell 1 (the cell inserted into the front-most cell
holder) into the measurement light path.
20
7 [CellMove] Moves to the next cell. If cell 6 is currently in the light
path, the holder will move to cell 1 when you press this
20 key.
8 [CellBLK.] Acquires and saves absorbance (transmittance) at

20 each cell (cell position). The cell blank correction is
performed using the saved data by this function
20 (^ "20.5 Blank Correction Function").
When [4. Cell blank corr.] is set to [ON], be sure to
perform the cell blank correction after placing the cells
20
to be used.

20
screen (Fig. 20.1).
20
20-6 UV-1280
20.3 Sipper 160
20.3
When you select [Sipper 160] in the Sample Module Selection screen (Fig. 20.2), the Sample
2
Compartment Control screen (Sipper 160) (Fig. 20.4) will be displayed.
20
1
2
3
4 20
5
6
20
20
7 20
Fig. 20.4 Sample Compartment Control screen (Sipper 160)
20
Key
No. Display Description 20
Operation

20
Operation)"
2 [Pump speed] Sets the pump rotation speed. 20

If you select [Pump speed], the screen for selecting the
pump rotation speed will appear. Move the cursor to 20
the desired pump rotation speed with the
20
keys, and confirm with the key.
20
Fig. 20.5 Pump Speed Selection screen
Select the pump speed from Fast/Medium/Slow/Halt.

Select [Halt] when using the electromagnetic valve.
3 [Sipping time] Sets the time that the sample will be aspirated. The
input range is 0.0 to 64.0 seconds.
4 [Dwell time] Sets the time interval between aspiration of a sample

and measurement. Input range is 0.0 to 64.0 seconds.
UV-1280 20-7
20.3 Sipper 160
20 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
5 [Purge time] Sets the time after measurement is completed that the
20
sample will be purged. The input range is from -64.0 to
64.0 seconds. When set to a negative value, the pump
will reverse to purge the sample. To suction and
retrieve the sample which has already been measured,
20 enter a negative value.
6 [No. of rinses] Sets the number of times that the inside of the flow cell
20 will be rinsed before measurement. The sip-purge
operation will be repeated up to the number of times
set here. Measurement is not performed during this
20
operation. Input range is from 0 to 4 times.
7 [Manu. Sip] This key switches the manual suction function ON/
20
OFF. Each time you press this key, the function toggles
between [ON] and [OFF]. Manual sipping draws the
20 sample while the sipper lever is pressed, regardless of
the sipping time setting, and no measurement is
20 performed.

20 screen.
* When using the auto sample changer ASC-5 (option) for link measurement, refer to the manual
20 for ASC-5.
To connect the ASC-5 to the UV-1280, "USB ADAPTOR for ASC (P/N 206-25235-91)" is
separately required.
20
20
20
20-8 UV-1280
20.4 Syringe Sipper
20.4
When you select [Syringe sipper] in the Sample Module screen (Fig. 20.2), the Sample Compartment
2
Control screen (syringe sipper) (Fig. 20.6) will be displayed.
20
1
2
3
4
5 20
6
7
20
20
8 20
(Before Initialization)
20
20
20
20
20
20
9
(After Initialization) 20
Fig. 20.6 Sample Compartment Control screen (syringe sipper)
Key
Operation

Operation)"
UV-1280 20-9
20.4 Syringe Sipper
20 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation
2 [Pump speed] Selects the pump operating speed from 5 steps: 1.2/
20
0.6/0.3/0.2/0.1 ml/sec.
If you select [Pump speed], the screen for selecting the
pump operating speed will appear. Move the cursor to
the desired pump operating speed with the
20 keys, and confirm with the key.
20
20
20
Fig. 20.7 Pump Speed Selection screen
20 3 [Sip volume] Sets the sample sipping volume in the unit of ml. Input
range is from 0.00 to 10.00 ml.
20 4 [Dwell time] Sets the time from sample sipping to measurement
start in the unit of second. Input range is from 0.00 to
9.99 seconds.
20
5 [Purge volume] Sets the sample purge volume after measurement in
the unit of ml. Input range is from 0.00 to 10.00 ml.
20
6 [No. of rinses] Sets the number of times that the inside of the flow cell
will be rinsed before measurement. The sip and purge
20 operation will be repeated up to the number of time set
here. Measurement is not performed during this
operation. Input range is from 0 to 4 times.
20
7 [Sample Selects the direction in which the sample is purged
recovery] after measurement, the drain nozzle side or the
20 sipping nozzle side. The key is used to
toggle between [Return] (ON) and [Discharge] (OFF).
8 [Initial] Starts initializing the syringe pump. When the unit is

connected after turning ON the power, the accessories
must be initialized. If they have not been initialized, the
set capacity of sample may not be sipped or drained.
9 [Sip] Suctions/discharges sample at the volume specified in

[3. Sip. volume] in the Sample Compartment Control
screen (Fig. 20.6).

screen.
20-10 UV-1280
20.5 Blank Correction Function
20.5
When connecting a 6-cell multi-cell holder or CPS series and using the blank correction function
2
(reagent blank correction, cell blank correction), the corrected values can be acquired for
measurement results.
20
NOTE
The blank correction function is not available in the Spectrum mode.
Current absorbance 20
transmittance)
20
Corrected value
20
20
20
20
Fig. 20.8 Measurement with blank correction (E.g. Photometric (one-wavelength))
The following explains about each type of the blank corrections.

20
 Reagent blank correction

Using the sample placed in cell position 1 as a blank, the cells in the other positions (2-6) are 20
measured. In other words, after the samples in cell positions 2 through 6 have been measured,
the measured value for the sample in cell position 1 is subtracted from the various measured
20
values.
Because of this, even if time changes occur in the blank sample or drift develops due to the
increasing temperature of the instrument, accurate data can be acquired by canceling these 20
fluctuating factors.
20
UV-1280 20-11
20 Measurement data
Absorbance Transmittance
20 (Abs) (%T)
Corrected value: (A3–A1) (T3/T1×100) A3 Cell 3

(T3)
A2 Cell 2
20 Corrected value: (A2–A1) (T2/T1×100)
(T2)
20 A1
Corrected value: (A1–A1) (T1/T1×100)
(T1)
Cell 1
20 • For Abs: The measured value at Cell 1 (blank) is subtracted from the absorbance at each cell.
• For %T: The transmittance at each cell is divided by the measured value at Cell 1 (blank).
20
Fig. 20.9 Calculation for Reagent Blank Correction
 Cell blank correction

20
Even though cells are constructed in the same manner, there are naturally going to be slight
optical differences. In cell blank correction, at first, blank samples are placed in a square cells
20 and the measured values (cell blank values) in that condition are recorded. Then, when an
unknown sample is measured and those results are displayed, the previously recorded blank
measured value is canceled from the various measurement results. Thus, the measured value of
20 only the sample is obtained.
Measurement data
20
(Abs) (%T)
20 Cell 3
Corrected value: (A3–a3) (T3/ t3×100) A3
(T3) a3(t3)
20
A2 Cell 2
Corrected value: (A2–a2) (T2/ t2×100) a2(t2)
(T2)
20 Cell blank value
A1 Cell 1
Corrected value: (A1–a1) (T1/ t1×100)
(T1) a1(t1)
• For Abs: Each cell blank value (absorbance) is subtracted from the measured value at each cell.
• For %T: The measured value at each cell is divided by each cell blank value (transmittance).
Fig. 20.10 Calculation for Cell Blank Correction
20-12 UV-1280
 Reagent blank correction + Cell blank correction 2

If both blank correction methods are enabled, the cell blank correction is executed for each cell,
and the reagent blank correction is executed using the Cell 1 sample value on the measured
values of the other cell positions. 20
Measurement data
(Abs) (%T)
A3 Cell 3 20
Corrected value: (A3–a3)–(A1–a1) {(T3/ t3)/(T1/ t1)}×100 a3(t3)
(T3)
20
A2 Cell 2
(T2)
20
A1 Cell 1
(T1)
20
Cell blank correction Cell blank value
Reagent blank correction 20
• The cell blank correction and reagent blank correction are performed on each cell. 20
Fig. 20.11 Calculation for Reagent Blank Correction + Cell Reagent Blank Correction 20
20
20
20
20
UV-1280 20-13
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20-14 UV-1280
2
21 Maintenance & Inspection
21
Chapter 21 Maintenance & 21
Inspection 21
21
21
CONTENTS
21
21.1 Inspection and Maintenance............................................................................................................ 21-2
21.2 Inspecting the Sample Compartment .............................................................................................. 21-3 21
21.3 Checking and Resetting the Lamp Usage Time .............................................................................. 21-4
21.4 Replacing the Light Source ............................................................................................................. 21-7
21.5 Cleaning the Exterior ..................................................................................................................... 21-15 21
21
21
21
21
UV-1280 21-1
21.1 Inspection and Maintenance
21.1
To use the UV-1280 safely, be sure to perform inspection and maintenance on the instrument.
21
21
WARNING
21
Unless otherwise specified, be sure to turn OFF the UV-1280 and remove the electric
plug from the outlet before performing inspection and maintenance. Failure to do so
may result in fire, electric shock, and instrument malfunction.
21
21
CAUTION
21
• When replacing parts, always use the parts specified in "1.1 UV-1280 Configuration" or
"21.4 Replacing the Light Source". Using parts other than those specified may damage
21 the parts, causing injuries or system malfunction.
• DO NOT remove the cover of the UV-1280. Ignoring this may cause injuries or system
21 malfunction.
For internal repair of the UV-1280, contact your Shimadzu representative.
21
21 21.1.1 List of Periodic Inspection & Maintenance Items

Inspection and maintenance
Everyday 1 year 2 years 3 years Reference
21 item
Sample compartment "21.2 Inspecting the

inspection Sample
21
Compartment"
Lamp usage time check "21.3 Checking and

21
Resetting the Lamp
Usage Time"
21
WI (halogen) lamp "21.4 Replacing the
replacement Light Source"
D2 (deuterium) lamp "21.4 Replacing the

replacement Light Source"
21-2 UV-1280
21.2 Inspecting the Sample Compartment
21.2
2
CAUTION
2
DO NOT spill water or organic solvent on the UV-1280. Doing so may result in electrical
failure or instrument malfunction.
21
When analyzing liquid sample, check that no solution sample is spilled on the sample compartment
before and after measurement. Should you spill any liquid sample, wipe it up immediately.
21
NOTE
If spilled sample is left in the sample compartment for a while, it evaporates and fills the 21
compartment, corroding the internal components and interfering with correct measurement results.
21
If solution sample is spilled on the sample compartment bottom, wipe up the spilled solution after
removing the sample compartment unit. For the procedure to remove/install the sample compartment
unit, refer to "22.1 Errors during Initialization". 21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
UV-1280 21-3
21.3 Checking and Resetting the Lamp Usage Time
21.3
The UV-1280 has a function to record and display the accumulated usage time of the WI (halogen)
21
and D2 (deuterium) lamps used for the light source.
Even though the accumulated usage time is saved to the instrument after the power is turned OFF, the
21
data will be cleared if any electrical problem occurs. Therefore, if you wish to use the usage time data
through this function as a reference for lamp replacement, write down the usage time on the
21 inspection record periodically. For the service life of each lamp, refer to "21.4.1 Light Source
Specifications".
21.3.1 Checking Procedure

21
1 Press the
screen (Fig. 21.1).
[Mainte.] key in the Mode menu
21
21
21
21
Fig. 21.1
21 2 The Maintenance screen (Fig. 21.2) appears and the

accumulated usage time of the light source lamps
are displayed.
21
21 3 Press the
screen (Fig. 21.1).
key to return to the Mode menu
21
21 Fig. 21.2
21
21-4 UV-1280
21.3.2 Resetting Procedure 21

After replacing the light source lamp, reset the data of accumulated usage time by the following
procedure.
For the light source replacement, refer to "21.4.2 Lamp Replacement Procedure".
The procedure for resetting the lamp usage time is given below, using the D2 lamp as an example.
21
1 Press the
screen (Fig. 21.3).
[Maint.] key in the Mode menu
21
21
21
Fig. 21.3
21
2 Press the [2. Reset lamp usage time] key
in the Maintenance screen (Fig. 21.4).
21
21
21
21
Fig. 21.4
3 The window for selecting the lamp whose usage is to

be reset appears.
21
Use the keys to move the cursor
Cursor 21
to [D2 lamp] (Fig. 21.5), and press the key.
21
Fig. 21.5
UV-1280 21-5
21 4 Use the
press the key.
keys to select [Yes], and
The lamp usage time will be reset.

21
21
Fig. 21.6
21
5 You will return to the [Maintenance] screen (Fig.
21.7).
21
Verify that [D2 lamp usage time] is reset to "0 hours".
21
21
6 Press the
screen (Fig. 21.3).
key to return to the Mode menu
21
Fig. 21.7
21
21
21
21
21
21
21-6 UV-1280
21.4 Replacing the Light Source
21.4
21.4.1 Light Source Specifications 2

The UV-1280 uses two types of light source lamps: D2 (deuterium) lamp and WI (halogen) lamp. The
D2 lamp and WI lamp are used for ultraviolet region (190 nm - light source switching wavelength*1)
2
and visible/near-infrared region (light source switching wavelength*1 - 1100 nm), respectively.
The closer the lamp service life comes to its end, the smaller the light intensity of each lamp, and the
21
greater the noise in photometric data.
Replace the light source lamp by referring to the "Rating life*2" described in the table below.
*1 The light source switching wavelength can be arbitrarily specified within the range between 295 nm
and 364 nm in increments of 0.1 nm. For details, refer to "16.1 Utilities Menu Screen", [3. Light 21
Source].
21
*2 The rating life below has been determined based on "average life" of a large number of lamps by
the lamp manufacturer. Please note that some lamps may burn out before they reach the end of
21
their rating lives.
Table 21.1 21
Name Part No. Type Rating Life
1 WI (halogen) lamp S062-65005 NA55917 Appox. 2000 hours 21

2 D2 (deuterium lamp) S062-65055-05 L6380 Appox. 2000 hours
21
Protrusion on top
21
21
21
21
Beam port Beam port
21
1 WI (halogen) lamp 2 D2 (deuterium) lamp
Fig. 21.8 Light source appearances
UV-1280 21-7
21 21.4.2 Lamp Replacement Procedure
WARNING
21 • Before replacing the lamp, turn OFF the instrument power switch and remove the
electric plug from the outlet. Failure to do so may result in fire, electric shock, and
instrument malfunction. DO NOT turn ON the instrument power while the light source
compartment is visually exposed. Ultraviolet light may be generated, a serious health
hazard.
21 • Before replacing the lamp, turn OFF the instrument and let it stand until the lamp cools
down sufficiently. Touching the lamp when it is still hot will burn you.
21
21
CAUTION
21 • When removing and installing the light source compartment cover, avoid hitting the
protrusion on the top of the D2 (deuterium) lamp (Fig. 21.8) against the back of the
cover. Doing so may cause a vacuum leak in the lamp tube.
21
• Be sure to wear gloves when handling the light source so as not to leave fingerprints on
the glass part. A fingerprint will burn onto the bulb when the light source gets hot, and
21 light transmission will deteriorate.
• Be careful not to break the lamp.
21 • When replacing the WI (halogen) lamp, your hand may contact the D2 lamp. Cover the
D2 lamp with a clean paper or cloth or remove the D2 lamp before the work.
21 • After inserting the WI lamp into the socket, DO NOT forcedly move it to right and left or
up and down. The connection part between the pin and glass may crack, which makes
it impossible for the lamp to illuminate.
21
21
21-8 UV-1280
 Removing the light source compartment cover 21
1 Using a Philips screwdriver, loosen the fixing screw

located on the side of the light source compartment
cover.
21
Fixing screw
21
21
2 Lift up the side part of the cover to release the notch

from the fixing screw. 21
21
Notch (on the light source
compartment cover)
21
21
Fixing screw
21
3 While sliding the light source compartment cover

and lifting it up at an angled (following the arrow 21
direction in Fig. 21.9), remove it from the main body.
21
21
21
Fig. 21.9 Removing the light source

compartment cover
UV-1280 21-9
21
5
2
21
21
21
1
21
4 3
21
21 1 WI lamp 4 D2 lamp
2 WI lamp socket 5 Light source switching mechanism
3 WI lamp retainer spring
21
Fig. 21.10 Interior of light source compartment
21
 Replacing the WI (halogen) lamp
21 When replacing the WI (halogen) lamp, your hand may contact the D2 lamp. Cover the D2 lamp with a clean
paper or cloth or remove the D2 lamp before the work. To remove the D2 lamp, refer to " Replacing the D2
lamp" in this section.
21
1 Remove the WI lamp retainer spring from the top of

the WI lamp.
21
Fig. 21.11
21-10 UV-1280
2 Pull out the WI lamp from the socket.

2
21
Fig. 21.12
3 Wear gloves. Hold the new WI lamp at the top and

bottom so as not to taint its beam port.
21
4 Insert the new WI lamp into the socket. Push it

forward until the two pins of the WI lamp contact the
21
back of the socket and stop. 21
NOTE
21
The two pins of the WI lamp do not have polarity. Fig. 21.13
Either pin can be the upper side.
21
5 Return the WI lamp retainer spring, removed in

procedure 1, to the original position. 21
21
21
21
Fig. 21.14 21
6 Reinstall the D2 lamp to the original position. Make

sure that no paper or cloth used for the work is left in 21
the light source compartment.
7 Install the light source compartment cover by the

reverse procedure of that described in " Removing
the light source compartment cover" in this section.
UV-1280 21-11
21 8 Insert the electric plug into the outlet, and switch ON

the UV-1280. (Press the "|" side on the switch.)
21
21 Fig. 21.15
9 The initialization process starts. Verify that the

initialization for all items is successfully completed.
(i.e., "OK" is displayed for all items.)
21
10 When the Mode menu screen is displayed, follow the

procedure in "21.3.2 Resetting Procedure" to reset
21
the WI lamp usage time.
21
Fig. 21.16
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21-12 UV-1280
 Replacing the D2 lamp 2

1 Wear gloves. Hold the resin part of the D2 lamp, and
slowly pull it straight up.
2
2 Slowly extract the D2 lamp upward to remove it from

the socket.
21
21
Fig. 21.17 21
3 Insert the new D2 lamp into the socket. Fit the

locating lug at the bottom of the D2 lamp to the
21
socket notch.
Make sure that the lamp is inserted all the way. 21
4 Install the light source compartment cover by the

reverse procedure of that described in " Removing
21
the light source compartment cover" in this section.

21
Notch (on the socket) 21
Locating lug 21
21
Fig. 21.18
5 Insert the electric plug into the outlet, and switch ON

the UV-1280. (Press the "|" side on the switch.)
21
21
Fig. 21.19
UV-1280 21-13
21 6 The initialization process starts. Verify that the

initialization for all items is successfully completed.
(i.e., "OK" is displayed for all items.)
21
21
7 When the Mode menu screen is displayed, follow the
procedure in "21.3.2 Resetting Procedure" to reset
the D2 lamp usage time.
Fig. 21.20
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21-14 UV-1280
21.5 Cleaning the Exterior
21.5
When the instrument case, sample compartment cover, and operation keypad get dirty or stained,
2
wipe them with a dry, soft cloth or tissue.
Remove more stubborn stains by the following procedure:
2
1 Dip a cloth into watered-down mild detergent and wring it well. Wipe the instrument with it.
21
2 Dip a cloth into water and wring it well. Wipe off any detergent residue on the instrument completely.
Then, wipe the moisture off with a dry cloth.
21
NOTE
DO NOT leave any spilled water on the UV-1280. DO NOT use alcohol or paint thinner solvents for
cleaning. Doing so may cause the instrument surface to rust or discolor. 21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
UV-1280 21-15
21.5 Cleaning the Exterior
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21-16 UV-1280
2
22 Troubleshooting
22
Chapter 22 Troubleshooting 2
22
22
CONTENTS
22
22.1 Errors during Initialization ................................................................................................................ 22-2
22.2 Problems: Symptoms and Solutions................................................................................................ 22-4 22
22
22
22
22
22
UV-1280 22-1
22.1 Errors during Initialization
22.1
After the power is turned ON, the UV-1280 initializes and checks the following items listed in the table
22
below.
22
1
22
2
3
22 4
5
6
22 7
8
9
0
22
Fig. 22.1 Initialization screen
22
Table 22.1 Initialization items

22
Item No. Initialization items Description
22 1 LSI Initialize Initializes each I/O device.
2 ROM Check Checks program ROM.
22 3 RAM Check Checks memory elements (RAM).
4 Filter Initialize Detects the reference position of the stray light filter.
22 5 Lamp Motor Initialize Detects the reference position of the motor that drives the light
source switching mirror.
22 6 WL Motor Initialize Detects the mechanical wavelength origin position.
7 WI Lamp Energy Checks whether or not the WI (halogen) lamp light energy is at a
22 sufficient level.
8 WL Origin search Checks 0-order light which is the optical origin.

22 9 D2 Lamp Energy Checks whether or not the D2 (deuterium) lamp light energy is at a
sufficient level.
0 WL Check Checks wavelength by detecting the emission line at 656.1 nm

using the D2 lamp.
22-2 UV-1280
22.1 Errors during Initialization
When [NG] is displayed during initialization, perform the appropriate remedial actions by referring to
2
the table below. If the problem is not resolved by these actions, contact your Shimadzu representative.
Item No. Check Point Remedial Action

Reference 2
Page
1 ~ 6 Turn OFF the UV-1280 power switch, and turn P2-9

2
it ON to initialize the instrument again.
7, 8 Is there anything Turn OFF the UV-1280 power switch. P2-9

22
obstructing the beam Remove the obstruction and turn ON the power
in the sample switch again.
compartment cell 2
holder?
Is the light source If the icon is not displayed (i.e., only frame is P2-9
lamp icon [W] displayed), it means that the WI lamp is P21-7
displayed on the upper currently OFF. 22

right of the screen?
22
22
Fig. 22.2
Turn OFF the UV-1280 power switch, and turn

22
it ON again. If the lamp still does not illuminate,
replace the WI lamp by the procedure
22
described in "21.4 Replacing the Light Source".
9, 0 Is there anything Turn OFF the UV-1280 power switch. Remove P2-9
obstructing the beam the obstruction and turn ON the power switch
22
in the sample again.
compartment cell 22
holder?
Is the light source If the icon is not displayed (i.e., only frame is P2-9 22
lamp icon [D] displayed), it means that the WI lamp is OFF. P21-7
displayed on the upper

22
right of the screen?
Fig. 22.3
Turn OFF the UV-1280 power switch, and turn

it ON again. If the lamp still does not illuminate,
replace the WI lamp by the procedure
described in "21.4 Replacing the Light Source".
UV-1280 22-3
22.2 Problems: Symptoms and Solutions
22.2
Check whether the problem exhibits the following symptoms before requesting a repair.
22
Contact your Shimadzu representative if the error cannot be resolved through the remedial action
described below, or if the symptom is not covered in the table.
22
Reference
Symptom Typical Cause Remedial Action
Page
22
Turning ON the power Is the AC power cable Connect the AC power cable plug
switch does not supply plug connected correctly. P2-5
22 the power. properly?
Is the AC power cable Replace the AC power cable with the

P1-2
22 trapped underneath or cable of the same type if it is
P2-5
twisted? damaged.
Does the supplied Use the power supply that satisfies

power satisfy the the instrument power supply
power supply specification of the UV-1280. P2-4
22 specification of the
UV-1280?
22 [NG] is displayed next Perform an appropriate action by

to initialization items. —————— following the instruction in "22.1 P22-2
Errors during Initialization".
22
Nothing appears on Is the display contrast Adjust the display contrast by using
the screen. properly adjusted? the keys while
P1-6
22 holding down the key on
the keypad.
Numbers cannot be Is an incorrect value Enter the correct value.

22
entered from the being entered?
——
keypad. Example:
22 , 1150 (nm)
Photometry values are Is the light source Check if the light source lamp icon
22 odd. lamp lit? ([W] or [D]) is displayed.
22
Fig. 22.4
22  When the icon is not displayed
(Only frame is displayed) P2-9
[Action] P21-7
The lamp is currently OFF.
1)Turn OFF the UV-1280 power
switch, and turn it ON again.
2)When the result of the energy
check during initialization is [NG]
(^ Fig. 22.1), replace the lamp
by the procedure in "21.4 Replacing
the Light Source".
22-4 UV-1280
Symptom Typical Cause Remedial Action

Reference 2
Page
Photometry values are Is the light source  When the icon is blinking
2
odd. lamp lit? [Action]
The lamp is currently OFF with some
2
errors.
The fan is not working or the thermo
——
censor on the circuit board has 22
detected overheating.
Turn OFF the UV-1280 power switch 2
and contact your Shimadzu
representative.
Did you mistakenly Return to the blank condition

press the (reference condition) and press the
P1-6 22
key during key again.
measurement?
Is the cell being used Do not use a glass cell in the 22

——
an appropriate one? ultraviolet range.
Is a cell phone being The measured value may be 22

used near the influenced depending on the types of
instrument? cell phones and the radio waves 22
——
conditions. Avoid using a cell phone
near the instrument during
22
measurement.
Baseline curve does Are you using an Some of the unit specifications may
22
not meet normal optional accessory? not be met when certain optional
specifications. accessories are installed.
——
(^ "23.1.1 22
Hardware
Specifications") 22
22
UV-1280 22-5
22 Symptom Typical Cause Remedial Action

Reference
Page
Neither light source Is the Cooling fan Check if air is expelled from the
22
lamp lights. working? exhaust port located on the left side
rear of the instrument.
22 ——
If the fan has stopped, turn OFF the
UV-1280 power switch and contact
22 your Shimadzu representative.
"It failed in the access Is the USB memory or Use a normal USB memory.
——
22 to the file." its file system intact?
Did you unplug the Reconnect the USB memory and

USB memory during retry accessing the file. ——
file access?
22 Is the USB memory Turn OFF the USB memory write

——
write-protected? protection function.
22 Is the USB memory Cancel the encryption of the USB

drive encrypted by its memory. ——
security function?
22
"Cannot load this file." Has the file been The selected file may be corrupted.
properly saved? In that case, the file cannot be ——
22 loaded.
22
22
22
22
22
22-6 UV-1280
2
23 Reference
Chapter 23 Reference 23
23
CONTENTS
23
23.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 23-2
23.2 Spectrophotometer Basics .............................................................................................................. 23-8 23
23.3 Measurement System.................................................................................................................... 23-21
23.4 List of Cells .................................................................................................................................... 23-22
23.5 Cleaning the Cell ........................................................................................................................... 23-26 23
23
23
23
23
UV-1280 23-1
23.1 23.1Specifications
23 23.1.1 Hardware Specifications
Measurement Wavelength 190 ~ 1100 nm

23
Range
Spectral Band Width 5 nm

23
(Resolution)
Wavelength Display 0.1 nm units

23
Wavelength Setting 0.1 nm units (1 nm units in scan)
Wavelength Accuracy ± 1.0 nm

23
Wavelength Repeatability ± 0.3 nm
23 Wavelength Scanning GOTO WL command:approx. 6000 nm/min

Speeds Wavelength scan: 9 ~ 1600 nm/min
Light Source Switching Automatic switching with wavelength range. Can be set anywhere in the range
from 295 nm to 364 nm by the unit of 1 nm. (340 nm is recommended.)
Stray Light Less than 0.05%

23
Photometric System Monitor double beam
23 Photometric Range Absorbance: −3.0 ~ 3.0 Abs (when uncorrected baseline curve is within 0.5
Abs.)
Transmittance: 0 ~ 200%
23
Recording Range Absorbance: −4.000 ~ 4.000 Abs
Transmittance: −400.0 ~ 400.0%
23
Photometric Accuracy ± 0.005 Abs (at 1.0 Abs)
± 0.003 Abs (at 0.5 Abs)
23
Photometric repeatability ± 0.002 Abs (at 1.0 Abs)
Auto Zero Function [AUTO ZERO] key enables one-touch setting

23
Baseline Stability Within 0.001 Abs/h (one hour after power on)
Baseline Flatness Within ±0.010 Abs (one hour after power on)
23
Noise Level 0.002 Abs (0.0005 Abs RMS)
23 Baseline Correction Automatic correction using computer memory
Light Source 20 W halogen lamp (long-life 2000 hour), Deuterium lamp (socket- type), On-
board automatic light source positioning mechanism
Monochromator Uses concave holographic grating
Detector Silicon photodiode
LCD Backlit (320 × 240 dot), Adjustable contrast
23-2 UV-1280
23.1 Specifications
Sample Compartment Interior dimensions 110 × 230 × 105 (mm) 2

(W × D × H) (Partial depth 155 mm) Removable type 2-screw attachment
Beam dimensions 2 × 7 mm (W × H)
2
(at center of accessory cell holder)
Power Supply AC 100 V - 240 V

2
50/60 Hz 140 VA
Dimensions 416 × 379 × 274 (mm) (W × D × H)

2
Mass 10 kg
Ambient Temperature Room temperature 15 ~ 35°C

23
Ambient Humidity Humidity 30 ~ 80%
(less than 70% at temperature higher than 30°C)
2
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
UV-1280 23-3
23.1 Specifications
23 23.1.2 Software Specifications
Photometric One-wavelength measurement

23 (1) Photometric modes: Absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T)
(2) Simple quantification by K-factor method

23
(3) Save/Load table data function
23 Multi-wavelength measurement
(1) Photometric modes: Absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T)
23 (2) Max. 8 wavelengths (Wavelength setting is possible by the unit of

0.1 nm.)
(3) Wavelength calculation function:

23
Calculation using data at up to 4 wavelengths is possible.
• Ratio and difference between the photometric values of
two wavelengths, three wavelength calculation
• 4 data calculation: (K1 × A1 + K2 × A2 + K3 × A3 + K4 ×
A4) × K5
23 • 4 data calculation: K5 × (K1 × A1 + K2 × A2)/(K3 × A3
+K4 × A4)
* An (n = 1 to 4) indicates absorbance at the measurement
23 wavelength of λn (n = 1 to 4)
Spectrum (1) Measurement mode: Absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T), and

energy (E)
23
(2) Scan range: 190 nm to 1100 nm
(3) Scan speeds: Fast, Medium, Fast, Medium, Slow, Very slow
23
(4) Vertical axis recording range: Abs; -4.000 to 4.000 (Min. range;
- 0.001 to 0.001)
23 %T, E; -400.0 to 400.0 (Min. range;
- 0.1 to 0.1)
23 (5) Scan repetitions: 1 to 99
(6) Recording method: Overlay/ Sequential selectable

23 (7) Reduce/Expand [zoom], Display data with cursor
(8) Save/Load data function

23
23-4 UV-1280
23.1 Specifications
Quantitation (1) Measurement method: 2

One-wavelength/Two-wavelength/Three-wavelength quantitation,
Quantitation by derivative (1 to 4 order) calculation
2
(2) Functions regarding calibration curve
Automatically calculate concentration by K-factor method
Automatically calculate concentration by one-point calibration 2
curve method
Multi-point calibration curve
1 to 3 order regression calibration curve 2
Number of standard samples (1 to 10)
Select pass-through-origin conditions
Display of calibration curve formula 23
Display of relative coefficient of calibration curve
(3) Measurement parameter
2
Quantitation by repeat measurement (1 to 10 times) and taking
the average measurement value
(4) Save/Load table data function
(5) Automatic data print function: Results are automatically output on

hard-copy printer for every 23
measurement.
(6) Special accessories

23
• Linked measurement with a multi-cell holder or CPS
series
• Sipper: linked measurement with the ASC-5 is possible 23
Kinetics Kinetics
(1) Measure Abs time change and calculate activity values. 23
(2) Measurement time: 1 to 9999 sec/min
(3) Measurement using Abs difference between two wavelengths is 23

possible.
Rate-measurement 23
(1) Measure Abs time change and calculate the change in
absorbance quautity. 23
23
(3) Determine whether the measured reaction result is progressing in
linear fashion.
UV-1280 23-5
23.1 Specifications
23 Time Scan (1) Measure time course change in photometric values.
(2) Measurement mode: A Absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T),

23 energy (E)
23 (4) Linked measurement with a multi-cell holder or CPS series
(5) Reduce/Expand [zoom], Display data with cursor
23 (6) Save/Load data function
Multi-Component Analysis (1) Up to 8 components

23 (2) Pure and mixed samples of each constituent component can be
used as standard samples
23 (3) Besides measurement wavelengths, standard sample data can

be filed.
(4) Quantitation can be done by calling up spectra
Bio-method DNA quantitation
23 (1) Calculate DNA/Protein concentrations and Abs ratio.

DNA concentration =K1×A1-K2×A2
Protein concentration = K3×A2-K4×A1
23 (2) Factor/measurement wavelength can be set arbitrarily.
(3) Background correction can be applied.

23
Protein quantitation
(1) Quantitation method: Lowry method, BCA method, Biuret
23
method, CBB method (Bradford method),
UV absorption method
23 Maintenance and Inspection (1) Lamp ON time display / reset
Function (2) Security settings: Function restrictions can be set for each user
23 account.
(3) Validation
• In compliance with JIS
23
Wavelength accuracy, wavelength reproducibility, stray light,
photometric accuracy, photometric reproducibility, baseline flatness,
23
baseline stability, noise level
• Semi-automatic test: For the items that require test jigs, the test can
be performed interactively.
• Full-automatic test: The test is automatically performed from
measurement to pass / fail judgment and result printing.
• Setting test conditions/pass fail judgment criteria
• Batch printing/saving (text file)/displaying of test results
The previous test results can be printed in a list form (once test
starts, the previous test results will be cleared).
23-6 UV-1280
23.1 Specifications
File Management Function (1) Convert spectrum and time course curve to CSV format. 2
(2) Copy and delete files.
Data Processing Function Following processings can be performed on curve data such as 2
spectrum and time course curve.
• Peak/Valley detection (both possible up to 20 pcs.)
• The four rules of arithmetic 2
• Derivative processing
• Smoothing processing
• Area calculation 2
• Point-pick processing
• Print processing (printing waveform data in text format)
23
Common Function (1) Selection function of the setting conditions after power is
supplied, Standby at the condition setting menu of each
measurement mode, Specifying a condition file is possible 2
(2) Selection function of data display digits below decimal point
Abs (3 digits) %T (1 digit) or Abs (4 digits) %T (2 digits)
(3) Number of files that can be stored (built-in memory)
Measurement conditions: Max. 24 files
Curve data : Max. 8 files 23
Table data : Max. 8 files
(4) Accumulation time set function (for fixed wavelength 23
measurement)
(5) External control function

23
UV-1280 can be controlled from PC.
* USB cable (that supports USB 1.1) separately required
23
23
23
23
23
UV-1280 23-7
23.2 Spectrophotometer Basics
23.2
23 23.2.1 What is Light?

Light is a type of electromagnetic radiation with a speed of 3.0 x 10 8 m/sec in a vacuum.
Electromagnetic radiation includes X-ray, ultraviolet ray, visible ray, infrared ray, and radio waves.
23
23 (Wavelength)
20,000 m
23
Long wave
2,000 m
23 Intermediate wave
200 m
23 Radio waves
50 m
Short wave
10 m
Ultra-short wave
23 1 m
Microwave
1 mm
23 Far-infrared
25 µm Thermal rays
23 Mid-infrared Infrared rays

3 µm
Near-infrared
23
700 nm
Visible Visible rays Measured range by
spectrophotometer
23 400 nm
Near-ultraviolet
200 nm
23 Far-ultraviolet Ultraviolet rays
(vacuum ultraviolet)
50 nm
X-rays
23
5 pm
γ-ray
23 (0.05 Å)
(Note) 1 mm = 10-3 m, 1 µm = 10-6 m, 1 nm = 10-9 m, 1 pm = 10-12 m
Fig. 23.1 Types of electromagnetic waves
23-8 UV-1280
Wavelength is defined as the length of a single cycle and is usually indicated by a sign called lambda,
2
λ.
For the range of ultraviolet ray and visible lights, a unit called nm (nanometer) is used.
2
Wavelength (λ)
2
23
Wavelength (λ)
Fig. 23.2 Wavelength 2
Generally, rays of various wavelengths are mixed in the light emitted from a light source (although
some emit rays of specific wavelength such as laser light source, or others emit light of several
specific wavelengths such as mercury lamps). The light of a certain wavelength extracted selectively
by the use of a monochromator is called monochromatic light. Light that includes all the rays in the 23
wavelength range of visible rays is called white light.
The relation between wavelength and color is as follows: 23
23
Greenish blue
Near-infrared
Bluish green
Purplish red
Red
Ultraviolet
Orange
Yellow
23
Green
Violet
Blue
Wavelength 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 (nm) 23
Fig. 23.3 Wavelength and color of light 23

When white light is irradiated on some substance and the substance absorbs the blue light, it appears
yellow, which is the (additive) complementary color of blue. If blue monochromatic light is irradiated on 23
this substance, the light is absorbed and the substance appears black, indicating that no color exists.
23
Wavelength Complementary Wavelength Complementary
Color Color
(nm) color (nm) color
400 - 435 Violet Yellow green 560 - 580 Yellow green Violet
435 - 480 Blue Yellow 580 - 595 Yellow Blue
480 - 490 Greenish blue Orange 595 - 610 Orange Greenish blue
490 - 500 Bluish green Red 610 - 680 Red Bluish green
500 - 560 Green Purplish red 680 - 700 Purplish red Green
UV-1280 23-9
23 23.2.2 Ultraviolet/Visible Spectrum

The energy (E) of light can be expressed as follows.
E = ch/ λ
23
c is the velocity of light, h is Planck's constant, and λ is wavelength.
When light is irradiated on a substance, the light of certain wavelengths is absorbed according to the
23
molecule structure of that substance. This happens as the result of the fact that the electrons existing
at the ground state of the molecule absorb light energy and a transition to excitation state occurs. The
23 amount of absorption differs depending on wavelength, and so the absorption spectrum (the curve
measuring absorption when monochromatic light is irradiated to a substance with varying
23 wavelengths) becomes unique to that substance. The analysis of substances based on this principle
is called absorptiometry and this method allows (1) Identification, (2) Quantitative analysis, and (3)
Analysis of electron state. Also, the excited molecule loses energy due to heat and collision with other
23
molecules and returns to its original ground state. This process is called "radiationless transition".
In addition, the molecule may emit the absorbed light energy as light when returning to the ground
state. Fluorescent light and phosphorescence exhibit the behavior and analysis utilizing these
phenomena is called fluorometry.
23
Excited state 1
23
Radiationless transition
Excited state 2
Light
Fluorescence
Phosphorescence
Absorbance
23
23
Ground state
23
Fig. 23.4 Molecule energy
23
23
23
23-10 UV-1280
23.2.3 Bouguer-Beer's Law 2

This law, which is the basic principle of quantitative analysis, is also called Lambert-Beer's law.
2
Sample -kcl
Incident light Io concentration Transmission light I = Io x 10
c
2
23
Optical pass length I
2
Fig. 23.5 Bouguer-Beer's law
When light with the intensity of Io is irradiated on a certain substance and the light with the
intensity of I has transmitted, the following relational formula is established, where K stands for
proportional constant.
23
At this time, I/Io is called transmittance (T), I/Io × 100 is percent transmittance (%T) and (1/T) = log (Io/
I) is called absorbance (Abs).
23
T = I/Io = 10 -k•c•l
Abs = log (1/T)= log (Io/I) = k • c • l
As known from the above formula, transmittance is not proportional to the concentration of the 23
sample, but absorbance is proportional to the concentration of the sample (Beer's law) and is
proportional to light path length (Bouguer's law). Also, the proportional constant at the time when the
23
light path length is 1 cm and the concentration of object component is 1 mol/l is called molar
absorptivity and is represented by the sign of ε. This molar absorptivity becomes a value unique to the
substance under specific conditions. 23
To fulfil Bouguer-Beer's law, it is necessary to satisfy conditions such as being free from stray light,
emission, scattering, and reflection. 23
23
23
UV-1280 23-11
23 23.2.4 Qualitative Analysis and Quantitative Analysis

To analyze what a substance is and what substances it consists of is called qualitative analysis, while
analysis of the amount of these substances is called quantitative analysis.
23
 Spectrum and Chemical Structure (Qualitative Analysis)

23
The absorbance of ultraviolet/visible light is determined by chromophore (functional group that
absorbs light such as C = C, C = O, N = N, and N = O, having multiplet bonding) and auxochrome
23
(functional group that bonds with chromophore and changes its absorbance position and intensity
such as - OH, -NH2, and -SH, having non-bonding electron pair), and so is related to the chemical
23 structure. In this case, absorbance may change depending on introduction of substitution group and
types of solvent. Movement of the absorbance wavelength to a longer wavelength is called
23 "bathochromic movement", and its movement to a shorter wavelength is called "hypsochromic
movement". Also, an increase of absorbance is called the "hyperchromic effect" and a decrease is
called the "hypochromic effect".
 Colorimetric Analysis (Quantitative Analysis)

23
Analysis to perform quantitative analysis by comparing the color darkness of a substance is called
colorimetric analysis. When the substance is transparent, if absorbance exists in the invisible
23
ultraviolet/near infrared area, it is measured. The latter is broadly included in colorimetric analysis.
23
23
23
23
23
23
23-12 UV-1280
23.2.5 Calibration Curve 2

The quantitative method to measure the concentration of a sample with unknown concentration from
the absorption of a sample with known concentration is provided in two methods: (1) Calibration curve
2
method and (2) Standard additive method.
1 Calibration curve method 2 Standard additive method

2
Absorbance of unknown
Absorbance
sample
23
Absorbance
Concentration of 2
unknown sample
Concentration of
unknown sample
Standard sample concentration Standard sample concentration

23
Fig. 23.6 Calibration curve
23
In the calibration curve method, standard samples are operated according to an established method
and then measured for absorbance. A calibration curve is prepared by using the absorbance obtained
here in the vertical axis and the standard sample in the horizontal axis. There are times when the 23
calibration curve does not make a straight line such as when the solution to be measured is a
suspension. Although the calibration curve is sure to pass the origin when a blank solution is used, if it 23
is not used, the curve may not pass the origin. Next, the concentration of the object components in the
unknown sample is obtained using this calibration curve. 23
In the standard additive method, standard sample is added by stages to four or more samples of
measurement sample solution of the same concentration. Similarly to the calibration curve method, a
23
relation curve between added value and absorbance is prepared. The concentration of the object
component in the unknown sample is obtained from the point where the related curve crosses the
vertical axis. This method is applied only when the related curve is straight as far as to the low
23
concentration range.
23
Generally, extra-large absorbance wavelength is used as measurement wavelength for quantitative
analysis.
UV-1280 23-13
23 23.2.6 Solvent Selection

Generally when a sample is analyzed, it is measured as a solution. Accordingly, the type and the
concentration of the solvent must be adequate. A solvent that dissolves the sample well and that is
23
free from mutual action, has small absorbance in measurement wavelength range and has small
volatility is desired. A cell with a lid is necessary for volatile solvent.
23
As a solvent, water is excellent for measuring absorbance in visible/ultraviolet range, as it has no
absorbance itself. On the other hand, many of the normally used organic solvents are transparent to
23 the human eye, so it can be mistakenly believed that absorbance does not exist in ultra-violet range
either. The solvents and their available operating wavelength ranges are as follows:
23
200 250 300 350 400 450 (nm)
23
Water
Methanol
Ethanol
Isopropanol
23
Methylcyclohexan
Cyclohexan
23 Acetnitrile
Hexane
23 Dioxane
Glycerin
23 n-pentane
Dichloromethane
23 Chloroform
Metylacetate
Metyl formic acid

23
Carbon tetrachloride
Dimethyl sulfoxide
23
Benzene
23 Xylene
Toluene
Ethylene tetrachloride
Acetone
Bromoform
Nitro methane
Carbon disulfide
200 250 300 350 400 450 (nm)
Fig. 23.7 Wavelength range for solvent to be used (using a 10 mm cell)
23-14 UV-1280
23.2.7 Calibration Curve Curvature 2

A calibration curve is generally straight. However, it may bend due to various reasons. The probable
causes are 1 drift of measurement circuit, 2 fluorescent sample, 3 stray light, 4 broad band width,
2
and 5 measurement at the spectrum shoulder.
1 As a spectrophotometer has some drift immediately after power is supplied to it, it should be 2
allowed to warm up for 30 min. to one hour. Also, drift may be observed over a long period of
time, so it is important to check the wavelength accuracy and measurement accuracy periodically
using a filter etc. 2
2 When a sample emits fluorescent light and if that light enters the detector, the absorbance may
appear low and the amount of fluorescent light increases as sample concentration becomes
23
higher. As a result, the calibration curve may be bent toward the lower side. If this occurs, it is
necessary to reduce the influence of fluorescent light as much as possible by increasing the
distance between the sample and the detector or by inserting a mask between the sample and 2
the detector.
3 Stray light is the total of the light of the wavelength deviated from a certain spectrum width having
the set wavelength of the monochromator placed in the center and the light emitted from
monochromator, but does not transmit the sample and pass the side of the sample. For example,
with 0.1% of stray light included in the monochromatic light, when a sample with the wavelength 23
of λ o and absorbance of 2 (transmittance 1%) is measured, because 0.1% stray light is added in
addition to 1% of the light with the wavelength of λ o, the transmitted light will have 1.1% of
transmittance (absorbance 1.959), causing 2% error. As known from this, the higher the sample 23
absorbance is, the larger the error due to stray light becomes. To reduce stray light, it is generally
effective to form a double-monochromator by connecting two monochromators. Although it is
23
expensive due to the complex mechanism, the amount of stray light is reduced from one-fiftieth
(1/50) to one-one thousandth (1/1000) of that of normal single monochromator.
23
Table 23.1 Absorbance error due to stray light
Stray Absorbance
light 23
(%) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0
1 0.0222 0.0370 0.0595 0.1150 0.2081 0.2967 0.6150 1.0370 2.0000 23

0.5 0.0133 0.0190 0.0309 0.0615 0.1169 0.1739 0.4096 0.7759 1.7059
0.2 0.0045 0.0077 0.0126 0.0257 0.0507 0.0783 0.2119 0.4762 1.3213 23
0.1 0.0022 0.0038 0.0063 0.0130 0.0261 0.0409 0.1188 0.3005 1.0409
23
0.05 0.0011 0.0019 0.0032 0.0065 0.0132 0.0209 0.0635 0.1758 0.7799
0.02 0.0004 0.0007 0.0012 0.0026 0.0053 0.0085 0.0365 0.0790 0.4770
0.01 0.0002 0.0003 0.0006 0.0013 0.0026 0.0042 0.0134 0.0413 0.3009
0.005 0.0001 0.0001 0.0003 0.0006 0.0013 0.0021 0.0067 0.0211 0.1791
0.002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0003 0.0005 0.0008 0.0027 0.0085 0.0791
0.001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0002 0.0004 0.0013 0.0043 0.0413
0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0004 0.0043
(Test and Engineering Vol.9 No.9,702,1981)
UV-1280 23-15
4 A halogen lamp or deuterium lamp are used as the light source of a spectrophotometer.
23
Because these lamps emit a continuous spectrum, taking out 500 nm monochromatic light from
the monochromator does not mean that only the light of 500 nm is taken out, but the light in a
23 wavelength range having a certain width is taken out.
23
Energy of light
23
23
1/2 Band width
23
Wavelength width to be taken out
Band width 1 1/2 1/4

Area 1 1/4 1/16
23 Total amount of energy of light 1 1/4 1/16
Fig. 23.8 Band width and energy of light

23
Because the absorption coefficient of a substance differs depending on wavelength, even if the
central wavelength is the same, with different bandwidth, the wavelength width of the light to be taken
23 out varies. This causes the absorption coefficient to be changed in appearance and this results in
absorbance change. It is sufficient to set the bandwidth of a spectrophotometer from one-eighth (1/8)
to one-tenth (1/10) of the half width of a sample's absorbance spectrum. The half-width of the
23 absorbance spectrum means the width at the half of the peak of the absorbance spectrum. Because
the absorbance spectrum often has a broad half-width in colorimetric analysis, a bandwidth of 10 nm
is sufficient. Making the bandwidth extremely narrow generates large noise due to energy shortage
23
and may result in poor measurement accuracy. If the bandwidth is made large, the peak height
becomes low in appearance and this may cause the calibration curve to be bent.
23
23
Peak height actually measured
23
Real peak height
Spectrum band width

Real spectrum half-width
Fig. 23.9 Band width and peak height
23-16 UV-1280
23.2.8 Spectrophotometer Types 2

Spectrophotometers can be categorized broadly by optical systems as follows:
Single beam configuration

2
Measurement optical system
Double beam configuration Single detector configuration 2
Double detector configuration

2
 Single and Double Beam Configurations 23

• Single beam configuration
This configuration allows only one beam to pass through the sample compartment. First, set the 2
transmittance to 100 % or the absorbance to 0 using the cell filled with solvent. Then replace it with
the cell containing sample and perform measurement.
Cell
23
Light source
Monochromator Detector Amplifier Display
Sample compartment
23
Fig. 23.10 Single beam configuration 23

• Double beam configuration
This configuration divides the monochromatic light into two beams using mirrors, such as a rotating
23
mirror and a semi-transparent mirror, so as to make two beams, the sample beam and reference
beam. When the sample cell with sample in it is placed for the sample beam and the reference cell
with solvent in it is placed for reference beam in the sample compartment, each transmitted light 23
enters the detector. The feature of this configuration then is that transmittance and absorbance can
be measured once from the sample sign I and the reference sign Io simultaneously.
23
Reference
side 23
Cell 23
Light source
Monochromator Detector Amplifier Display
Sample
side
(Rotating mirror, semi- Sample compartment
transparent mirror)
Fig. 23.11 Double beam configuration
UV-1280 23-17
23  Single and Double Detector Configuration

• Double beam - single detector configuration
In this configuration, a sample beam and reference beam alternately enter one detector.
23 So unlike the double-detector configuration, the result is less likely to be influenced by the difference
in characteristics of the two detectors.
23
23 WI: Halogen lamp

D2: Deuterium lamp
L.M.: Light-source switching mirror
W: Window plate
23 S1-2: Slit
M1-10: Mirror
GR: Grating
F: Filter
23 CH: Chopper mirror
SEC: Sector mirror
PMT: Photomultiplier
23
23
Fig. 23.12 Double beam - single detector configuration (UV-2600 series)
23 • Double beam - double detector configuration

In this configuration, the sample beam and the reference beam enter different detectors
respectively. Thus, it is necessary to use two detectors with similar characteristics. The advantage
23 of this configuration is that it is not necessary to always pass two beams to the same detector as in
the case of the single detector configuration, and so a larger space is possible in the sample
compartment, convenient for measuring unclear samples by keeping them in close contact with the
23 light receiving surface. However, in the case of the photomultiplier, this configuration is not used
because matching the detector is difficult.
23
23 WI: Halogen lamp

D2: Deuterium lamp
W: Window plate
23 S1-2: Slit
M1-5: Mirror
GR: Grating
F: Filter
B.S.: Beam splitter
Sam: Sample side cell
Ref: Reference side cell
L: Lens
P.D.: Photodiode
Fig. 23.13 Double beam - double detector configuration (UV-1800)
23-18 UV-1280
 Single Monochromator and Double Monochromator 2

A single monochromator system has one monochromator and a double monochromator system has
two monochromators aligned in a series. Accordingly, when two monochromators are aligned in
2
parallel as in the case of a two-wavelength spectrophotometer, the system is not called a double-
monochromator even though it has two monochromators.
2
The double monochromator disperses the monochromatic light emerging from the first
monochromator again by means of the second monochromator. So stray light is greatly reduced and a
calibration curve of good linearity is obtained even though absorbance becomes high, allowing 2
analysis of samples with a broad concentration range.
23
WI: Halogen lamp

D2: Deuterium lamp
W: Window plate
pre-S: Slit 23
pre-GR: Grating
S1-2: Slit
M1-12: Mirror
GR: Grating 23
F: Filter
CH: Chopper mirror
SEC: Sector mirror
Sam: Sample side cell
Ref: Reference side cell
23
PMT: Photomultiplier
23
23
23
Fig. 23.14 Double monochromator configuration (UV-2700 series)
23
23
UV-1280 23-19
23
M3
S2
23
M4
G3,G4 G1,G2
M2
23 S1 WI
W1
M15
23 S3
F D2 M1
InGaAs.PbS M5
M7
M14 M13 Reference
Ref Beam M9
23
M11
W2,W3 M6
W4,W5
C.H.
M12
23 M10 Smp Sample

Beam M8
PMT
D2: Deuterium lamp WI: Halogen lamp

S1: Entrance Slit M1-15: Mirror
S2: Intermediate slit PbS: PbS cell
S3: Exit Slit InGaAs: InGaAs cell
F: Filter PM: Photomultiplier
23 G1, G2: Diffraction grating Reference: Reference side cell
(First monochromator) Sample: Sample side cell
G3, G4: Diffraction grating W1 ~ W3: Window plate (ø 30 mm)
(Second monochromator) W4 ~ W5: Window plate (ø 40 mm)
23 C.H.: Chopper mirror
Fig. 23.15 Double monochromator configuration (UV-3600 series)

23
23
23
23
23
23
23-20 UV-1280
23.3 23.3 Measurement System
23.3.1 Electrical System 2

A schematic of the electrical system for the UV-1280 is shown in Fig. 23.16.
The center of control is the microcomputer (CPU), which performs all controls of light sources,
2
switching of light sources, filter switching, wavelength scanning pulse motor, LCD monitor display,
keyboard and printer, USB interface etc.
2
After the sample-side beam and reference-side beam are picked up by detectors (photodiodes) and
converted into the voltage by the pre-amplifier, the signal is then fed into an A/D converter and finally
read by the CPU. 2
On energy-measurement mode (of spectrum mode) only the signal from the sample-side beam is
read. In this case, S/R switching status is "Normal". If the status "Reverse", only the signal from the 23
reference-side beam is read.
2
WI Reference Pre
PD
Cell Amp
Monochromator A/D Converter
Sample Cell 23
D2 Filter Wavelength
Control Control
Lamp 23
Control
CPU
23
LightSource
Switch Control
23
LCD Key
23
Fig. 23.16 Schematic of electrical system
23
23
23
UV-1280 23-21
23.4 List of Cells
23.4
Table 23.2 List of Optional Cells

23
Name shape Quartz (S cell) Glass (G cell) Q'ty Special holder
Square cell, optical length 10 mm A S200-3442 1 Not required
23
Square cell, matching type A S201-98716 2/sets Not required
Sealed-type square cell, optical length 10 mm B S200-34444 1 Not required
23 The microcell
mask for 6-cell
multi-cell holder
(206-66828) is
23
required for
measurement in a
6-cell multi-cell
Semi microcell, optical length 10 mm required
23 sample volume 1.0mL or more
C S200-66501 1 holder.
The cell holder
with mask for
microcell (204-
23 0689) is required
for measurement
in a sample
compartment unit.
Semi-micro black cell, optical length 10 mm
D S200-66551 1 Not required
required sample volume 1.0 mL or more
23 Super-micro cell
holder (S206-
14334-01) and
Ultra-micro black cell, optical path length: 5 mm
23 Required sample volume: 25 µl or more
K S208-92116 1 sample
compartment unit
(S206-60184-07)
are required
23
Super-micro cell
holder (S206-
14334-01) and
23 Super-micro black cell, with 10 mm optical path
L S200-66578-11 1 sample
and required sample volume of 50 µl more
compartment unit
(S206-60184-07)
23 are required
Super-micro cell
holder (S206-
23 Micro black cell, with 10 mm optical path and
14334-01) and
M S200-66578-12 1 sample
required sample volume of 50 µl more
compartment unit
(S206-60184-07)
23 are required
L (Optical.length) S200-34448
1
23 = 10 mm (quartz window) Cylindrical cell
E
S200-34472 holder (S204-
Cylindrical cell L = 20 mm 1 06216) and
(quartz window)
(OD dia.25) sample
(ID dia.22) S200-34447-01 compartment unit
L = 50 mm 1
(quartz window) (S206-60184-07)
F
S200-34473-02 are required
L = 100 mm 1
(quartz window)
23-22 UV-1280
23.4 List of Cells
Name shape Quartz (S cell) Glass (G cell) Q'ty Special holder 2

Rectangular
L = 20 mm S200-34446 1 absorption cell
holder (S204- 2
23118-01) and
Rectangular absorption cell*1 G
sample
compartment unit
L = 50 mm S200-34944 1 2
(S206-60184-07)
are required
L = 10 mm S200-66599-01 1 Rectangular
absorption cell 2
holder (wide cell)
L = 33 mm S200-66599-02 1
Rectangular absorption cell (S206-69421) and
G2
(wide cell) sample 23
L = 50 mm S200-66599-03 1
compartment unit
(S206-60184-07)
L = 100 mm S200-66599-04 1 are required
2
L = 1 mm S200-34660-01 1
The short optical
Short optical length cell L = 2 mm H S200-34655 1 length cell spacer
is required.
L = 5 mm S200-34449 1
for 1 mm S204-21473-03
Spacer for short optical length
for 2 mm J S204-21473-01 1 Not required 23
cell
for 5 mm S204-21473-02
*1 Any cell with an optical path length longer than L = 50 mm cannot be used for UV-1280. 23
23
23
23
23
23
23
UV-1280 23-23
23.4 List of Cells
23
Quartz cell Optical width
Name Shape Capacity Special holder Remarks
(S cell) of cell
Unnecessary,
23 For general
Flow cell, optical path length: but front plate
I S200-34670 1.5 mL 4×36 use Without
10 mm with holes is
tube
necessary
23 Square flow cell (micro) for
syringe sipper, light path
length: 10 mm N S208-92113 80 µl φ3 Unnecessary With tube
23 Standard required sample
volume: 1.0 ml or more
Square flow cell (semi-micro)
23 for syringe sipper, light path
length: 10 mm P S208-92005 390 µl 3.5 × 11 Unnecessary With tube
Standard required sample
volume: 5.0 ml or more
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23-24 UV-1280
23.4 List of Cells
A B C D E F 2
23
17
.4
G G2 H I J K
23
23
23
23
L M N P
Fig. 23.17 Optional Cell Shapes 23
23
23
23
UV-1280 23-25
23.5 Cleaning the Cell
23.5
Remove the sample from the cell immediately after the completion of measurement.
23
After measurement of water solution samples, wash the cell with water thoroughly, then wash it with ethanol
lightly, and let it dry well.
23
Wash with distilled water
23
Wash with ethanol
23
Dry
23
If the cell is stained, remove the stain by dipping the cell into cleaning agent or acid.
23
Dip into cleaning agent (30 °C - 50 °C) - Approx.10 minutes

23
23 Dip into diluted nitric acid + small amount of hydrogen peroxide - Approx. 30 minutes
23
23
Dry
23
If the cell gets stained with organic matter, first dip it into an organic solvent such as acetone and then wash it
with distilled water.
23 However, when washing the flow cell for the sipper 160 series (special accessory), it is required to replace the
"PVC tube for peristaltic pump" since the tube corrodes and hardens from the solvent.
Be sure to fill the flow cell with distilled water after washing. If the flow cell is left empty, the cell may get stained
23 and it becomes hard to clean afterwards.
23
23-26 UV-1280
10 Index
Index
UV-1280 IX-1
Index
Symbols
λ recalibration → See "wavelength recalibration". ......................................................................................... 10-4
.
λb → See "background measurement wavelength". ..................................................................................... 14-5

.
A
Abs Ratio (Absorbance ratio) ......................................................................................................................... 14-4
Abs. Coefficient ............................................................................................................................................ 14-16
Accumulation time (Data accum. time) ................................................................................................. 16-3, 16-9
Activity value (Activ.) ........................................................................................................................... 10-2, 10-15
Area Calculation .......................................................................................................................................... 15-21
ASC ............................................................................................................................................................... 20-8
Auto Print ................................................................................................................................................ 8-6, 12-3
Auto print (of the validation result) ............................................................................................................... 18-13
Auto Scal (Auto Scale) ............................................................................. 8-14, 10-13, 11-13, 12-12, 13-23, 15-6
Auto Validation .................................................................................................................................... 18-5, 18-38
AUTO ZERO .................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Auto-file Function ............................................................................................................................................. 8-9
B
background correction (BG Corr.) ......................................................................................................... 10-4, 14-5
background measurement wavelength (λβ) .......................................................................................... 10-4, 14-5
Baseline correction (Base Corr) ............................................................................. 7-4, 8-7, 9-3, 10-5, 13-5, 14-7
Baseline Flatness ........................................................................................................................................ 18-42
Baseline Stability ......................................................................................................................................... 18-45
BCA Method ............................................................................................................................14-3, 14-14, 14-15
Beep .............................................................................................................................................................. 16-3
BG Corr. → See "Background correction". .................................................................................................... 10-4
Biuret Method ..........................................................................................................................14-3, 14-14, 14-15
C
Calibration Curve Display .............................................................................................................................. 9-14
Calibration Curve Equation → See "Equation". ............................................................................................... 9-4
Calibration Curve modification (Change / Add / Delete / Chg Ord) ....................................................... 9-13, 9-15
CBB Method ............................................................................................................................14-3, 14-14, 14-15
Cell blank corr. .........................................................................................................................20-6, 20-12, 20-13
Change sample each λ .................................................................................................................................... 7-7
character input .......................................................................................................................................... 5-5, 9-8
Chg.User (Change User) → See "user selection". .......................................................................................... 3-5
Clock set ........................................................................................................................................................ 16-2
COM Port → See "Port". ................................................................................................................................ 19-2
Concentration input ............................................................................................................................. 9-10, 13-11
Concentration table ........................................................................................................................................ 9-13
control codes (of printer / external command) ...................................................................................... 5-15, 19-5
correlation coefficient ..................................................................................................................................... 9-15
CPS series ............................................................................................................................................ 20-2, 20-3
CSV Conv (CSV Conversion) ............................................................................................................... 4-13, 4-15
Curve data (in print format selection) ................................................................................................ 10-22, 11-21
Cycle (interval) ......................................................................................................................8-5, 10-6, 11-5, 12-5
IX-2 UV-1280
Index
D
Data accum. time → See "Accumulation time". ............................................................................................. 16-3
Data Disp (Data Display, List Display) ................................... 6-8, 7-12, 9-18, 10-17, 11-16, 13-18, 14-12, 14-21
Data Print ..................................................................................................................................................... 15-31
Data Proc (Data Processing) ....................................................................................................... 8-10, 12-8, 15-1
Decimal display ..................................................................................................................................... 16-2, 16-5
Derivative Operations (incl. Smoothing) ...................................................................................................... 15-12
Derivative Quantitation .................................................................................................................................. 9-22
Discriminator ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2, 11-4
Display mode .......................................................................................................................................... 8-6, 13-4
DNA quantitation .......................................................................................................................... 14-2, 14-4, 14-6
Draw curve → See "Print Waveform". ........................................................................................................... 5-15
Drive cell No. ................................................................................................................................................. 20-5
Driver → See "Virtual COM port driver". ........................................................................................................ 19-2
Dwell Time .......................................................................................................................................... 20-7, 20-10
E
Electromagnetic valve .................................................................................................................................... 20-7
Equation (of calibration curve) ............................................................................................................ 9-15, 14-20
ESC/P ................................................................................................................................................... 5-15, 16-8
External Commands ...................................................................................................................................... 19-5
F
File Copy / Delete .......................................................................................................................................... 4-13
File extensions ................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
File Load .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
File Management (File Mng) ................................................................................................................... 4-4, 4-11
File Save .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
File Selection / Canceling of File Selection .................................................................................................... 4-14
function key ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
G
GOTO WL ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-3
H
hard copy (screen copy) ................................................................................................................................ 5-15
Header .......................................................................................................................... 4-9, 4-13, 5-7, 5-10, 5-12
Hold-file-name function .................................................................................................................................... 5-4
I
Input Num ................................................................................................ 8-14, 10-13, 11-13, 12-12, 13-23, 15-6
Instrument Validation ..................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Interval → See "cycle". .................................................................................................................................... 8-5
K
Key-in ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-11
K-factor Method ........................................................................................................................................ 6-6, 9-6
L
lag time ................................................................................................................................................. 10-2, 10-7
Lamp life ........................................................................................................................................................ 17-2
Lamp usage time ........................................................................................................................................... 17-2
UV-1280 IX-3
Index
LCD contrast → See "contrast". ....................................................................................................................... 3-3

Light source ..........................................................................................................................8-6, 12-4, 16-2, 16-6
Light source switching wavelength ................................................................................................................ 16-6
Load Curv (Load Curve) .................................................................................................................................. 5-9
Load Data ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-9
Load Parm (Load Parameter) .......................................................................................................................... 5-9
Log out ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-4, 4-4
Login ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-4
Lowry Method ..........................................................................................................................14-2, 14-14, 14-15
M
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................. 17-1
Manu. Sip ....................................................................................................................................................... 20-8
Measurement input ........................................................................................................................................ 9-11
mixed sample ........................................................................................................................................ 13-2, 13-4
MPU (screen copy printer) .................................................................................................................... 5-15, 16-8
Multi-cell .....................................................................................................................................18-14, 20-2, 20-3
Multi-cell sequential measurement input ....................................................................................................... 9-12
Multi-point calibration curve ............................................................................................................................. 9-7
N
No. of Components ............................................................................................................................... 13-2, 13-4
No. of Meas. ......................................................................................................................................... 9-3, 14-17
No. of rinses ........................................................................................................................................ 20-8, 20-10
No. of scans ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
No. of Std ................................................................................................................................................ 9-7, 13-4
Noise Level .................................................................................................................................................. 18-38
Number of storable files ................................................................................................................................... 5-2
O
One-wavelength method .................................................................................................................................. 9-1
Overlay ................................................................................................................................................... 8-6, 13-4
P
password .........................................................................................................................................3-4, 3-5, 17-7
Password change ............................................................................................................................... 17-8, 17-11
PC Ctrl ...........................................................................................................................................4-4, 17-8, 19-1
PCL ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-15, 16-8
Peak Detection ............................................................................................................................................ 15-17
Photometric Accuracy .................................................................................................................................. 18-21
Photometric Repeatability ............................................................................................................................ 18-27
Point Pick ..................................................................................................................................................... 15-26
Port (COM Port) ............................................................................................................................................. 19-2
Print init. Satus ............................................................................................................................................. 18-14
Print numeric data for every measurement .................................................................................................... 5-15
Print waveform (draw curve) .....................................5-15, 8-16, 8-17, 10-14, 10-19, 11-14, 11-18, 12-13, 12-14
Print waveform data ....................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Printer (Printer Setting) ......................................................................................................................... 16-2, 16-7
Prnt Data (Print using function keys) ............................................................................................................. 5-15
Protein quantitation ................................................................................................. 14-2, 14-3, 14-4, 14-6, 14-16
Protocol .......................................................................................................................................................... 19-5
Pump speed ........................................................................................................................................ 20-7, 20-10
pure sample .......................................................................................................................................... 13-2, 13-4
Purge time ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-8
Purge volume ............................................................................................................................................... 20-10
IX-4 UV-1280
Index
R
rate interval ........................................................................................................................................... 11-2, 11-6
rate time ................................................................................................................................................ 10-2, 10-7
Reading with Cursor ................................................................................ 8-12, 10-11, 11-11, 12-10, 13-21, 15-4
Reagent blank corr. ................................................................................................................. 20-5, 20-11, 20-13
Rec. range .................................................................................................................. 8-3, 10-5, 11-3, 12-3, 13-3
Restore .................................................................................................... 8-14, 10-13, 11-13, 12-12, 13-23, 15-6
S
Sample No. (Smpl No.) ........................................................................................................................... 6-4, 9-16
Sample recovery .......................................................................................................................................... 20-10
Sav Curve (Save Curve) .................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Sav Param (Save Parameter) .......................................................................................................................... 5-2
Save Data ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-2
Scan pitch ............................................................................................................................................... 8-4, 13-3
Scan range ............................................................................................................................................. 8-3, 13-3
Scan speed ............................................................................................................................................. 8-3, 13-4
screen copy → See "hard copy". ..................................................................................................................... 3-3
screen copy printer → See "MPU". ................................................................................................................ 5-15
Security .......................................................................................................................................................... 17-4
Semi-Auto validation ........................................................................................................................... 18-3, 18-21
Sequential ............................................................................................................................................... 8-6, 13-4
Single point calibration curve ........................................................................................................................... 9-7
Sip volume ................................................................................................................................................... 20-10
Sipper ...................................................................................................................................7-8, 20-2, 20-7, 20-9
Sipping time ................................................................................................................................................... 20-7
smoothing → See "Derivative Operations". ................................................................................................. 15-12
Standard Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 16-4
Standard type ................................................................................................................................................ 13-4
Start program ........................................................................................................................................ 16-2, 16-4
Stored parameter files ................................................................................................................................... 16-4
Stray Light .................................................................................................................................................... 18-33
T
Table data (in print format selection) ................................................................................................ 10-21, 11-20
Three-wavelength Quantitation ............................................................................................................. 9-20, 9-21
Time scale ................................................................................................................................... 10-5, 11-3, 12-3
Two-wavelength Quantitation ........................................................................................................................ 9-20
U
Undo .............................................................................................................................................................. 15-3
Unit (Concentration Unit) ..................................................................................................9-8, 14-2, 14-16, 14-18
USB Memory ................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
user ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-4, 17-4
user selection (Chg user) ................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Utilities Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 16-1
UV Method (UV Absorption Method) .................................................................................................. 14-3, 14-16
V
Validity (of validation products) .................................................................................................................... 18-17
Valley ........................................................................................................................................................... 15-17
Virtual COM port driver .................................................................................................................................. 19-2
UV-1280 IX-5
Index
W
wavelength recalibration (λ recalibration) ...................................................................................................... 17-3
WL Accuracy D2 (Wavelength Accuracy D2) ............................................................................................... 18-49
WL Repeatability D2 (Wavelength Repeatability D2) ................................................................................... 18-53
Z
Zero intercept ................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Zoom ........................................................................................................ 8-13, 10-12, 11-12, 12-11, 13-22, 15-5
IX-6 UV-1280

Instruction Manual: Shimadzu Spectrophotometer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual: Shimadzu Spectrophotometer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

206-98410C

Read this manual thoroughly before using the instrument.

© 2014-2020 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.

The symbol used in this manual is as follows:

Indicates information provided to improve product performance.

^ Indicates the location of related reference information.

The UV-1280 is an ultraviolet/visible/near-infrared spectrophotometer.

(2) Read and follow the procedures in the instruction manual.

(4) Do NOT disassemble or modify this instrument without permission.

Installation Site Precautions

Power Supply Voltage Power Short circuit

• Ground the instrument

• Never remove the main cover.

• Replacement parts must be of the specifications given in "1.1 UV-1280 Configuration"

Operation at Power Outage

Ultraviolet Light Hazard

 Residual Risk Map

Residual Risk with No Specific Mechanical Location

The weight of the "Installation Site

Shimadzu provides the following warranty for this product.

Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment

This instrument and D2 lamp must be disposed of as industrial wastes.

For California, USA Only

Descriptions in this section apply only to the following models:

 EN55011 Emissions (Electromagnetic Interference)

Chapter 3 Before Operating...

Chapter 4 Mode Selection

Chapter 5 Shared Operations

Chapter 6 Photometric (One-Wavelength)

Chapter 7 Photometric 8λ (Multi-Wavelength)

Chapter 11 Kinetics Rate

Chapter 12 Time Scan

Chapter 13 Multi-component Quantitation

Chapter 15 Data Processing

Chapter 20 Sample Module Control

Chapter 21 Maintenance & Inspection

3 UV-1280 Instruction Manual 206-98410 1

1.2.1 UV-1280 Main Body, Front and Top Views 1

Fig. 1.2 Front and Top Views of UV-1280 1

1 LCD This displays the operation menus and measurement results.

1 1.2.2 UV-1280 Main Body, Rear View

1 Fig. 1.3 UV-1280 Rear View

1 No. Name Description

1.2.3 Sample Compartment 1

No. Name Description

3 This is the key that is used to change the current wavelength.

7 Use this key to display to the previous screen.

9 Use this key to output a hard copy of the screen.

0 Use these keys to enter numeric values.

1.2.5 Light Source Compartment 1

No. Name Description

* Light source switch wavelength

2 2.1.1 Installation Requirements and Preparation

2.1.2 Installation Space 2

2 2.2.1 Verifying Power Supply Voltage

Power Supply Voltage

2.2.2 Connecting to the Power Outlet 2

Handle the power supply cable carefully.

Should the power supply cable become

Verify that the power switch of the UV-1280 is

2 Check to be sure that the D2 lamp is seated well in

If the lamp is mounted at an angle or there is any

3 Reinstall the light source compartment cover.